Pseudobulbar affect: No laughing matter

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:18
Display Headline
Pseudobulbar affect: No laughing matter

Pathological laughter and crying— pseudobulbar affect (PBA)—is a disor­der of emotional expression character­ized by uncontrollable outbursts of laughter or crying without an environmental trigger. Persons with PBA are at an increased risk of depressive and anxiety symptoms associated with an inappropriate outburst of emotion1; such emotional acts might be incongruent with their underlying emotional state.

When should you consider PBA?
Consider PBA in patients with new-onset emotional lability in the presence of certain neurologic conditions. PBA is most common in patients with amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and stroke, in which an incidence of >50% has been estimated.2 Other conditions asso­ciated with PBA include Parkinson’s disease, multiple sclerosis, frontotemporal dementia, traumatic brain injury, Alzheimer’s disease, epilepsy, normal pressure hydrocephalus, progressive supranuclear palsy, Wilson dis­ease, and neurosyphilis.3


Avoid PBA misdiagnosis
Depression is the most common PBA mis­diagnosis (Table). However, many clinical features distinguish PBA episodes from de­pressive symptoms; the most prominent dif­ference is duration. Depressive symptoms, including depressed mood, typically last weeks to months, but a PBA episode lasts seconds or minutes. In addition, crying, as a symptom of PBA, might be unrelated or ex­aggerated relative to the patient’s mood, but crying is congruent with subjective mood in depression. Other symptoms of depres­sion—fatigue, anorexia, insomnia, anhedo­nia, and feelings of hopelessness and guilt— are not associated with pseudobulbar affect.

PBA also can be differentiated from bi­polar disorder (BD) with rapid cycling or mixed mood episodes because of PBA’s relatively brief duration of laughing or cry­ing episodes—with no mood disturbance between episodes—compared with the sustained changes in mood, cognition, and behavior seen in BD.


Options for treating PBA
Serotonergic therapies, such as amitriptyline and fluoxetine, may exert effects by increas­ing serotonin in the synapse; dextrometho­rphan may act via antiglutamatergic effects at N-methyl-d-aspartate receptors and sig­ma-1 receptors.4 Dextromethorphan bind­ing is most prominent in the brainstem and cerebellum, brain areas known to be rich in sigma-1 receptors and key sites implicated in the pathophysiology of PBA. Although the precise mechanisms by which dextro­methorphan ameliorates PBA are unknown, modulation of excessive glutamatergic trans­mission within corticopontine-cerebellar circuits may contribute to its benefits.

Disclosure
The author reports no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. Tateno A, Jorge RE, Robinson RG. Pathological laughing and crying following traumatic brain injury. J Neuropsychiatry Clin Neurosci. 2004;16(4):426-434.
2. Miller A, Pratt H, Schiffer RB. Pseudobulbar affect: the spectrum of clinical presentations, etiologies and treatments. Expert Rev Neurother. 2011;11(7):1077-1088.
3. Haiman G, Pratt H, Miller A. Brain responses to verbal stimuli among multiple sclerosis patients with pseudobulbar affect. J Neurol Sci. 2008;271(1-2):137-147.
4. Werling LL, Keller A, Frank JG, et al. A comparison of the binding profiles of dextromethorphan, memantine, fluoxetine and amitriptyline: treatment of involuntary emotional expression disorder. Exp Neurol. 2007;207(2): 248-257.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Shailesh Jain, MD, MPH, ABDA
Associate Professor and Regional Chair
Department of Psychiatry
Texas Tech Health Science
Center, Permian Basin
Odessa, Texas

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(4)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
66
Legacy Keywords
depression, anxiety, pseudobulbar affect (PBA)
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Shailesh Jain, MD, MPH, ABDA
Associate Professor and Regional Chair
Department of Psychiatry
Texas Tech Health Science
Center, Permian Basin
Odessa, Texas

Author and Disclosure Information

Shailesh Jain, MD, MPH, ABDA
Associate Professor and Regional Chair
Department of Psychiatry
Texas Tech Health Science
Center, Permian Basin
Odessa, Texas

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Pathological laughter and crying— pseudobulbar affect (PBA)—is a disor­der of emotional expression character­ized by uncontrollable outbursts of laughter or crying without an environmental trigger. Persons with PBA are at an increased risk of depressive and anxiety symptoms associated with an inappropriate outburst of emotion1; such emotional acts might be incongruent with their underlying emotional state.

When should you consider PBA?
Consider PBA in patients with new-onset emotional lability in the presence of certain neurologic conditions. PBA is most common in patients with amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and stroke, in which an incidence of >50% has been estimated.2 Other conditions asso­ciated with PBA include Parkinson’s disease, multiple sclerosis, frontotemporal dementia, traumatic brain injury, Alzheimer’s disease, epilepsy, normal pressure hydrocephalus, progressive supranuclear palsy, Wilson dis­ease, and neurosyphilis.3


Avoid PBA misdiagnosis
Depression is the most common PBA mis­diagnosis (Table). However, many clinical features distinguish PBA episodes from de­pressive symptoms; the most prominent dif­ference is duration. Depressive symptoms, including depressed mood, typically last weeks to months, but a PBA episode lasts seconds or minutes. In addition, crying, as a symptom of PBA, might be unrelated or ex­aggerated relative to the patient’s mood, but crying is congruent with subjective mood in depression. Other symptoms of depres­sion—fatigue, anorexia, insomnia, anhedo­nia, and feelings of hopelessness and guilt— are not associated with pseudobulbar affect.

PBA also can be differentiated from bi­polar disorder (BD) with rapid cycling or mixed mood episodes because of PBA’s relatively brief duration of laughing or cry­ing episodes—with no mood disturbance between episodes—compared with the sustained changes in mood, cognition, and behavior seen in BD.


Options for treating PBA
Serotonergic therapies, such as amitriptyline and fluoxetine, may exert effects by increas­ing serotonin in the synapse; dextrometho­rphan may act via antiglutamatergic effects at N-methyl-d-aspartate receptors and sig­ma-1 receptors.4 Dextromethorphan bind­ing is most prominent in the brainstem and cerebellum, brain areas known to be rich in sigma-1 receptors and key sites implicated in the pathophysiology of PBA. Although the precise mechanisms by which dextro­methorphan ameliorates PBA are unknown, modulation of excessive glutamatergic trans­mission within corticopontine-cerebellar circuits may contribute to its benefits.

Disclosure
The author reports no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Pathological laughter and crying— pseudobulbar affect (PBA)—is a disor­der of emotional expression character­ized by uncontrollable outbursts of laughter or crying without an environmental trigger. Persons with PBA are at an increased risk of depressive and anxiety symptoms associated with an inappropriate outburst of emotion1; such emotional acts might be incongruent with their underlying emotional state.

When should you consider PBA?
Consider PBA in patients with new-onset emotional lability in the presence of certain neurologic conditions. PBA is most common in patients with amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and stroke, in which an incidence of >50% has been estimated.2 Other conditions asso­ciated with PBA include Parkinson’s disease, multiple sclerosis, frontotemporal dementia, traumatic brain injury, Alzheimer’s disease, epilepsy, normal pressure hydrocephalus, progressive supranuclear palsy, Wilson dis­ease, and neurosyphilis.3


Avoid PBA misdiagnosis
Depression is the most common PBA mis­diagnosis (Table). However, many clinical features distinguish PBA episodes from de­pressive symptoms; the most prominent dif­ference is duration. Depressive symptoms, including depressed mood, typically last weeks to months, but a PBA episode lasts seconds or minutes. In addition, crying, as a symptom of PBA, might be unrelated or ex­aggerated relative to the patient’s mood, but crying is congruent with subjective mood in depression. Other symptoms of depres­sion—fatigue, anorexia, insomnia, anhedo­nia, and feelings of hopelessness and guilt— are not associated with pseudobulbar affect.

PBA also can be differentiated from bi­polar disorder (BD) with rapid cycling or mixed mood episodes because of PBA’s relatively brief duration of laughing or cry­ing episodes—with no mood disturbance between episodes—compared with the sustained changes in mood, cognition, and behavior seen in BD.


Options for treating PBA
Serotonergic therapies, such as amitriptyline and fluoxetine, may exert effects by increas­ing serotonin in the synapse; dextrometho­rphan may act via antiglutamatergic effects at N-methyl-d-aspartate receptors and sig­ma-1 receptors.4 Dextromethorphan bind­ing is most prominent in the brainstem and cerebellum, brain areas known to be rich in sigma-1 receptors and key sites implicated in the pathophysiology of PBA. Although the precise mechanisms by which dextro­methorphan ameliorates PBA are unknown, modulation of excessive glutamatergic trans­mission within corticopontine-cerebellar circuits may contribute to its benefits.

Disclosure
The author reports no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. Tateno A, Jorge RE, Robinson RG. Pathological laughing and crying following traumatic brain injury. J Neuropsychiatry Clin Neurosci. 2004;16(4):426-434.
2. Miller A, Pratt H, Schiffer RB. Pseudobulbar affect: the spectrum of clinical presentations, etiologies and treatments. Expert Rev Neurother. 2011;11(7):1077-1088.
3. Haiman G, Pratt H, Miller A. Brain responses to verbal stimuli among multiple sclerosis patients with pseudobulbar affect. J Neurol Sci. 2008;271(1-2):137-147.
4. Werling LL, Keller A, Frank JG, et al. A comparison of the binding profiles of dextromethorphan, memantine, fluoxetine and amitriptyline: treatment of involuntary emotional expression disorder. Exp Neurol. 2007;207(2): 248-257.

References


1. Tateno A, Jorge RE, Robinson RG. Pathological laughing and crying following traumatic brain injury. J Neuropsychiatry Clin Neurosci. 2004;16(4):426-434.
2. Miller A, Pratt H, Schiffer RB. Pseudobulbar affect: the spectrum of clinical presentations, etiologies and treatments. Expert Rev Neurother. 2011;11(7):1077-1088.
3. Haiman G, Pratt H, Miller A. Brain responses to verbal stimuli among multiple sclerosis patients with pseudobulbar affect. J Neurol Sci. 2008;271(1-2):137-147.
4. Werling LL, Keller A, Frank JG, et al. A comparison of the binding profiles of dextromethorphan, memantine, fluoxetine and amitriptyline: treatment of involuntary emotional expression disorder. Exp Neurol. 2007;207(2): 248-257.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(4)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(4)
Page Number
66
Page Number
66
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Pseudobulbar affect: No laughing matter
Display Headline
Pseudobulbar affect: No laughing matter
Legacy Keywords
depression, anxiety, pseudobulbar affect (PBA)
Legacy Keywords
depression, anxiety, pseudobulbar affect (PBA)
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

The first of 2 parts: A practical approach to subtyping depression among your patients

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:02
Display Headline
The first of 2 parts: A practical approach to subtyping depression among your patients

Depression carries a wide differential diagnosis. Practitioners sometimes think polarity is the fundamental distinction when they conceptualize depression as a clinical entity; in fact, many nosologic frameworks have been described for defining and subtyping clinically meaningful forms of depression, and each waxed and waned in popularity.

Kraepelin, writing in the early 20th century, linked manic-depres­sive illness with “the greater part of the morbid states termed mel­ancholia,”1 but many features other than polarity remain important components of depression, and those features often carry implications for how individual patients respond to treatment.

In this 2-part article [April and May 2014 issues], I summarize in­formation about clinically distinct subtypes of depression, as they are recognized within diagnostic systems or as descriptors of treatment outcomes for particular subgroups of patients. My focus is on practical considerations for assessing and managing depression. Because many forms of the disorder respond inadequately to initial antidepressant treatment, optimal “next-step” pharmacotherapy, after nonresponse or partial response, often hinges on clinical subtyping.

The first part of this article examines major depressive disorder (MDD), minor depression, chronic depression, depression in bipolar disorder, depression that is severe or mild, and psychotic depression. Treatments for these subtypes for which there is evidence, or a clinical rationale, are given in the Table.

The subtypes of depression that I’ll discuss in the second part of the article are listed on page 47.

Major and minor depression
MDD has been the focus of most drug tri­als seeking FDA approval. As a syndrome, MDD is defined by a constellation of fea­tures that are related not only to mood but also to sleep, energy, cognition, motiva­tion, and motor behavior, persisting for ≥2 weeks.

DSM-5 has imposed few changes to the basic definition of MDD:
   • bereavement (the aftermath of death of a loved one), formerly an exclusion cri­terion, no longer precludes making a diag­nosis of MDD when syndromal criteria are otherwise fulfilled
   • “with anxious distress” is a new course specifier that designates promi­nent anxiety features (feeling worried, restless, tense, or keyed up; fearful of losing control or something terrible happening)
   • “with mixed features” is a new course specifier pertinent when ≥3 mania or hy­pomania symptoms coexist (that is, might be a subsyndromal mania or hypomania) with a depressive syndrome; the mixed features specifier can be applied to de­pressed patients whether or not they have ever had a manic or hypomanic episode, but MDD—rather than bipolar disorder— remains the overarching diagnosis, unless criteria have ever been met for a full mania or hypomania.

More than 2 dozen medications are FDA-approved to treat MDD. Evidence-based psychotherapies (eg, cognitive-behavioral therapy [CBT] and interpersonal therapy), as adjuncts to pharmacotherapy, further improve outcomes, but with only modest additional effect.2

Minor depression. Depressive states that involve 2 to 4 associated symptoms last­ing ≥2 weeks but <2 years are sometimes described as minor depression, captured within DSM-5 as “depression not else­where defined.” The terminology of so-called “minor depression” generally is shunned, in part because it might wrongly connote low severity and therefore dis­courage treatment—even though it con­fers more than a 5-fold increase in risk of MDD.3 

Chronicity
DSM-IV-TR identified long-standing de­pression by 2 constructs:
   • chronic major depression (an episode of MDD lasting ≥2 years in adults, ≥1 year in children and adolescents)
   • dysthymic disorder (2 to 4 depressive symptoms for ≥2 years in adults and ≥1 year in children and adolescents), affecting 3% to 6% of adults and carrying a 2-fold increased risk of MDD, eventually.4

Depression that begins as dysthymic disorder and blossoms into syndromal MDD is described as “double depres­sion”—although it is not recognized as a unique condition in any edition of the DSM. Subsequent incomplete recovery may revert to dysthymic disorder. DSM-5 has subsumed chronic major depression and dysthymia under the unified heading of persistent depressive disorder.

There are no FDA-approved drugs for treating dysthymia. A meta-analysis of 9 controlled trials of off-label use of antide­pressants to treat dysthymia revealed an overall response rate of 52.4%, compared with 29.9% for placebo.5 Notably, although the active drug response rate in these stud­ies is comparable to what seen in MDD, the placebo response rate was approxi­mately 10% lower than what was seen in major depression.

Positive therapeutic findings (typically, treatment for 6 to 12 weeks) have been reported in so-called “pure” dysthymic disorder with sertraline, fluoxetine, imip­ramine, ritanserin, moclobemide (not ap­proved for use in the United States), and phenelzine; the results of additional, posi­tive placebo-controlled studies support the utility of duloxetine6 and paroxetine.7 Randomized trials have reported negative findings for desipramine,8 fluoxetine,9 and escitalopram10 escitalopram10—although the sample size in these latter studies might have been too small to detect a drug-placebo difference.

 

 

In dysthymic and minor-depressive middle-age and older adult men who have a low serum level of testosterone, hormone replacement was shown to be superior to placebo in several randomized trials.11 Studies of adjunctive atypical antipsy­chotics for dysthymic disorder are scarce; a Cochrane review identified controlled data only with amisulpride (not approved for use in the United States), which yielded a modest therapeutic effect.12

Polarity
In recent years, depression in bipolar dis­order (BD) has been contrasted with uni­polar MDD based on a difference in:
   • duration (briefer in BD)
   • severity (worse in BD)
   • risk of suicide (higher)
   • comorbidity (more extensive)
   • family history (often present for BD and highly recurrent depression)
   • treatment outcome (generally less favorable).

DSM-5 has at least somewhat blurred the distinctions in polarity by way of the new construct of “major depression with mixed features” (see the discussion of MDD above), identifiable even when a person has never had a full manic or hypo­manic episode.

No randomized trials have been con­ducted to identify the best treatments for such presentations, which has invited ex­trapolation from the literature in regard to bipolar mixed episodes, and suggesting that 1) some mood stabilizers (eg, divalproex) might have value and 2) antidepres­sants might exacerbate manic symptoms.

Perhaps most noteworthy in regard to treating bipolar depression is the unresolved, but hotly debated, contro­versy over whether and, if so, when, an antidepressant is inappropriate (based on concerns about possible induction or exac­erbation of manic symptoms). In addition, nearly all of the large, randomized con­trolled trials of antidepressants for bipolar depression have shown that they offer no advantage over placebo.

Some authors argue that a lack of re­sponse to antidepressants might, itself, be a “soft” indicator of “bipolarity.” However, nonresponse to antidepressants should prompt a wider assessment of features other than polarity—including psychosis, anxiety, substance abuse, a personality disorder, psychiatric adverse effects from concomitant medications, medical comor­ bidity, adequacy of trials of medical ther­apy, and potential non-adherence to such trials—to account for poor antidepressant outcomes.

Severity
Severity of depression warrants consider­ation when formulating impressions about the nature and treatment of all presenta­tions of depression.

High-severity forms prompt decisions about treatment setting (inpatient or out­patient); suicide assessment; and thera­peutic modalities (eg, electroconvulsive therapy is more appropriate than psycho­therapy for catatonic depression).

Mild forms. A recent meta-analysis of 6 randomized trials (each of >6 weeks’ du­ration) of antidepressants for mild de­pression demonstrated that these agents exert only a modest effect compared with placebo, owing largely to higher placebo-responsivity in mild depressive episodes than in moderate and severe episodes.13 In contrast, another meta-analysis of sub­jects who had “mild” baseline depression severity scores found that antidepressant medication had greater efficacy than pla­cebo in 4 of 6 randomized trials.14 Higher depression severity levels typically dimin­ish the placebo response rate but also re­duce the magnitude of drug efficacy.

Psychosis
Before DSM-III, psychotic (as opposed to neurotic) depression was perhaps the key nosologic distinction when characteriz­ing forms of depression. The presence of psychosis and related components (eg, mood-congruence) is closely linked with the severity of depression (high) and prog­nosis and longitudinal outcome (poorer), and has implications for treatment (Table).


 

Bottom Line
Depressive disorders comprise a range of conditions that can be viewed along many dimensions, including polarity, chronicity, recurrence, psychosis, treatment resistance, comorbidity, and atypicality, among other classifications. Clinical characteristics vary across subtypes—and so do corresponding preferred treatments, which should be tailored to the needs of each of your patients.


Related Resources

• Goldberg JF, Thase ME. Monoamine oxidase inhibi­tors revisited: what you should know. J Clin Psychiatry. 2013;74(2):189-191.
• Goldberg JF. Antidepressants in bipolar disorder: 7 myths and realities. Current Psychiatry. 2010;9(5):41-49.
• Ketamine cousin rapidly lifts depression without side ef­fects. National Institute of Mental Health. http://www. nimh.nih.gov/news/science-news/2013/ketamine-cousin-rapidly-lifts-depression-without-side-effects.shtml. Published May 23, 2013. Accessed March 20, 2014.
• Research Domain Criteria (RDoC). National Institute of Mental Health. http://www.nimh.nih.gov/research-priorities/rdoc/index.shtml?u tm_ source = govdelivery&utm_medium=email&utm_campaign= govdelivery. Accessed March 20, 2014.

Drug Brand Names
Amisulpride • Amazeo,                                  Lurasidone • Latuda
Amival, Amipride, Sulpitax                             Mirtazapine • Remeron
   Aripiprazole • Abilify                                   Moclobemide • Amira,
Armodafinil • Nuvigil                                        Aurorix, Clobemix,
Bupropion • Wellbutrin                                     Depnil, Manerix
Desipramine • Norpramin                               Modafinil • Provigil
Divalproex • Depakote,                                  Olanzapine/fluoxetine
Depakene                                                        • Symbyax
Duloxetine • Cymbalta                                    Paroxetine • Paxil
Escitalopram • Lexapro                                   Phenelzine • Nardil
Fluoxetine • Prozac                                         Pramipexole • Mirapex
Imipramine • Tofranil                                     Quetiapine • Seroquel
Ketamine • Ketalar                                         Riluzole • Rilutek
Lamotrigine • Lamictal                                    Sertraline • Zoloft
Lithium • Eskalith, Lithobid                             Vortioxetine • Brintellix

 

 

Disclosure
Dr. Goldberg has been a consultant to Avanir Pharmaceuticals and Merck; has served on the speakers’ bureau for AstraZeneca, Merck, Novartis, Sunovion
Pharmaceuticals, and Takeda and Lundbeck; and has received royalties from American Psychiatric Publishing and honoraria from Medscape and WebMD.


Editor’s note:
The second part of Dr. Goldberg’s review of depression subtypes—fo­cusing on “situational,” treatment-resistant, melancholic, agitated, anxious, and atypical depression; depression occurring with a sub­stance use disorder; premenstrual dysphoric disorder; and seasonal affective disorder—will appear in the May 2014 issue of Current Psychiatry.

References


1. Kraepelin E. Manic-depressive insanity and paranoia. Barclay RM, trans. Robertson GM, ed. Edinburgh, Scotland: E&S Livingstone; 1921:1.
2. Cuijpers P, Dekker J, Hollon SD, et al. Adding psychotherapy to pharmacotherapy in the treatment of depressive disorders in adults: a meta-analysis. J Clin Psychiatry. 2009;70(9):1219-1229.
3. Fogel J, Eaton WW, Ford DE. Minor depression as a predictor of the first onset of major depressive disorder over a 15-year follow-up. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 2006; 113(1):36-43.
4. Cuijpers P, de Graaf R, van Dorsselaer S. Minor depression: risk profiles, functional disability, health care use and risk of developing major depression. J Affect Disord. 2004;79(1-3):71-79.
5. Levkovitz Y, Tedeschini E, Papakostas GI. Efficacy of antidepressants for dysthymia: a meta-analysis of placebo-controlled randomized trials. J Clin Psychiatry. 2011;72(4):509-514.
6. Hellerstein DJ, Stewart JW, McGrath PJ, et al. A randomized controlled trial of duloxetine versus placebo in the treatment of nonmajor chronic depression. J Clin Psychiatry. 2012;73(7):984-991.
7. Ravindran AV, Cameron C, Bhatla R, et al. Paroxetine in the treatment of dysthymic disorder without co-morbidities: a double-blind, placebo-controlled, flexible-dose study. Asian J Psychiatry. 2013;6(2):157-161.
8. Stewart JW, McGrath PJ, Liebowitz MR, et al. Treatment outcome validation of DSM-III depressive subtypes. Clinical usefulness in outpatients with mild to moderate depression. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1985;42(12):1148-1153.
9. Serrano-Blanco A, Gabarron E, Garcia-Bayo I, et al. Effectiveness and cost-effectiveness of antidepressant treatment in primary health care: a six-month randomised study comparing fluoxetine to imipramine. J Affect Disord. 2006;91(2-3):153-163.
10. Hellerstein DJ, Batchelder ST, Hyler S, et al. Escitalopram versus placebo in the treatment of dysthymic disorders. Int Clin Psychopharmacol. 2010;25(3):143-148.
11. Seidman SN, Orr G, Raviv G, et al. Effects of testosterone replacement in middle-aged men with dysthymia: a randomized, placebo-controlled clinical trial. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 2009;29(3):216-221.
12. Komossa K, Depping AM, Gaudchau A, et al. Second-generation antipsychotics for major depressive disorder and dysthymia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2010; 8:(12):CD008121.
13. Fournier JC, DeRubeis RJ, Hollom SD, et al. Antidepressant drug effects and depression severity: a patient-level meta-analysis. JAMA. 2010;303(1):47-53.
14. Stewart JA, Deliyannides DA, Hellerstein DJ, et al. Can people with nonsevere major depression benefit from antidepressant medication? J Clin Psychiatry. 2012;73(4):518-525.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Joseph F. Goldberg, MD
Clinical Professor of Psychiatry
Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai
New York, New York
Director, Affective Disorders Research Program
Silver Hill Hospital
New Canaan, Connecticut

Audio / Podcast
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(4)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
43-47, 65
Legacy Keywords
depression, subtyping, polarity, major depressive disorder, minor depression, bipolar,
Sections
Audio / Podcast
Audio / Podcast
Author and Disclosure Information

Joseph F. Goldberg, MD
Clinical Professor of Psychiatry
Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai
New York, New York
Director, Affective Disorders Research Program
Silver Hill Hospital
New Canaan, Connecticut

Author and Disclosure Information

Joseph F. Goldberg, MD
Clinical Professor of Psychiatry
Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai
New York, New York
Director, Affective Disorders Research Program
Silver Hill Hospital
New Canaan, Connecticut

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Depression carries a wide differential diagnosis. Practitioners sometimes think polarity is the fundamental distinction when they conceptualize depression as a clinical entity; in fact, many nosologic frameworks have been described for defining and subtyping clinically meaningful forms of depression, and each waxed and waned in popularity.

Kraepelin, writing in the early 20th century, linked manic-depres­sive illness with “the greater part of the morbid states termed mel­ancholia,”1 but many features other than polarity remain important components of depression, and those features often carry implications for how individual patients respond to treatment.

In this 2-part article [April and May 2014 issues], I summarize in­formation about clinically distinct subtypes of depression, as they are recognized within diagnostic systems or as descriptors of treatment outcomes for particular subgroups of patients. My focus is on practical considerations for assessing and managing depression. Because many forms of the disorder respond inadequately to initial antidepressant treatment, optimal “next-step” pharmacotherapy, after nonresponse or partial response, often hinges on clinical subtyping.

The first part of this article examines major depressive disorder (MDD), minor depression, chronic depression, depression in bipolar disorder, depression that is severe or mild, and psychotic depression. Treatments for these subtypes for which there is evidence, or a clinical rationale, are given in the Table.

The subtypes of depression that I’ll discuss in the second part of the article are listed on page 47.

Major and minor depression
MDD has been the focus of most drug tri­als seeking FDA approval. As a syndrome, MDD is defined by a constellation of fea­tures that are related not only to mood but also to sleep, energy, cognition, motiva­tion, and motor behavior, persisting for ≥2 weeks.

DSM-5 has imposed few changes to the basic definition of MDD:
   • bereavement (the aftermath of death of a loved one), formerly an exclusion cri­terion, no longer precludes making a diag­nosis of MDD when syndromal criteria are otherwise fulfilled
   • “with anxious distress” is a new course specifier that designates promi­nent anxiety features (feeling worried, restless, tense, or keyed up; fearful of losing control or something terrible happening)
   • “with mixed features” is a new course specifier pertinent when ≥3 mania or hy­pomania symptoms coexist (that is, might be a subsyndromal mania or hypomania) with a depressive syndrome; the mixed features specifier can be applied to de­pressed patients whether or not they have ever had a manic or hypomanic episode, but MDD—rather than bipolar disorder— remains the overarching diagnosis, unless criteria have ever been met for a full mania or hypomania.

More than 2 dozen medications are FDA-approved to treat MDD. Evidence-based psychotherapies (eg, cognitive-behavioral therapy [CBT] and interpersonal therapy), as adjuncts to pharmacotherapy, further improve outcomes, but with only modest additional effect.2

Minor depression. Depressive states that involve 2 to 4 associated symptoms last­ing ≥2 weeks but <2 years are sometimes described as minor depression, captured within DSM-5 as “depression not else­where defined.” The terminology of so-called “minor depression” generally is shunned, in part because it might wrongly connote low severity and therefore dis­courage treatment—even though it con­fers more than a 5-fold increase in risk of MDD.3 

Chronicity
DSM-IV-TR identified long-standing de­pression by 2 constructs:
   • chronic major depression (an episode of MDD lasting ≥2 years in adults, ≥1 year in children and adolescents)
   • dysthymic disorder (2 to 4 depressive symptoms for ≥2 years in adults and ≥1 year in children and adolescents), affecting 3% to 6% of adults and carrying a 2-fold increased risk of MDD, eventually.4

Depression that begins as dysthymic disorder and blossoms into syndromal MDD is described as “double depres­sion”—although it is not recognized as a unique condition in any edition of the DSM. Subsequent incomplete recovery may revert to dysthymic disorder. DSM-5 has subsumed chronic major depression and dysthymia under the unified heading of persistent depressive disorder.

There are no FDA-approved drugs for treating dysthymia. A meta-analysis of 9 controlled trials of off-label use of antide­pressants to treat dysthymia revealed an overall response rate of 52.4%, compared with 29.9% for placebo.5 Notably, although the active drug response rate in these stud­ies is comparable to what seen in MDD, the placebo response rate was approxi­mately 10% lower than what was seen in major depression.

Positive therapeutic findings (typically, treatment for 6 to 12 weeks) have been reported in so-called “pure” dysthymic disorder with sertraline, fluoxetine, imip­ramine, ritanserin, moclobemide (not ap­proved for use in the United States), and phenelzine; the results of additional, posi­tive placebo-controlled studies support the utility of duloxetine6 and paroxetine.7 Randomized trials have reported negative findings for desipramine,8 fluoxetine,9 and escitalopram10 escitalopram10—although the sample size in these latter studies might have been too small to detect a drug-placebo difference.

 

 

In dysthymic and minor-depressive middle-age and older adult men who have a low serum level of testosterone, hormone replacement was shown to be superior to placebo in several randomized trials.11 Studies of adjunctive atypical antipsy­chotics for dysthymic disorder are scarce; a Cochrane review identified controlled data only with amisulpride (not approved for use in the United States), which yielded a modest therapeutic effect.12

Polarity
In recent years, depression in bipolar dis­order (BD) has been contrasted with uni­polar MDD based on a difference in:
   • duration (briefer in BD)
   • severity (worse in BD)
   • risk of suicide (higher)
   • comorbidity (more extensive)
   • family history (often present for BD and highly recurrent depression)
   • treatment outcome (generally less favorable).

DSM-5 has at least somewhat blurred the distinctions in polarity by way of the new construct of “major depression with mixed features” (see the discussion of MDD above), identifiable even when a person has never had a full manic or hypo­manic episode.

No randomized trials have been con­ducted to identify the best treatments for such presentations, which has invited ex­trapolation from the literature in regard to bipolar mixed episodes, and suggesting that 1) some mood stabilizers (eg, divalproex) might have value and 2) antidepres­sants might exacerbate manic symptoms.

Perhaps most noteworthy in regard to treating bipolar depression is the unresolved, but hotly debated, contro­versy over whether and, if so, when, an antidepressant is inappropriate (based on concerns about possible induction or exac­erbation of manic symptoms). In addition, nearly all of the large, randomized con­trolled trials of antidepressants for bipolar depression have shown that they offer no advantage over placebo.

Some authors argue that a lack of re­sponse to antidepressants might, itself, be a “soft” indicator of “bipolarity.” However, nonresponse to antidepressants should prompt a wider assessment of features other than polarity—including psychosis, anxiety, substance abuse, a personality disorder, psychiatric adverse effects from concomitant medications, medical comor­ bidity, adequacy of trials of medical ther­apy, and potential non-adherence to such trials—to account for poor antidepressant outcomes.

Severity
Severity of depression warrants consider­ation when formulating impressions about the nature and treatment of all presenta­tions of depression.

High-severity forms prompt decisions about treatment setting (inpatient or out­patient); suicide assessment; and thera­peutic modalities (eg, electroconvulsive therapy is more appropriate than psycho­therapy for catatonic depression).

Mild forms. A recent meta-analysis of 6 randomized trials (each of >6 weeks’ du­ration) of antidepressants for mild de­pression demonstrated that these agents exert only a modest effect compared with placebo, owing largely to higher placebo-responsivity in mild depressive episodes than in moderate and severe episodes.13 In contrast, another meta-analysis of sub­jects who had “mild” baseline depression severity scores found that antidepressant medication had greater efficacy than pla­cebo in 4 of 6 randomized trials.14 Higher depression severity levels typically dimin­ish the placebo response rate but also re­duce the magnitude of drug efficacy.

Psychosis
Before DSM-III, psychotic (as opposed to neurotic) depression was perhaps the key nosologic distinction when characteriz­ing forms of depression. The presence of psychosis and related components (eg, mood-congruence) is closely linked with the severity of depression (high) and prog­nosis and longitudinal outcome (poorer), and has implications for treatment (Table).


 

Bottom Line
Depressive disorders comprise a range of conditions that can be viewed along many dimensions, including polarity, chronicity, recurrence, psychosis, treatment resistance, comorbidity, and atypicality, among other classifications. Clinical characteristics vary across subtypes—and so do corresponding preferred treatments, which should be tailored to the needs of each of your patients.


Related Resources

• Goldberg JF, Thase ME. Monoamine oxidase inhibi­tors revisited: what you should know. J Clin Psychiatry. 2013;74(2):189-191.
• Goldberg JF. Antidepressants in bipolar disorder: 7 myths and realities. Current Psychiatry. 2010;9(5):41-49.
• Ketamine cousin rapidly lifts depression without side ef­fects. National Institute of Mental Health. http://www. nimh.nih.gov/news/science-news/2013/ketamine-cousin-rapidly-lifts-depression-without-side-effects.shtml. Published May 23, 2013. Accessed March 20, 2014.
• Research Domain Criteria (RDoC). National Institute of Mental Health. http://www.nimh.nih.gov/research-priorities/rdoc/index.shtml?u tm_ source = govdelivery&utm_medium=email&utm_campaign= govdelivery. Accessed March 20, 2014.

Drug Brand Names
Amisulpride • Amazeo,                                  Lurasidone • Latuda
Amival, Amipride, Sulpitax                             Mirtazapine • Remeron
   Aripiprazole • Abilify                                   Moclobemide • Amira,
Armodafinil • Nuvigil                                        Aurorix, Clobemix,
Bupropion • Wellbutrin                                     Depnil, Manerix
Desipramine • Norpramin                               Modafinil • Provigil
Divalproex • Depakote,                                  Olanzapine/fluoxetine
Depakene                                                        • Symbyax
Duloxetine • Cymbalta                                    Paroxetine • Paxil
Escitalopram • Lexapro                                   Phenelzine • Nardil
Fluoxetine • Prozac                                         Pramipexole • Mirapex
Imipramine • Tofranil                                     Quetiapine • Seroquel
Ketamine • Ketalar                                         Riluzole • Rilutek
Lamotrigine • Lamictal                                    Sertraline • Zoloft
Lithium • Eskalith, Lithobid                             Vortioxetine • Brintellix

 

 

Disclosure
Dr. Goldberg has been a consultant to Avanir Pharmaceuticals and Merck; has served on the speakers’ bureau for AstraZeneca, Merck, Novartis, Sunovion
Pharmaceuticals, and Takeda and Lundbeck; and has received royalties from American Psychiatric Publishing and honoraria from Medscape and WebMD.


Editor’s note:
The second part of Dr. Goldberg’s review of depression subtypes—fo­cusing on “situational,” treatment-resistant, melancholic, agitated, anxious, and atypical depression; depression occurring with a sub­stance use disorder; premenstrual dysphoric disorder; and seasonal affective disorder—will appear in the May 2014 issue of Current Psychiatry.

Depression carries a wide differential diagnosis. Practitioners sometimes think polarity is the fundamental distinction when they conceptualize depression as a clinical entity; in fact, many nosologic frameworks have been described for defining and subtyping clinically meaningful forms of depression, and each waxed and waned in popularity.

Kraepelin, writing in the early 20th century, linked manic-depres­sive illness with “the greater part of the morbid states termed mel­ancholia,”1 but many features other than polarity remain important components of depression, and those features often carry implications for how individual patients respond to treatment.

In this 2-part article [April and May 2014 issues], I summarize in­formation about clinically distinct subtypes of depression, as they are recognized within diagnostic systems or as descriptors of treatment outcomes for particular subgroups of patients. My focus is on practical considerations for assessing and managing depression. Because many forms of the disorder respond inadequately to initial antidepressant treatment, optimal “next-step” pharmacotherapy, after nonresponse or partial response, often hinges on clinical subtyping.

The first part of this article examines major depressive disorder (MDD), minor depression, chronic depression, depression in bipolar disorder, depression that is severe or mild, and psychotic depression. Treatments for these subtypes for which there is evidence, or a clinical rationale, are given in the Table.

The subtypes of depression that I’ll discuss in the second part of the article are listed on page 47.

Major and minor depression
MDD has been the focus of most drug tri­als seeking FDA approval. As a syndrome, MDD is defined by a constellation of fea­tures that are related not only to mood but also to sleep, energy, cognition, motiva­tion, and motor behavior, persisting for ≥2 weeks.

DSM-5 has imposed few changes to the basic definition of MDD:
   • bereavement (the aftermath of death of a loved one), formerly an exclusion cri­terion, no longer precludes making a diag­nosis of MDD when syndromal criteria are otherwise fulfilled
   • “with anxious distress” is a new course specifier that designates promi­nent anxiety features (feeling worried, restless, tense, or keyed up; fearful of losing control or something terrible happening)
   • “with mixed features” is a new course specifier pertinent when ≥3 mania or hy­pomania symptoms coexist (that is, might be a subsyndromal mania or hypomania) with a depressive syndrome; the mixed features specifier can be applied to de­pressed patients whether or not they have ever had a manic or hypomanic episode, but MDD—rather than bipolar disorder— remains the overarching diagnosis, unless criteria have ever been met for a full mania or hypomania.

More than 2 dozen medications are FDA-approved to treat MDD. Evidence-based psychotherapies (eg, cognitive-behavioral therapy [CBT] and interpersonal therapy), as adjuncts to pharmacotherapy, further improve outcomes, but with only modest additional effect.2

Minor depression. Depressive states that involve 2 to 4 associated symptoms last­ing ≥2 weeks but <2 years are sometimes described as minor depression, captured within DSM-5 as “depression not else­where defined.” The terminology of so-called “minor depression” generally is shunned, in part because it might wrongly connote low severity and therefore dis­courage treatment—even though it con­fers more than a 5-fold increase in risk of MDD.3 

Chronicity
DSM-IV-TR identified long-standing de­pression by 2 constructs:
   • chronic major depression (an episode of MDD lasting ≥2 years in adults, ≥1 year in children and adolescents)
   • dysthymic disorder (2 to 4 depressive symptoms for ≥2 years in adults and ≥1 year in children and adolescents), affecting 3% to 6% of adults and carrying a 2-fold increased risk of MDD, eventually.4

Depression that begins as dysthymic disorder and blossoms into syndromal MDD is described as “double depres­sion”—although it is not recognized as a unique condition in any edition of the DSM. Subsequent incomplete recovery may revert to dysthymic disorder. DSM-5 has subsumed chronic major depression and dysthymia under the unified heading of persistent depressive disorder.

There are no FDA-approved drugs for treating dysthymia. A meta-analysis of 9 controlled trials of off-label use of antide­pressants to treat dysthymia revealed an overall response rate of 52.4%, compared with 29.9% for placebo.5 Notably, although the active drug response rate in these stud­ies is comparable to what seen in MDD, the placebo response rate was approxi­mately 10% lower than what was seen in major depression.

Positive therapeutic findings (typically, treatment for 6 to 12 weeks) have been reported in so-called “pure” dysthymic disorder with sertraline, fluoxetine, imip­ramine, ritanserin, moclobemide (not ap­proved for use in the United States), and phenelzine; the results of additional, posi­tive placebo-controlled studies support the utility of duloxetine6 and paroxetine.7 Randomized trials have reported negative findings for desipramine,8 fluoxetine,9 and escitalopram10 escitalopram10—although the sample size in these latter studies might have been too small to detect a drug-placebo difference.

 

 

In dysthymic and minor-depressive middle-age and older adult men who have a low serum level of testosterone, hormone replacement was shown to be superior to placebo in several randomized trials.11 Studies of adjunctive atypical antipsy­chotics for dysthymic disorder are scarce; a Cochrane review identified controlled data only with amisulpride (not approved for use in the United States), which yielded a modest therapeutic effect.12

Polarity
In recent years, depression in bipolar dis­order (BD) has been contrasted with uni­polar MDD based on a difference in:
   • duration (briefer in BD)
   • severity (worse in BD)
   • risk of suicide (higher)
   • comorbidity (more extensive)
   • family history (often present for BD and highly recurrent depression)
   • treatment outcome (generally less favorable).

DSM-5 has at least somewhat blurred the distinctions in polarity by way of the new construct of “major depression with mixed features” (see the discussion of MDD above), identifiable even when a person has never had a full manic or hypo­manic episode.

No randomized trials have been con­ducted to identify the best treatments for such presentations, which has invited ex­trapolation from the literature in regard to bipolar mixed episodes, and suggesting that 1) some mood stabilizers (eg, divalproex) might have value and 2) antidepres­sants might exacerbate manic symptoms.

Perhaps most noteworthy in regard to treating bipolar depression is the unresolved, but hotly debated, contro­versy over whether and, if so, when, an antidepressant is inappropriate (based on concerns about possible induction or exac­erbation of manic symptoms). In addition, nearly all of the large, randomized con­trolled trials of antidepressants for bipolar depression have shown that they offer no advantage over placebo.

Some authors argue that a lack of re­sponse to antidepressants might, itself, be a “soft” indicator of “bipolarity.” However, nonresponse to antidepressants should prompt a wider assessment of features other than polarity—including psychosis, anxiety, substance abuse, a personality disorder, psychiatric adverse effects from concomitant medications, medical comor­ bidity, adequacy of trials of medical ther­apy, and potential non-adherence to such trials—to account for poor antidepressant outcomes.

Severity
Severity of depression warrants consider­ation when formulating impressions about the nature and treatment of all presenta­tions of depression.

High-severity forms prompt decisions about treatment setting (inpatient or out­patient); suicide assessment; and thera­peutic modalities (eg, electroconvulsive therapy is more appropriate than psycho­therapy for catatonic depression).

Mild forms. A recent meta-analysis of 6 randomized trials (each of >6 weeks’ du­ration) of antidepressants for mild de­pression demonstrated that these agents exert only a modest effect compared with placebo, owing largely to higher placebo-responsivity in mild depressive episodes than in moderate and severe episodes.13 In contrast, another meta-analysis of sub­jects who had “mild” baseline depression severity scores found that antidepressant medication had greater efficacy than pla­cebo in 4 of 6 randomized trials.14 Higher depression severity levels typically dimin­ish the placebo response rate but also re­duce the magnitude of drug efficacy.

Psychosis
Before DSM-III, psychotic (as opposed to neurotic) depression was perhaps the key nosologic distinction when characteriz­ing forms of depression. The presence of psychosis and related components (eg, mood-congruence) is closely linked with the severity of depression (high) and prog­nosis and longitudinal outcome (poorer), and has implications for treatment (Table).


 

Bottom Line
Depressive disorders comprise a range of conditions that can be viewed along many dimensions, including polarity, chronicity, recurrence, psychosis, treatment resistance, comorbidity, and atypicality, among other classifications. Clinical characteristics vary across subtypes—and so do corresponding preferred treatments, which should be tailored to the needs of each of your patients.


Related Resources

• Goldberg JF, Thase ME. Monoamine oxidase inhibi­tors revisited: what you should know. J Clin Psychiatry. 2013;74(2):189-191.
• Goldberg JF. Antidepressants in bipolar disorder: 7 myths and realities. Current Psychiatry. 2010;9(5):41-49.
• Ketamine cousin rapidly lifts depression without side ef­fects. National Institute of Mental Health. http://www. nimh.nih.gov/news/science-news/2013/ketamine-cousin-rapidly-lifts-depression-without-side-effects.shtml. Published May 23, 2013. Accessed March 20, 2014.
• Research Domain Criteria (RDoC). National Institute of Mental Health. http://www.nimh.nih.gov/research-priorities/rdoc/index.shtml?u tm_ source = govdelivery&utm_medium=email&utm_campaign= govdelivery. Accessed March 20, 2014.

Drug Brand Names
Amisulpride • Amazeo,                                  Lurasidone • Latuda
Amival, Amipride, Sulpitax                             Mirtazapine • Remeron
   Aripiprazole • Abilify                                   Moclobemide • Amira,
Armodafinil • Nuvigil                                        Aurorix, Clobemix,
Bupropion • Wellbutrin                                     Depnil, Manerix
Desipramine • Norpramin                               Modafinil • Provigil
Divalproex • Depakote,                                  Olanzapine/fluoxetine
Depakene                                                        • Symbyax
Duloxetine • Cymbalta                                    Paroxetine • Paxil
Escitalopram • Lexapro                                   Phenelzine • Nardil
Fluoxetine • Prozac                                         Pramipexole • Mirapex
Imipramine • Tofranil                                     Quetiapine • Seroquel
Ketamine • Ketalar                                         Riluzole • Rilutek
Lamotrigine • Lamictal                                    Sertraline • Zoloft
Lithium • Eskalith, Lithobid                             Vortioxetine • Brintellix

 

 

Disclosure
Dr. Goldberg has been a consultant to Avanir Pharmaceuticals and Merck; has served on the speakers’ bureau for AstraZeneca, Merck, Novartis, Sunovion
Pharmaceuticals, and Takeda and Lundbeck; and has received royalties from American Psychiatric Publishing and honoraria from Medscape and WebMD.


Editor’s note:
The second part of Dr. Goldberg’s review of depression subtypes—fo­cusing on “situational,” treatment-resistant, melancholic, agitated, anxious, and atypical depression; depression occurring with a sub­stance use disorder; premenstrual dysphoric disorder; and seasonal affective disorder—will appear in the May 2014 issue of Current Psychiatry.

References


1. Kraepelin E. Manic-depressive insanity and paranoia. Barclay RM, trans. Robertson GM, ed. Edinburgh, Scotland: E&S Livingstone; 1921:1.
2. Cuijpers P, Dekker J, Hollon SD, et al. Adding psychotherapy to pharmacotherapy in the treatment of depressive disorders in adults: a meta-analysis. J Clin Psychiatry. 2009;70(9):1219-1229.
3. Fogel J, Eaton WW, Ford DE. Minor depression as a predictor of the first onset of major depressive disorder over a 15-year follow-up. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 2006; 113(1):36-43.
4. Cuijpers P, de Graaf R, van Dorsselaer S. Minor depression: risk profiles, functional disability, health care use and risk of developing major depression. J Affect Disord. 2004;79(1-3):71-79.
5. Levkovitz Y, Tedeschini E, Papakostas GI. Efficacy of antidepressants for dysthymia: a meta-analysis of placebo-controlled randomized trials. J Clin Psychiatry. 2011;72(4):509-514.
6. Hellerstein DJ, Stewart JW, McGrath PJ, et al. A randomized controlled trial of duloxetine versus placebo in the treatment of nonmajor chronic depression. J Clin Psychiatry. 2012;73(7):984-991.
7. Ravindran AV, Cameron C, Bhatla R, et al. Paroxetine in the treatment of dysthymic disorder without co-morbidities: a double-blind, placebo-controlled, flexible-dose study. Asian J Psychiatry. 2013;6(2):157-161.
8. Stewart JW, McGrath PJ, Liebowitz MR, et al. Treatment outcome validation of DSM-III depressive subtypes. Clinical usefulness in outpatients with mild to moderate depression. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1985;42(12):1148-1153.
9. Serrano-Blanco A, Gabarron E, Garcia-Bayo I, et al. Effectiveness and cost-effectiveness of antidepressant treatment in primary health care: a six-month randomised study comparing fluoxetine to imipramine. J Affect Disord. 2006;91(2-3):153-163.
10. Hellerstein DJ, Batchelder ST, Hyler S, et al. Escitalopram versus placebo in the treatment of dysthymic disorders. Int Clin Psychopharmacol. 2010;25(3):143-148.
11. Seidman SN, Orr G, Raviv G, et al. Effects of testosterone replacement in middle-aged men with dysthymia: a randomized, placebo-controlled clinical trial. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 2009;29(3):216-221.
12. Komossa K, Depping AM, Gaudchau A, et al. Second-generation antipsychotics for major depressive disorder and dysthymia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2010; 8:(12):CD008121.
13. Fournier JC, DeRubeis RJ, Hollom SD, et al. Antidepressant drug effects and depression severity: a patient-level meta-analysis. JAMA. 2010;303(1):47-53.
14. Stewart JA, Deliyannides DA, Hellerstein DJ, et al. Can people with nonsevere major depression benefit from antidepressant medication? J Clin Psychiatry. 2012;73(4):518-525.

References


1. Kraepelin E. Manic-depressive insanity and paranoia. Barclay RM, trans. Robertson GM, ed. Edinburgh, Scotland: E&S Livingstone; 1921:1.
2. Cuijpers P, Dekker J, Hollon SD, et al. Adding psychotherapy to pharmacotherapy in the treatment of depressive disorders in adults: a meta-analysis. J Clin Psychiatry. 2009;70(9):1219-1229.
3. Fogel J, Eaton WW, Ford DE. Minor depression as a predictor of the first onset of major depressive disorder over a 15-year follow-up. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 2006; 113(1):36-43.
4. Cuijpers P, de Graaf R, van Dorsselaer S. Minor depression: risk profiles, functional disability, health care use and risk of developing major depression. J Affect Disord. 2004;79(1-3):71-79.
5. Levkovitz Y, Tedeschini E, Papakostas GI. Efficacy of antidepressants for dysthymia: a meta-analysis of placebo-controlled randomized trials. J Clin Psychiatry. 2011;72(4):509-514.
6. Hellerstein DJ, Stewart JW, McGrath PJ, et al. A randomized controlled trial of duloxetine versus placebo in the treatment of nonmajor chronic depression. J Clin Psychiatry. 2012;73(7):984-991.
7. Ravindran AV, Cameron C, Bhatla R, et al. Paroxetine in the treatment of dysthymic disorder without co-morbidities: a double-blind, placebo-controlled, flexible-dose study. Asian J Psychiatry. 2013;6(2):157-161.
8. Stewart JW, McGrath PJ, Liebowitz MR, et al. Treatment outcome validation of DSM-III depressive subtypes. Clinical usefulness in outpatients with mild to moderate depression. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1985;42(12):1148-1153.
9. Serrano-Blanco A, Gabarron E, Garcia-Bayo I, et al. Effectiveness and cost-effectiveness of antidepressant treatment in primary health care: a six-month randomised study comparing fluoxetine to imipramine. J Affect Disord. 2006;91(2-3):153-163.
10. Hellerstein DJ, Batchelder ST, Hyler S, et al. Escitalopram versus placebo in the treatment of dysthymic disorders. Int Clin Psychopharmacol. 2010;25(3):143-148.
11. Seidman SN, Orr G, Raviv G, et al. Effects of testosterone replacement in middle-aged men with dysthymia: a randomized, placebo-controlled clinical trial. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 2009;29(3):216-221.
12. Komossa K, Depping AM, Gaudchau A, et al. Second-generation antipsychotics for major depressive disorder and dysthymia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2010; 8:(12):CD008121.
13. Fournier JC, DeRubeis RJ, Hollom SD, et al. Antidepressant drug effects and depression severity: a patient-level meta-analysis. JAMA. 2010;303(1):47-53.
14. Stewart JA, Deliyannides DA, Hellerstein DJ, et al. Can people with nonsevere major depression benefit from antidepressant medication? J Clin Psychiatry. 2012;73(4):518-525.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(4)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(4)
Page Number
43-47, 65
Page Number
43-47, 65
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
The first of 2 parts: A practical approach to subtyping depression among your patients
Display Headline
The first of 2 parts: A practical approach to subtyping depression among your patients
Legacy Keywords
depression, subtyping, polarity, major depressive disorder, minor depression, bipolar,
Legacy Keywords
depression, subtyping, polarity, major depressive disorder, minor depression, bipolar,
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

To prevent depression recurrence, interpersonal psychotherapy is a first-line treatment with long-term benefits

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:02
Display Headline
To prevent depression recurrence, interpersonal psychotherapy is a first-line treatment with long-term benefits

Major depressive disorder (MDD) frequently is recur­rent, with new episodes causing substantial social and economic impairment1 and increasing the like­lihood of future episodes.2 For this reason, contemporary psychiatric practitioners think of depression treatment as long-term and plan thoughtfully for maintenance therapy.

Recognizing the importance of engaging depressed indi­viduals beyond the initial response,3 American Psychiatric Association practice guidelines conceptualize depression treatment as 3 phases:
   • acute treatment, with the aim of remission (symptom removal)
   • continuation treatment, with the aim of preventing re­lapse (symptom return)
   • maintenance treatment, with the aim of preventing re­currence (new episodes).4
Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT) is an evidence-based psychosocial treatment that adheres to this model.5 As a time-limited, manual-driven6,7 approach, IPT focuses on interpersonal distresses as precipitating and perpetuating factors of depression.8

Acute IPT’s efficacy is well-established across >200 empirical studies—making it an evidence-based, first-line treatment for adult depression.4,9,10 Meta-analyses show that acute IPT is superior to placebo and no-treatment con­trols, and largely comparable to antidepressant medication and other active, first-line psychotherapies, such as cogni­tive-behavioral therapy (CBT).11,12

Although this review, as well as the liter­ature, focuses largely on adult outpatients with depression, evidence of IPT’s general efficacy exists for adolescents,13 chronically depressed patients,11 and depressed inpa­tients.14 This article presents a case study to describe the structure of IPT when used to treat depressed adults. We also present evidence of IPT’s acute and long-term ef­ficacy in preventing depression recurrence and data to guide its use in practice.


CASE REPORT

‘Safe’ but depressed
Timothy, age 18, is a first-year college student who presents for outpatient psychotherapy to address recurrent depression. He reports general unhappiness, loss of interest in things, low energy, sleep problems, poor academic and work functioning, and low self-esteem. He experienced at least 3 similar depressive episodes while in high school.

The therapist’s diagnostic and interper­sonal assessment suggests that Timothy’s depression is interpersonally driven. Timothy longs for relational intimacy but fears he will fail or burden people with his needs. He has difficulty gauging appropriate lev­els of enmeshment with others and either becomes overdependent or stays at a dis­tance. This “safe” approach to relationships contributes to boredom, loneliness, and isolation. His recent transition to college away from home and the failure of a roman­tic relationship have compounded these experiences.

Interpersonal model of IPT
IPT conceptualizes depression as involving predisposing, precipitating, and perpetu­ating biopsychosocial factors, including:
   • underlying biological and social vul­nerability, such as insecure attach­ ment (ie, tenuous and often negative views of self and others)
   • current interpersonal life stressors
   • inadequate social supports.15,16

For example, poor early attachment to caregivers can give rise to despair, isolation, and low mood. In turn, this can be exacerbated by poor social and commu­nication skills that promote further rejec­tion and withdrawal of social support and thus, intensified despair, isolation, and low mood. As in Timothy’s case, this vicious cycle underscores psychosocial stressors as a causal factor, maintaining factor, and result of depression. Specifically, IPT con­ceptualizes 4 main biopsychosocial problem domains:
   • grief and loss
   • interpersonal disputes
   • role transitions
   • interpersonal/communication deficits (often connected to isolation).

Working within 1 or 2 of the most salient problem domains, IPT centers on strategies for helping patients solve interpersonal problems based on the notion that modi­fied relationships, revised interpersonal expectations, improved communications, and increased social support will lead to symptom reduction.15-17

Many techniques are utilized in IPT (Table 1) to help patients modify their interpersonal relationships as a mechanism for decreasing their distress. IPT is prob­lem-focused, aiming to improve patients’ relationships by drawing on their assets and helping to build skills around short­comings. Therefore, IPT focuses on observ­able interpersonal patterns, as opposed to latent personality dynamics.


CASE CONTINUED


Setting goals

When the clinical explains in the non-technical terms the data supporting IPT’s efficacy for depression, including with young adults, Timothy agrees to teeatment with acute IPT. The therapist behins with consciousness-raising techniques to help Timothy adopt the “sick role” by viewing depressing as an illness to be cured. Collaboratively, they establish treatment goals that fit the IPT formulation of depression— ie, revising current relationships and expectations of them, increasing social support, improving communication skills, and solving problems within 1 or 2 of the IPT prob­lem domains.

For Timothy, the most pressing psy­chosocial problems seem to be interper­sonal deficits and role transitions. He ap­pears to be insecurely attached to others, which is a risk factor for poor facilitation of, and boundaries around, good relation­ships. A transition to a new and intimidat­ing interpersonal context—living on a college campus—compounded his vulnerabilities and increased his depression.

Acute treatment. The acute phase of IPT is time-limited—often, 12 to 16 sessions with gradual tapering toward the end (akin to a continuation phase). The time limit’s pur­pose is to focus both patient and therapist on the specific goal of removing the acute “illness” of depression. The IPT clinician takes an interpersonal inventory to learn about the patient’s most important rela­tionships and hones in on the IPT domain foci. Working collaboratively, the thera­pist might help the patient mourn a loss, reconstruct a narrative with a deceased loved one, consider ways to increase social contact, develop assertiveness, label feel­ings and needs, resolve an impasse with a significant other, and so forth.

 

 

The IPT therapist is an advocate for the patient and adopts an active stance laced with empathy and warmth. However, the therapist is more than unconditionally ac­cepting as depression is viewed as a prob­lem to be actively resolved.

CASE CONTINUED

Creating new patterns
The therapist uses various IPT strategies to work collaboratively with Timothy. She at­tempts to develop a strong working alliance by building interpersonal safety and trust— which take time with an insecurely attached patient. She tries to provide a new model for how close relationships can develop, while also focusing on current relationships. She and Timothy address his romantic desire for a coworker and work on developing realistic ex­pectations and effective methods for convey­ing his interest.

When Timothy approaches his coworker, she does not reject him—as he expected— but wants to pursue friendship before pos­sibly dating. The therapist then works with Timothy’s emotional reaction and explores ways to effectively convey his emotions to this young woman. Drawing on communica­tion analysis and problem-solving strategies, Timothy is able to sustain this friendship—a shift from his typical retreat when relation­ships have not gone as hoped or expected.

Timothy develops confidence to take more risks in initiating social encounters and starts to confide in his roommates when he feels upset. After 3 months of treatment, his expanded social network and improved in­terpersonal skills result in decreased depres­sion. When Timothy suggests termination, he and the therapist agree to end acute IPT but—given his history of depression—to continue maintenance sessions.

Limited data exist on variables that relate to IPT’s acute success or conditions under which it works best. Although process re­search lags behind acute IPT outcome re­search, some findings can help guide the IPT practitioner. For example, variables shown to predict outcomes of acute IPT for depression include a positive therapeutic alliance, therapist warmth, and psycho­ psycho­therapist use of exploratory techniques (Table 2).

Similarly, IPT has been shown to be more effective in some patients than oth­ers, depending on various moderators of depression. For example:
   • For patients with high cognitive dys­function, IPT outperforms CBT.
   • For patients with higher need for medical reassurance, IPT outperforms selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) pharmacotherapy.
   • For patients with severe depression, CBT outperforms IPT.
   • For patients with low psychomotor activation, response is more rapid with an SSRI than with IPT (Table 3).18

Durability of acute IPT
One way to understand recurrence pre­vention is to examine the durability of a treatment’s acute effect in the absence of a specific maintenance plan. In theory, patients will continue to apply the skills learned in acute IPT to maintain gains and prevent recurrences, even after they stop seeing the psychotherapist.

Initial findings.  Some research speaks to IPT’s acute-phase durability. The inaugural clinical trial of IPT by Weissman et al19 included 4 months of acute treatment and a 1-year uncontrolled naturalistic follow-up assessment. At follow-up, depression and global clinical symptoms were the same, whether patients had been acutely treated with IPT alone, pharmacotherapy alone (amitriptyline), combined IPT and pharmacotherapy, or nonscheduled treat­ment with a psychiatrist.

Some patients continued to function well, whereas others did not fully main­tain acute treatment gains. Patients who received IPT acutely, either singly or with medication, showed better social function­ing at follow-up compared with patients who did not receive IPT. This long-term durability of social improvements was an obvious target of IPT.

Support from TDCRP. In the National Institute of Mental Health Treatment of Depression Collaborative Research Project (TDCRP),20 patients in the acute phase of depression were assigned to 16 weeks of IPT, CBT, pharmacotherapy (imipramine) and clinical management (CM), or placebo plus CM. Among those who recovered by acute treatment’s end, MDD relapse rates at 18-month naturalistic follow-up were 33% for IPT, 36% for CBT, 50% for imipramine, and 33% for placebo. Between-group differ­ences were not statistically significant.

Because acute responders to different types of treatment might have different inherent relapse tendencies, these data do not support causal attributions about the enduring effects of acute-phase treatment. The relapse rates do suggest, however, that 16 weeks of acute treatment, irrespec­tive of kind, was insufficient for some pa­tients to achieve full recovery and lasting remission. Consistent with the initial IPT trial,19 IPT (and CBT) outperformed medi cation and placebo in maintaining rela­tionship quality.21

Long-term benefits. A more recent trial by Zobel et al22 examined the durabil­ity of benefits from 5 weeks of acute IPT plus pharmacotherapy and pharmaco­therapy plus CM for inpatients with MDD. Although caution is required in interpret­ing naturalistic follow-up studies, patients in both groups showed decreased depres­sion from baseline to 5-year follow-up. Early symptom reduction was more rapid for patients in the IPT plus pharmacother­apy group, but no significant difference ex­isted at 5 years. More IPT patients than CM patients showed sustained remission (28% vs 11%, respectively). These rates demon­strate a need for longer-term potency of acute treatments and more targeted main­tenance treatments.

 

 

IPT-M for preventing recurrence
A second way to understand recurrence prevention is to examine the efficacy of a treatment’s maintenance protocol add­ed to an acute treatment phase. IPT has been adapted as a maintenance treatment (IPT-M), with emphasis on keeping pa­tients well. With this revised focus, IPT-M differs somewhat from acute IPT. Although treatment continues to center on interper­sonal functioning, IPT-M favors:
   • vigilance for possible triggers of new depressive episodes
   • longer-term contact with a therapist
   • reinforcing skills learned
   • addressing an expanded number of interpersonal problem areas (given that such problems can be addressed more ef­ficiently relative to acute treatment).

Efficacy of IPT-M. In the initial trial, Frank et al23 compared the efficacy of IPT-M with that of pharmacotherapy (imipramine) in preventing depressive relapse among pa­tients with recurrent depression who had responded to ≥16 sessions of acute IPT and imipramine and remained well during a 17- week continuation phase. For maintenance, patients were assigned to IPT-M alone, imipramine alone, placebo alone, IPT-M plus imipramine, or IPT-M plus placebo. Maintenance imipramine was continued at the acute dosage (target 200 mg/d; up to 400 mg/d was allowed). Maintenance IPT was monthly sessions. Patients remained in the trial for 3 years or until depression recurred.

On its own, IPT-M showed some efficacy in preventing recurrence, as the mean time to recurrence was 82 weeks for IPT-M alone and 74 weeks for IPT-M plus placebo. The prophylactic effect of imipramine was stron­ger, however. The mean time to recurrence for imipramine with IPT was 131 weeks, and the mean time to recurrence for imipra­mine without IPT was 124 weeks. Therefore, whereas monthly IPT-M can certainly help prolong wellness and delay recurrence, IPT maintenance treatment with acute doses of imipramine might be even more effective— if the patient is willing to take medication. These findings must be considered with caution because of the inherent inequity be­tween imipramine and IPT-M in regard to maintenance dosage strength.

Frequency of treatment. In another trial, Frank et al24 examined whether the fre­quency of maintenance IPT sessions played a role in its prophylactic effect. Adult wom­en who had achieved depression remission with acute IPT (alone or in combination with SSRI pharmacotherapy) were ran­domized to weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly IPT-M alone for 2 years or until recurrence. Depression recurred during IPT-M in:
   • 26% of patients who had received acute IPT alone
   • 50% of those who had received acute IPT plus an SSRI.

Frequency of IPT-M sessions did not af­fect time to recurrence. Thus, for women who can achieve remission with IPT alone, varied frequencies of IPT-M can be good prophylaxis. For women who need an SSRI to augment acute IPT, IPT-M alone at varied dosages is less effective in pre­venting depression recurrence. Therefore, acute treatment response patterns can in­form maintenance plans, with the most prudent maintenance strategy being to maintain the acute treatment strategy over a longer period.

IPT-M for late-life depression. A trial by Reynolds et al25 examined the efficacy of maintenance nortriptyline and IPT-M in preventing depression recurrence in pa­tients age ≥59 who initially recovered after combined acute and continuation IPT plus nortriptyline. The 4 conditions (with their recurrence rates) were:
   • monthly IPT-M with nortriptyline (20%)
   • monthly IPT-M with placebo (64%)
   • nortriptyline plus medication visits (43%)
   • placebo plus medication visits (90%).

Clearly, the combined active treat­ments outperformed placebo and anti­depressant alone in terms of delaying or preventing recurrence, which suggests an optimal maintenance strategy with this population.

IPT-M for later life. Another trial by the same group26 enrolled patients age ≥70 with MDD that responded to acute IPT plus paroxetine. The maintenance treat­ments to which they were randomly as­signed (and recurrence rates within 2 years) were:
   • paroxetine plus IPT-M (35%)
   • placebo plus IPT-M (68%)
   • paroxetine plus clinical management (37%)
   • placebo plus clinical management (58%).

Recurrence rates were the same for pa­tients receiving medication plus IPT-M and medication plus clinical management, and depression was 2.4 times more likely to recur in patients receiving placebo vs active medication. Therefore, for later life depression, the optimal maintenance strat­egy was the SSRI.

Secondary analyses of data from these seminal trials of IPT-M point to other predictors of how and for whom mainte­nance IPT may work (Table 4). For example:
   • Greater variability of depression symptoms during all forms of mainte­nance treatment is related to a greater risk of recurrence.
   • Persistent insomnia is related to greater risk of recurrent depression.
   • High interpersonal focus in IPT-M sessions is related to longer time to recurrence.

 

 

Bottom Line
Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT) is efficacious for acute depression and for preventing recurrences. Patients treated successfully with acute IPT alone benefit from varied doses of maintenance IPT. Combining IPT-M with antidepressant medication can be more potent than IPT-M alone. For late-life depression, medication appears to be most effective for maintenance treatment.

Related Resources

Media
• Video demonstration, role-play transcripts, lesson plans, and quizzes. In: Appendices in and DVD companion to Ravitz P, Watson P, Grigoriadas S. Interpersonal psychother­apy for depression. New York, NY: Norton; 2013.
• Video demonstration of IPT sessions. In: DVD companion to Dewan, M, Steenbarger, B, Greenberg, R, eds. The art and science of brief psychotherapies: An illustrated guide. 2nd ed. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Publishing; 2012.

Text
• Stuart S, Robertson M. Interpersonal psychotherapy: a cli­nician’s guide. London, United Kingdom: Taylor & Francis; 2012.
• Weissman MM, Markowitz JC, Klerman GL. Comprehensive guide to interpersonal psychotherapy. New York, NY: Basic Books; 2000.
• Weissman M, Markowitz J, Klerman GL. Clinician’s quick guide to interpersonal psychotherapy. New York, NY: Oxford University Press; 2007.

Websites
• Interpersonal Psychotherapy Institute. http://iptinstitute.com.
• International Society for Interpersonal Psychotherapy. http://interpersonalpsychotherapy.org.


Drug Brand Names

Amitriptyline • Elavil       Nortriptyline • Pamelor
Imipramine • Tofranil     Paroxetine • Paxil


Acknowledgments

The authors are grateful to Samantha L. Bernecker, MS, and Nicholas R. Morrison for their assistance with the research review.

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. ten Doesschate MC, Koeter MW, Bockting CL, et al. Health related quality of life in recurrent depression: a comparison with a general population sample. J Affect Disord. 2010; 120(1-3):126-132.
2. Hardeveld F, Spijker J, De Graaf R, et al. Prevalence and predictors of recurrence of major depressive disorder in the adult population. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 2010;122(3):184-91.
3. Arnow BA, Constantino MJ. Effectiveness of psychotherapy and combination treatment for chronic depression. J Clin Psychol. 2003;59(8):893-905.
4. American Psychiatric Association. Practice guidelines for the treatment of patients with major depressive disorder. 3rd ed. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Publishing, Inc.; 2010.
5. Klerman GL, Weissman MM, Rounsaville BJ, et al. Interpersonal psychotherapy of depression. New York, NY: Basic Books; 1984.
6. Weissman MM, Markowitz JC, Klerman G. Comprehensive guide to interpersonal psychotherapy. New York, NY: Basic Books; 2000.
7. Weissman M, Markowitz J, Klerman G. Clinician’s quick guide to interpersonal psychotherapy. New York, NY: Oxford University Press; 2007.
8. Brakemeier EL, Frase L. Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT) in major depressive disorder. Eur Arch Psychiatry Clin Neurosci. 2012;262(suppl 2):S117-1121.
9. Depression in adults (update): NICE guideline CG90). National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2009). http://www.nice.org.uk/cg90. Updated October 2009. Accessed March 5, 2014.
10. Depression. National Institutes of Mental Health. http://www.nimh.nih.gov/health/publications/depression/ index.shtml. Revised 2011. Accessed March 5, 2014.
11. Cuijpers P, van Straten A, Andersson G, et al. Psychotherapy for depression in adults: a meta-analysis of comparative outcome studies. J Consult Clin Psychol. 2008;76(6):909-922.
12. Cuijpers P, Geraedts AS, van Oppen P, et al. Interpersonal psychotherapy for depression: a meta-analysis [Erratum in: Am J Psychiatry. 2011;168(6):652]. Am J Psychiatry. 2011; 168(6):581-592.
13. Mufson L, Dorta K, Wickramaratne P, et al. A randomized effectiveness trial of interpersonal psychotherapy for depressed adolescents. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 2004;61(6): 577-584.
14. Schramm E, Schneider D, Zobel I, et al. Efficacy of interpersonal psychotherapy plus pharmacotherapy in chronically depressed inpatients. J Affect Disord. 2008; 109(1-2):65-73.
15. Bernecker SL. How and for whom does interpersonal psychotherapy work? Psychotherapy Bulletin. 2012;47(2):13-17.
16. Stuart S. Interpersonal psychotherapy. In: Dewan MJ, Steenbarger BN, Greenberg RP, eds. The art and science of brief psychotherapies: an illustrated guide. 2nd ed. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Publishing; 2012: 157-193.
17. Grigoriadas S, Watson P, Maunder R, eds. Psychotherapy essentials to go: Interpersonal psychotherapy for depression. New York, NY: W. W. Norton & Company, Inc.; 2013.
18. Bleiberg KL, Markowitz JC. Interpersonal psychotherapy for depression. In: Barlow D, ed. Clinical handbook of psychological disorders: a step-by-step treatment manual. New York, NY: The Guilford Press; 2008:306-327.
19. Weissman MM, Klerman GL, Prusoff BA, et al. Depressed outpatients. Results one year after treatment with drugs and/or interpersonal psychotherapy. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1981;38(1):51-55.
20. Shea MT, Elkin I, Imber SD, et al. Course of depressive symptoms over follow-up. Findings from the National Institute of Mental Health Treatment of Depression Collaborative Research Program. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1992;49(10):782-787.
21. Blatt S, Zuroff D, Bondi C, et al. Short- and long-term effect of medication and psychotherapy in the brief treatment of depression: further analyses of data from the NIMH TDCRP. Psychother Res. 2000;10(2):215-234.
22. Zobel I, Kech S, van Calker D, et al. Long-term effect of combined interpersonal psychotherapy and pharmacotherapy in a randomized trial of depressed patients. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 2011;123(4):276-282.
23. Frank E, Kupfer DJ, Perel JM, et al. Three-year outcomes for maintenance therapies in recurrent depression. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1990;47(12):1093-1099.
24. Frank E, Kupfer DJ, Buysse DJ, et al. Randomized trial of weekly, twice-monthly, and monthly interpersonal psychotherapy as maintenance treatment for women with recurrent depression. Am J Psychiatry. 2007;164(5): 761-767.
25. Reynolds CF 3rd, Frank E, Perel JM, et al. Nortriptyline and interpersonal psychotherapy as maintenance therapies for recurrent major depression: a randomized controlled trial in patients older than 59 years. JAMA. 1999;281(1): 39-45.
26. Reynolds CF 3rd, Dew MA, Pollock BG, et al. Maintenance treatment of major depression in old age. N Engl J Med. 2006;354(11):1130-1138.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Michael J. Constantino, PhD
President, North American Society for Psychotherapy Research
Associate Professor and Graduate Program Director
Department of Psychology
University of Massachusetts Amherst
Amherst, Massachusetts

Roger P. Greenberg, PhD
Distinguished Professor and Head, Psychology Division
Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Science
State University of New York Upstate Medical University
Syracuse, New York

Holly B. Laws, PhD
Postdoctoral Researcher
NIMH T32 Program
Research Training in Functional Disability Interventions
Department of Psychiatry
Yale University
New Haven, Connecticut

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(4)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
33-41B
Legacy Keywords
depression recurrence, interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT), behavorial therapy, major depressive disorder (MDD)
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Michael J. Constantino, PhD
President, North American Society for Psychotherapy Research
Associate Professor and Graduate Program Director
Department of Psychology
University of Massachusetts Amherst
Amherst, Massachusetts

Roger P. Greenberg, PhD
Distinguished Professor and Head, Psychology Division
Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Science
State University of New York Upstate Medical University
Syracuse, New York

Holly B. Laws, PhD
Postdoctoral Researcher
NIMH T32 Program
Research Training in Functional Disability Interventions
Department of Psychiatry
Yale University
New Haven, Connecticut

Author and Disclosure Information

Michael J. Constantino, PhD
President, North American Society for Psychotherapy Research
Associate Professor and Graduate Program Director
Department of Psychology
University of Massachusetts Amherst
Amherst, Massachusetts

Roger P. Greenberg, PhD
Distinguished Professor and Head, Psychology Division
Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Science
State University of New York Upstate Medical University
Syracuse, New York

Holly B. Laws, PhD
Postdoctoral Researcher
NIMH T32 Program
Research Training in Functional Disability Interventions
Department of Psychiatry
Yale University
New Haven, Connecticut

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Major depressive disorder (MDD) frequently is recur­rent, with new episodes causing substantial social and economic impairment1 and increasing the like­lihood of future episodes.2 For this reason, contemporary psychiatric practitioners think of depression treatment as long-term and plan thoughtfully for maintenance therapy.

Recognizing the importance of engaging depressed indi­viduals beyond the initial response,3 American Psychiatric Association practice guidelines conceptualize depression treatment as 3 phases:
   • acute treatment, with the aim of remission (symptom removal)
   • continuation treatment, with the aim of preventing re­lapse (symptom return)
   • maintenance treatment, with the aim of preventing re­currence (new episodes).4
Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT) is an evidence-based psychosocial treatment that adheres to this model.5 As a time-limited, manual-driven6,7 approach, IPT focuses on interpersonal distresses as precipitating and perpetuating factors of depression.8

Acute IPT’s efficacy is well-established across >200 empirical studies—making it an evidence-based, first-line treatment for adult depression.4,9,10 Meta-analyses show that acute IPT is superior to placebo and no-treatment con­trols, and largely comparable to antidepressant medication and other active, first-line psychotherapies, such as cogni­tive-behavioral therapy (CBT).11,12

Although this review, as well as the liter­ature, focuses largely on adult outpatients with depression, evidence of IPT’s general efficacy exists for adolescents,13 chronically depressed patients,11 and depressed inpa­tients.14 This article presents a case study to describe the structure of IPT when used to treat depressed adults. We also present evidence of IPT’s acute and long-term ef­ficacy in preventing depression recurrence and data to guide its use in practice.


CASE REPORT

‘Safe’ but depressed
Timothy, age 18, is a first-year college student who presents for outpatient psychotherapy to address recurrent depression. He reports general unhappiness, loss of interest in things, low energy, sleep problems, poor academic and work functioning, and low self-esteem. He experienced at least 3 similar depressive episodes while in high school.

The therapist’s diagnostic and interper­sonal assessment suggests that Timothy’s depression is interpersonally driven. Timothy longs for relational intimacy but fears he will fail or burden people with his needs. He has difficulty gauging appropriate lev­els of enmeshment with others and either becomes overdependent or stays at a dis­tance. This “safe” approach to relationships contributes to boredom, loneliness, and isolation. His recent transition to college away from home and the failure of a roman­tic relationship have compounded these experiences.

Interpersonal model of IPT
IPT conceptualizes depression as involving predisposing, precipitating, and perpetu­ating biopsychosocial factors, including:
   • underlying biological and social vul­nerability, such as insecure attach­ ment (ie, tenuous and often negative views of self and others)
   • current interpersonal life stressors
   • inadequate social supports.15,16

For example, poor early attachment to caregivers can give rise to despair, isolation, and low mood. In turn, this can be exacerbated by poor social and commu­nication skills that promote further rejec­tion and withdrawal of social support and thus, intensified despair, isolation, and low mood. As in Timothy’s case, this vicious cycle underscores psychosocial stressors as a causal factor, maintaining factor, and result of depression. Specifically, IPT con­ceptualizes 4 main biopsychosocial problem domains:
   • grief and loss
   • interpersonal disputes
   • role transitions
   • interpersonal/communication deficits (often connected to isolation).

Working within 1 or 2 of the most salient problem domains, IPT centers on strategies for helping patients solve interpersonal problems based on the notion that modi­fied relationships, revised interpersonal expectations, improved communications, and increased social support will lead to symptom reduction.15-17

Many techniques are utilized in IPT (Table 1) to help patients modify their interpersonal relationships as a mechanism for decreasing their distress. IPT is prob­lem-focused, aiming to improve patients’ relationships by drawing on their assets and helping to build skills around short­comings. Therefore, IPT focuses on observ­able interpersonal patterns, as opposed to latent personality dynamics.


CASE CONTINUED


Setting goals

When the clinical explains in the non-technical terms the data supporting IPT’s efficacy for depression, including with young adults, Timothy agrees to teeatment with acute IPT. The therapist behins with consciousness-raising techniques to help Timothy adopt the “sick role” by viewing depressing as an illness to be cured. Collaboratively, they establish treatment goals that fit the IPT formulation of depression— ie, revising current relationships and expectations of them, increasing social support, improving communication skills, and solving problems within 1 or 2 of the IPT prob­lem domains.

For Timothy, the most pressing psy­chosocial problems seem to be interper­sonal deficits and role transitions. He ap­pears to be insecurely attached to others, which is a risk factor for poor facilitation of, and boundaries around, good relation­ships. A transition to a new and intimidat­ing interpersonal context—living on a college campus—compounded his vulnerabilities and increased his depression.

Acute treatment. The acute phase of IPT is time-limited—often, 12 to 16 sessions with gradual tapering toward the end (akin to a continuation phase). The time limit’s pur­pose is to focus both patient and therapist on the specific goal of removing the acute “illness” of depression. The IPT clinician takes an interpersonal inventory to learn about the patient’s most important rela­tionships and hones in on the IPT domain foci. Working collaboratively, the thera­pist might help the patient mourn a loss, reconstruct a narrative with a deceased loved one, consider ways to increase social contact, develop assertiveness, label feel­ings and needs, resolve an impasse with a significant other, and so forth.

 

 

The IPT therapist is an advocate for the patient and adopts an active stance laced with empathy and warmth. However, the therapist is more than unconditionally ac­cepting as depression is viewed as a prob­lem to be actively resolved.

CASE CONTINUED

Creating new patterns
The therapist uses various IPT strategies to work collaboratively with Timothy. She at­tempts to develop a strong working alliance by building interpersonal safety and trust— which take time with an insecurely attached patient. She tries to provide a new model for how close relationships can develop, while also focusing on current relationships. She and Timothy address his romantic desire for a coworker and work on developing realistic ex­pectations and effective methods for convey­ing his interest.

When Timothy approaches his coworker, she does not reject him—as he expected— but wants to pursue friendship before pos­sibly dating. The therapist then works with Timothy’s emotional reaction and explores ways to effectively convey his emotions to this young woman. Drawing on communica­tion analysis and problem-solving strategies, Timothy is able to sustain this friendship—a shift from his typical retreat when relation­ships have not gone as hoped or expected.

Timothy develops confidence to take more risks in initiating social encounters and starts to confide in his roommates when he feels upset. After 3 months of treatment, his expanded social network and improved in­terpersonal skills result in decreased depres­sion. When Timothy suggests termination, he and the therapist agree to end acute IPT but—given his history of depression—to continue maintenance sessions.

Limited data exist on variables that relate to IPT’s acute success or conditions under which it works best. Although process re­search lags behind acute IPT outcome re­search, some findings can help guide the IPT practitioner. For example, variables shown to predict outcomes of acute IPT for depression include a positive therapeutic alliance, therapist warmth, and psycho­ psycho­therapist use of exploratory techniques (Table 2).

Similarly, IPT has been shown to be more effective in some patients than oth­ers, depending on various moderators of depression. For example:
   • For patients with high cognitive dys­function, IPT outperforms CBT.
   • For patients with higher need for medical reassurance, IPT outperforms selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) pharmacotherapy.
   • For patients with severe depression, CBT outperforms IPT.
   • For patients with low psychomotor activation, response is more rapid with an SSRI than with IPT (Table 3).18

Durability of acute IPT
One way to understand recurrence pre­vention is to examine the durability of a treatment’s acute effect in the absence of a specific maintenance plan. In theory, patients will continue to apply the skills learned in acute IPT to maintain gains and prevent recurrences, even after they stop seeing the psychotherapist.

Initial findings.  Some research speaks to IPT’s acute-phase durability. The inaugural clinical trial of IPT by Weissman et al19 included 4 months of acute treatment and a 1-year uncontrolled naturalistic follow-up assessment. At follow-up, depression and global clinical symptoms were the same, whether patients had been acutely treated with IPT alone, pharmacotherapy alone (amitriptyline), combined IPT and pharmacotherapy, or nonscheduled treat­ment with a psychiatrist.

Some patients continued to function well, whereas others did not fully main­tain acute treatment gains. Patients who received IPT acutely, either singly or with medication, showed better social function­ing at follow-up compared with patients who did not receive IPT. This long-term durability of social improvements was an obvious target of IPT.

Support from TDCRP. In the National Institute of Mental Health Treatment of Depression Collaborative Research Project (TDCRP),20 patients in the acute phase of depression were assigned to 16 weeks of IPT, CBT, pharmacotherapy (imipramine) and clinical management (CM), or placebo plus CM. Among those who recovered by acute treatment’s end, MDD relapse rates at 18-month naturalistic follow-up were 33% for IPT, 36% for CBT, 50% for imipramine, and 33% for placebo. Between-group differ­ences were not statistically significant.

Because acute responders to different types of treatment might have different inherent relapse tendencies, these data do not support causal attributions about the enduring effects of acute-phase treatment. The relapse rates do suggest, however, that 16 weeks of acute treatment, irrespec­tive of kind, was insufficient for some pa­tients to achieve full recovery and lasting remission. Consistent with the initial IPT trial,19 IPT (and CBT) outperformed medi cation and placebo in maintaining rela­tionship quality.21

Long-term benefits. A more recent trial by Zobel et al22 examined the durabil­ity of benefits from 5 weeks of acute IPT plus pharmacotherapy and pharmaco­therapy plus CM for inpatients with MDD. Although caution is required in interpret­ing naturalistic follow-up studies, patients in both groups showed decreased depres­sion from baseline to 5-year follow-up. Early symptom reduction was more rapid for patients in the IPT plus pharmacother­apy group, but no significant difference ex­isted at 5 years. More IPT patients than CM patients showed sustained remission (28% vs 11%, respectively). These rates demon­strate a need for longer-term potency of acute treatments and more targeted main­tenance treatments.

 

 

IPT-M for preventing recurrence
A second way to understand recurrence prevention is to examine the efficacy of a treatment’s maintenance protocol add­ed to an acute treatment phase. IPT has been adapted as a maintenance treatment (IPT-M), with emphasis on keeping pa­tients well. With this revised focus, IPT-M differs somewhat from acute IPT. Although treatment continues to center on interper­sonal functioning, IPT-M favors:
   • vigilance for possible triggers of new depressive episodes
   • longer-term contact with a therapist
   • reinforcing skills learned
   • addressing an expanded number of interpersonal problem areas (given that such problems can be addressed more ef­ficiently relative to acute treatment).

Efficacy of IPT-M. In the initial trial, Frank et al23 compared the efficacy of IPT-M with that of pharmacotherapy (imipramine) in preventing depressive relapse among pa­tients with recurrent depression who had responded to ≥16 sessions of acute IPT and imipramine and remained well during a 17- week continuation phase. For maintenance, patients were assigned to IPT-M alone, imipramine alone, placebo alone, IPT-M plus imipramine, or IPT-M plus placebo. Maintenance imipramine was continued at the acute dosage (target 200 mg/d; up to 400 mg/d was allowed). Maintenance IPT was monthly sessions. Patients remained in the trial for 3 years or until depression recurred.

On its own, IPT-M showed some efficacy in preventing recurrence, as the mean time to recurrence was 82 weeks for IPT-M alone and 74 weeks for IPT-M plus placebo. The prophylactic effect of imipramine was stron­ger, however. The mean time to recurrence for imipramine with IPT was 131 weeks, and the mean time to recurrence for imipra­mine without IPT was 124 weeks. Therefore, whereas monthly IPT-M can certainly help prolong wellness and delay recurrence, IPT maintenance treatment with acute doses of imipramine might be even more effective— if the patient is willing to take medication. These findings must be considered with caution because of the inherent inequity be­tween imipramine and IPT-M in regard to maintenance dosage strength.

Frequency of treatment. In another trial, Frank et al24 examined whether the fre­quency of maintenance IPT sessions played a role in its prophylactic effect. Adult wom­en who had achieved depression remission with acute IPT (alone or in combination with SSRI pharmacotherapy) were ran­domized to weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly IPT-M alone for 2 years or until recurrence. Depression recurred during IPT-M in:
   • 26% of patients who had received acute IPT alone
   • 50% of those who had received acute IPT plus an SSRI.

Frequency of IPT-M sessions did not af­fect time to recurrence. Thus, for women who can achieve remission with IPT alone, varied frequencies of IPT-M can be good prophylaxis. For women who need an SSRI to augment acute IPT, IPT-M alone at varied dosages is less effective in pre­venting depression recurrence. Therefore, acute treatment response patterns can in­form maintenance plans, with the most prudent maintenance strategy being to maintain the acute treatment strategy over a longer period.

IPT-M for late-life depression. A trial by Reynolds et al25 examined the efficacy of maintenance nortriptyline and IPT-M in preventing depression recurrence in pa­tients age ≥59 who initially recovered after combined acute and continuation IPT plus nortriptyline. The 4 conditions (with their recurrence rates) were:
   • monthly IPT-M with nortriptyline (20%)
   • monthly IPT-M with placebo (64%)
   • nortriptyline plus medication visits (43%)
   • placebo plus medication visits (90%).

Clearly, the combined active treat­ments outperformed placebo and anti­depressant alone in terms of delaying or preventing recurrence, which suggests an optimal maintenance strategy with this population.

IPT-M for later life. Another trial by the same group26 enrolled patients age ≥70 with MDD that responded to acute IPT plus paroxetine. The maintenance treat­ments to which they were randomly as­signed (and recurrence rates within 2 years) were:
   • paroxetine plus IPT-M (35%)
   • placebo plus IPT-M (68%)
   • paroxetine plus clinical management (37%)
   • placebo plus clinical management (58%).

Recurrence rates were the same for pa­tients receiving medication plus IPT-M and medication plus clinical management, and depression was 2.4 times more likely to recur in patients receiving placebo vs active medication. Therefore, for later life depression, the optimal maintenance strat­egy was the SSRI.

Secondary analyses of data from these seminal trials of IPT-M point to other predictors of how and for whom mainte­nance IPT may work (Table 4). For example:
   • Greater variability of depression symptoms during all forms of mainte­nance treatment is related to a greater risk of recurrence.
   • Persistent insomnia is related to greater risk of recurrent depression.
   • High interpersonal focus in IPT-M sessions is related to longer time to recurrence.

 

 

Bottom Line
Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT) is efficacious for acute depression and for preventing recurrences. Patients treated successfully with acute IPT alone benefit from varied doses of maintenance IPT. Combining IPT-M with antidepressant medication can be more potent than IPT-M alone. For late-life depression, medication appears to be most effective for maintenance treatment.

Related Resources

Media
• Video demonstration, role-play transcripts, lesson plans, and quizzes. In: Appendices in and DVD companion to Ravitz P, Watson P, Grigoriadas S. Interpersonal psychother­apy for depression. New York, NY: Norton; 2013.
• Video demonstration of IPT sessions. In: DVD companion to Dewan, M, Steenbarger, B, Greenberg, R, eds. The art and science of brief psychotherapies: An illustrated guide. 2nd ed. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Publishing; 2012.

Text
• Stuart S, Robertson M. Interpersonal psychotherapy: a cli­nician’s guide. London, United Kingdom: Taylor & Francis; 2012.
• Weissman MM, Markowitz JC, Klerman GL. Comprehensive guide to interpersonal psychotherapy. New York, NY: Basic Books; 2000.
• Weissman M, Markowitz J, Klerman GL. Clinician’s quick guide to interpersonal psychotherapy. New York, NY: Oxford University Press; 2007.

Websites
• Interpersonal Psychotherapy Institute. http://iptinstitute.com.
• International Society for Interpersonal Psychotherapy. http://interpersonalpsychotherapy.org.


Drug Brand Names

Amitriptyline • Elavil       Nortriptyline • Pamelor
Imipramine • Tofranil     Paroxetine • Paxil


Acknowledgments

The authors are grateful to Samantha L. Bernecker, MS, and Nicholas R. Morrison for their assistance with the research review.

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Major depressive disorder (MDD) frequently is recur­rent, with new episodes causing substantial social and economic impairment1 and increasing the like­lihood of future episodes.2 For this reason, contemporary psychiatric practitioners think of depression treatment as long-term and plan thoughtfully for maintenance therapy.

Recognizing the importance of engaging depressed indi­viduals beyond the initial response,3 American Psychiatric Association practice guidelines conceptualize depression treatment as 3 phases:
   • acute treatment, with the aim of remission (symptom removal)
   • continuation treatment, with the aim of preventing re­lapse (symptom return)
   • maintenance treatment, with the aim of preventing re­currence (new episodes).4
Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT) is an evidence-based psychosocial treatment that adheres to this model.5 As a time-limited, manual-driven6,7 approach, IPT focuses on interpersonal distresses as precipitating and perpetuating factors of depression.8

Acute IPT’s efficacy is well-established across >200 empirical studies—making it an evidence-based, first-line treatment for adult depression.4,9,10 Meta-analyses show that acute IPT is superior to placebo and no-treatment con­trols, and largely comparable to antidepressant medication and other active, first-line psychotherapies, such as cogni­tive-behavioral therapy (CBT).11,12

Although this review, as well as the liter­ature, focuses largely on adult outpatients with depression, evidence of IPT’s general efficacy exists for adolescents,13 chronically depressed patients,11 and depressed inpa­tients.14 This article presents a case study to describe the structure of IPT when used to treat depressed adults. We also present evidence of IPT’s acute and long-term ef­ficacy in preventing depression recurrence and data to guide its use in practice.


CASE REPORT

‘Safe’ but depressed
Timothy, age 18, is a first-year college student who presents for outpatient psychotherapy to address recurrent depression. He reports general unhappiness, loss of interest in things, low energy, sleep problems, poor academic and work functioning, and low self-esteem. He experienced at least 3 similar depressive episodes while in high school.

The therapist’s diagnostic and interper­sonal assessment suggests that Timothy’s depression is interpersonally driven. Timothy longs for relational intimacy but fears he will fail or burden people with his needs. He has difficulty gauging appropriate lev­els of enmeshment with others and either becomes overdependent or stays at a dis­tance. This “safe” approach to relationships contributes to boredom, loneliness, and isolation. His recent transition to college away from home and the failure of a roman­tic relationship have compounded these experiences.

Interpersonal model of IPT
IPT conceptualizes depression as involving predisposing, precipitating, and perpetu­ating biopsychosocial factors, including:
   • underlying biological and social vul­nerability, such as insecure attach­ ment (ie, tenuous and often negative views of self and others)
   • current interpersonal life stressors
   • inadequate social supports.15,16

For example, poor early attachment to caregivers can give rise to despair, isolation, and low mood. In turn, this can be exacerbated by poor social and commu­nication skills that promote further rejec­tion and withdrawal of social support and thus, intensified despair, isolation, and low mood. As in Timothy’s case, this vicious cycle underscores psychosocial stressors as a causal factor, maintaining factor, and result of depression. Specifically, IPT con­ceptualizes 4 main biopsychosocial problem domains:
   • grief and loss
   • interpersonal disputes
   • role transitions
   • interpersonal/communication deficits (often connected to isolation).

Working within 1 or 2 of the most salient problem domains, IPT centers on strategies for helping patients solve interpersonal problems based on the notion that modi­fied relationships, revised interpersonal expectations, improved communications, and increased social support will lead to symptom reduction.15-17

Many techniques are utilized in IPT (Table 1) to help patients modify their interpersonal relationships as a mechanism for decreasing their distress. IPT is prob­lem-focused, aiming to improve patients’ relationships by drawing on their assets and helping to build skills around short­comings. Therefore, IPT focuses on observ­able interpersonal patterns, as opposed to latent personality dynamics.


CASE CONTINUED


Setting goals

When the clinical explains in the non-technical terms the data supporting IPT’s efficacy for depression, including with young adults, Timothy agrees to teeatment with acute IPT. The therapist behins with consciousness-raising techniques to help Timothy adopt the “sick role” by viewing depressing as an illness to be cured. Collaboratively, they establish treatment goals that fit the IPT formulation of depression— ie, revising current relationships and expectations of them, increasing social support, improving communication skills, and solving problems within 1 or 2 of the IPT prob­lem domains.

For Timothy, the most pressing psy­chosocial problems seem to be interper­sonal deficits and role transitions. He ap­pears to be insecurely attached to others, which is a risk factor for poor facilitation of, and boundaries around, good relation­ships. A transition to a new and intimidat­ing interpersonal context—living on a college campus—compounded his vulnerabilities and increased his depression.

Acute treatment. The acute phase of IPT is time-limited—often, 12 to 16 sessions with gradual tapering toward the end (akin to a continuation phase). The time limit’s pur­pose is to focus both patient and therapist on the specific goal of removing the acute “illness” of depression. The IPT clinician takes an interpersonal inventory to learn about the patient’s most important rela­tionships and hones in on the IPT domain foci. Working collaboratively, the thera­pist might help the patient mourn a loss, reconstruct a narrative with a deceased loved one, consider ways to increase social contact, develop assertiveness, label feel­ings and needs, resolve an impasse with a significant other, and so forth.

 

 

The IPT therapist is an advocate for the patient and adopts an active stance laced with empathy and warmth. However, the therapist is more than unconditionally ac­cepting as depression is viewed as a prob­lem to be actively resolved.

CASE CONTINUED

Creating new patterns
The therapist uses various IPT strategies to work collaboratively with Timothy. She at­tempts to develop a strong working alliance by building interpersonal safety and trust— which take time with an insecurely attached patient. She tries to provide a new model for how close relationships can develop, while also focusing on current relationships. She and Timothy address his romantic desire for a coworker and work on developing realistic ex­pectations and effective methods for convey­ing his interest.

When Timothy approaches his coworker, she does not reject him—as he expected— but wants to pursue friendship before pos­sibly dating. The therapist then works with Timothy’s emotional reaction and explores ways to effectively convey his emotions to this young woman. Drawing on communica­tion analysis and problem-solving strategies, Timothy is able to sustain this friendship—a shift from his typical retreat when relation­ships have not gone as hoped or expected.

Timothy develops confidence to take more risks in initiating social encounters and starts to confide in his roommates when he feels upset. After 3 months of treatment, his expanded social network and improved in­terpersonal skills result in decreased depres­sion. When Timothy suggests termination, he and the therapist agree to end acute IPT but—given his history of depression—to continue maintenance sessions.

Limited data exist on variables that relate to IPT’s acute success or conditions under which it works best. Although process re­search lags behind acute IPT outcome re­search, some findings can help guide the IPT practitioner. For example, variables shown to predict outcomes of acute IPT for depression include a positive therapeutic alliance, therapist warmth, and psycho­ psycho­therapist use of exploratory techniques (Table 2).

Similarly, IPT has been shown to be more effective in some patients than oth­ers, depending on various moderators of depression. For example:
   • For patients with high cognitive dys­function, IPT outperforms CBT.
   • For patients with higher need for medical reassurance, IPT outperforms selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) pharmacotherapy.
   • For patients with severe depression, CBT outperforms IPT.
   • For patients with low psychomotor activation, response is more rapid with an SSRI than with IPT (Table 3).18

Durability of acute IPT
One way to understand recurrence pre­vention is to examine the durability of a treatment’s acute effect in the absence of a specific maintenance plan. In theory, patients will continue to apply the skills learned in acute IPT to maintain gains and prevent recurrences, even after they stop seeing the psychotherapist.

Initial findings.  Some research speaks to IPT’s acute-phase durability. The inaugural clinical trial of IPT by Weissman et al19 included 4 months of acute treatment and a 1-year uncontrolled naturalistic follow-up assessment. At follow-up, depression and global clinical symptoms were the same, whether patients had been acutely treated with IPT alone, pharmacotherapy alone (amitriptyline), combined IPT and pharmacotherapy, or nonscheduled treat­ment with a psychiatrist.

Some patients continued to function well, whereas others did not fully main­tain acute treatment gains. Patients who received IPT acutely, either singly or with medication, showed better social function­ing at follow-up compared with patients who did not receive IPT. This long-term durability of social improvements was an obvious target of IPT.

Support from TDCRP. In the National Institute of Mental Health Treatment of Depression Collaborative Research Project (TDCRP),20 patients in the acute phase of depression were assigned to 16 weeks of IPT, CBT, pharmacotherapy (imipramine) and clinical management (CM), or placebo plus CM. Among those who recovered by acute treatment’s end, MDD relapse rates at 18-month naturalistic follow-up were 33% for IPT, 36% for CBT, 50% for imipramine, and 33% for placebo. Between-group differ­ences were not statistically significant.

Because acute responders to different types of treatment might have different inherent relapse tendencies, these data do not support causal attributions about the enduring effects of acute-phase treatment. The relapse rates do suggest, however, that 16 weeks of acute treatment, irrespec­tive of kind, was insufficient for some pa­tients to achieve full recovery and lasting remission. Consistent with the initial IPT trial,19 IPT (and CBT) outperformed medi cation and placebo in maintaining rela­tionship quality.21

Long-term benefits. A more recent trial by Zobel et al22 examined the durabil­ity of benefits from 5 weeks of acute IPT plus pharmacotherapy and pharmaco­therapy plus CM for inpatients with MDD. Although caution is required in interpret­ing naturalistic follow-up studies, patients in both groups showed decreased depres­sion from baseline to 5-year follow-up. Early symptom reduction was more rapid for patients in the IPT plus pharmacother­apy group, but no significant difference ex­isted at 5 years. More IPT patients than CM patients showed sustained remission (28% vs 11%, respectively). These rates demon­strate a need for longer-term potency of acute treatments and more targeted main­tenance treatments.

 

 

IPT-M for preventing recurrence
A second way to understand recurrence prevention is to examine the efficacy of a treatment’s maintenance protocol add­ed to an acute treatment phase. IPT has been adapted as a maintenance treatment (IPT-M), with emphasis on keeping pa­tients well. With this revised focus, IPT-M differs somewhat from acute IPT. Although treatment continues to center on interper­sonal functioning, IPT-M favors:
   • vigilance for possible triggers of new depressive episodes
   • longer-term contact with a therapist
   • reinforcing skills learned
   • addressing an expanded number of interpersonal problem areas (given that such problems can be addressed more ef­ficiently relative to acute treatment).

Efficacy of IPT-M. In the initial trial, Frank et al23 compared the efficacy of IPT-M with that of pharmacotherapy (imipramine) in preventing depressive relapse among pa­tients with recurrent depression who had responded to ≥16 sessions of acute IPT and imipramine and remained well during a 17- week continuation phase. For maintenance, patients were assigned to IPT-M alone, imipramine alone, placebo alone, IPT-M plus imipramine, or IPT-M plus placebo. Maintenance imipramine was continued at the acute dosage (target 200 mg/d; up to 400 mg/d was allowed). Maintenance IPT was monthly sessions. Patients remained in the trial for 3 years or until depression recurred.

On its own, IPT-M showed some efficacy in preventing recurrence, as the mean time to recurrence was 82 weeks for IPT-M alone and 74 weeks for IPT-M plus placebo. The prophylactic effect of imipramine was stron­ger, however. The mean time to recurrence for imipramine with IPT was 131 weeks, and the mean time to recurrence for imipra­mine without IPT was 124 weeks. Therefore, whereas monthly IPT-M can certainly help prolong wellness and delay recurrence, IPT maintenance treatment with acute doses of imipramine might be even more effective— if the patient is willing to take medication. These findings must be considered with caution because of the inherent inequity be­tween imipramine and IPT-M in regard to maintenance dosage strength.

Frequency of treatment. In another trial, Frank et al24 examined whether the fre­quency of maintenance IPT sessions played a role in its prophylactic effect. Adult wom­en who had achieved depression remission with acute IPT (alone or in combination with SSRI pharmacotherapy) were ran­domized to weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly IPT-M alone for 2 years or until recurrence. Depression recurred during IPT-M in:
   • 26% of patients who had received acute IPT alone
   • 50% of those who had received acute IPT plus an SSRI.

Frequency of IPT-M sessions did not af­fect time to recurrence. Thus, for women who can achieve remission with IPT alone, varied frequencies of IPT-M can be good prophylaxis. For women who need an SSRI to augment acute IPT, IPT-M alone at varied dosages is less effective in pre­venting depression recurrence. Therefore, acute treatment response patterns can in­form maintenance plans, with the most prudent maintenance strategy being to maintain the acute treatment strategy over a longer period.

IPT-M for late-life depression. A trial by Reynolds et al25 examined the efficacy of maintenance nortriptyline and IPT-M in preventing depression recurrence in pa­tients age ≥59 who initially recovered after combined acute and continuation IPT plus nortriptyline. The 4 conditions (with their recurrence rates) were:
   • monthly IPT-M with nortriptyline (20%)
   • monthly IPT-M with placebo (64%)
   • nortriptyline plus medication visits (43%)
   • placebo plus medication visits (90%).

Clearly, the combined active treat­ments outperformed placebo and anti­depressant alone in terms of delaying or preventing recurrence, which suggests an optimal maintenance strategy with this population.

IPT-M for later life. Another trial by the same group26 enrolled patients age ≥70 with MDD that responded to acute IPT plus paroxetine. The maintenance treat­ments to which they were randomly as­signed (and recurrence rates within 2 years) were:
   • paroxetine plus IPT-M (35%)
   • placebo plus IPT-M (68%)
   • paroxetine plus clinical management (37%)
   • placebo plus clinical management (58%).

Recurrence rates were the same for pa­tients receiving medication plus IPT-M and medication plus clinical management, and depression was 2.4 times more likely to recur in patients receiving placebo vs active medication. Therefore, for later life depression, the optimal maintenance strat­egy was the SSRI.

Secondary analyses of data from these seminal trials of IPT-M point to other predictors of how and for whom mainte­nance IPT may work (Table 4). For example:
   • Greater variability of depression symptoms during all forms of mainte­nance treatment is related to a greater risk of recurrence.
   • Persistent insomnia is related to greater risk of recurrent depression.
   • High interpersonal focus in IPT-M sessions is related to longer time to recurrence.

 

 

Bottom Line
Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT) is efficacious for acute depression and for preventing recurrences. Patients treated successfully with acute IPT alone benefit from varied doses of maintenance IPT. Combining IPT-M with antidepressant medication can be more potent than IPT-M alone. For late-life depression, medication appears to be most effective for maintenance treatment.

Related Resources

Media
• Video demonstration, role-play transcripts, lesson plans, and quizzes. In: Appendices in and DVD companion to Ravitz P, Watson P, Grigoriadas S. Interpersonal psychother­apy for depression. New York, NY: Norton; 2013.
• Video demonstration of IPT sessions. In: DVD companion to Dewan, M, Steenbarger, B, Greenberg, R, eds. The art and science of brief psychotherapies: An illustrated guide. 2nd ed. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Publishing; 2012.

Text
• Stuart S, Robertson M. Interpersonal psychotherapy: a cli­nician’s guide. London, United Kingdom: Taylor & Francis; 2012.
• Weissman MM, Markowitz JC, Klerman GL. Comprehensive guide to interpersonal psychotherapy. New York, NY: Basic Books; 2000.
• Weissman M, Markowitz J, Klerman GL. Clinician’s quick guide to interpersonal psychotherapy. New York, NY: Oxford University Press; 2007.

Websites
• Interpersonal Psychotherapy Institute. http://iptinstitute.com.
• International Society for Interpersonal Psychotherapy. http://interpersonalpsychotherapy.org.


Drug Brand Names

Amitriptyline • Elavil       Nortriptyline • Pamelor
Imipramine • Tofranil     Paroxetine • Paxil


Acknowledgments

The authors are grateful to Samantha L. Bernecker, MS, and Nicholas R. Morrison for their assistance with the research review.

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. ten Doesschate MC, Koeter MW, Bockting CL, et al. Health related quality of life in recurrent depression: a comparison with a general population sample. J Affect Disord. 2010; 120(1-3):126-132.
2. Hardeveld F, Spijker J, De Graaf R, et al. Prevalence and predictors of recurrence of major depressive disorder in the adult population. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 2010;122(3):184-91.
3. Arnow BA, Constantino MJ. Effectiveness of psychotherapy and combination treatment for chronic depression. J Clin Psychol. 2003;59(8):893-905.
4. American Psychiatric Association. Practice guidelines for the treatment of patients with major depressive disorder. 3rd ed. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Publishing, Inc.; 2010.
5. Klerman GL, Weissman MM, Rounsaville BJ, et al. Interpersonal psychotherapy of depression. New York, NY: Basic Books; 1984.
6. Weissman MM, Markowitz JC, Klerman G. Comprehensive guide to interpersonal psychotherapy. New York, NY: Basic Books; 2000.
7. Weissman M, Markowitz J, Klerman G. Clinician’s quick guide to interpersonal psychotherapy. New York, NY: Oxford University Press; 2007.
8. Brakemeier EL, Frase L. Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT) in major depressive disorder. Eur Arch Psychiatry Clin Neurosci. 2012;262(suppl 2):S117-1121.
9. Depression in adults (update): NICE guideline CG90). National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2009). http://www.nice.org.uk/cg90. Updated October 2009. Accessed March 5, 2014.
10. Depression. National Institutes of Mental Health. http://www.nimh.nih.gov/health/publications/depression/ index.shtml. Revised 2011. Accessed March 5, 2014.
11. Cuijpers P, van Straten A, Andersson G, et al. Psychotherapy for depression in adults: a meta-analysis of comparative outcome studies. J Consult Clin Psychol. 2008;76(6):909-922.
12. Cuijpers P, Geraedts AS, van Oppen P, et al. Interpersonal psychotherapy for depression: a meta-analysis [Erratum in: Am J Psychiatry. 2011;168(6):652]. Am J Psychiatry. 2011; 168(6):581-592.
13. Mufson L, Dorta K, Wickramaratne P, et al. A randomized effectiveness trial of interpersonal psychotherapy for depressed adolescents. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 2004;61(6): 577-584.
14. Schramm E, Schneider D, Zobel I, et al. Efficacy of interpersonal psychotherapy plus pharmacotherapy in chronically depressed inpatients. J Affect Disord. 2008; 109(1-2):65-73.
15. Bernecker SL. How and for whom does interpersonal psychotherapy work? Psychotherapy Bulletin. 2012;47(2):13-17.
16. Stuart S. Interpersonal psychotherapy. In: Dewan MJ, Steenbarger BN, Greenberg RP, eds. The art and science of brief psychotherapies: an illustrated guide. 2nd ed. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Publishing; 2012: 157-193.
17. Grigoriadas S, Watson P, Maunder R, eds. Psychotherapy essentials to go: Interpersonal psychotherapy for depression. New York, NY: W. W. Norton & Company, Inc.; 2013.
18. Bleiberg KL, Markowitz JC. Interpersonal psychotherapy for depression. In: Barlow D, ed. Clinical handbook of psychological disorders: a step-by-step treatment manual. New York, NY: The Guilford Press; 2008:306-327.
19. Weissman MM, Klerman GL, Prusoff BA, et al. Depressed outpatients. Results one year after treatment with drugs and/or interpersonal psychotherapy. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1981;38(1):51-55.
20. Shea MT, Elkin I, Imber SD, et al. Course of depressive symptoms over follow-up. Findings from the National Institute of Mental Health Treatment of Depression Collaborative Research Program. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1992;49(10):782-787.
21. Blatt S, Zuroff D, Bondi C, et al. Short- and long-term effect of medication and psychotherapy in the brief treatment of depression: further analyses of data from the NIMH TDCRP. Psychother Res. 2000;10(2):215-234.
22. Zobel I, Kech S, van Calker D, et al. Long-term effect of combined interpersonal psychotherapy and pharmacotherapy in a randomized trial of depressed patients. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 2011;123(4):276-282.
23. Frank E, Kupfer DJ, Perel JM, et al. Three-year outcomes for maintenance therapies in recurrent depression. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1990;47(12):1093-1099.
24. Frank E, Kupfer DJ, Buysse DJ, et al. Randomized trial of weekly, twice-monthly, and monthly interpersonal psychotherapy as maintenance treatment for women with recurrent depression. Am J Psychiatry. 2007;164(5): 761-767.
25. Reynolds CF 3rd, Frank E, Perel JM, et al. Nortriptyline and interpersonal psychotherapy as maintenance therapies for recurrent major depression: a randomized controlled trial in patients older than 59 years. JAMA. 1999;281(1): 39-45.
26. Reynolds CF 3rd, Dew MA, Pollock BG, et al. Maintenance treatment of major depression in old age. N Engl J Med. 2006;354(11):1130-1138.

References


1. ten Doesschate MC, Koeter MW, Bockting CL, et al. Health related quality of life in recurrent depression: a comparison with a general population sample. J Affect Disord. 2010; 120(1-3):126-132.
2. Hardeveld F, Spijker J, De Graaf R, et al. Prevalence and predictors of recurrence of major depressive disorder in the adult population. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 2010;122(3):184-91.
3. Arnow BA, Constantino MJ. Effectiveness of psychotherapy and combination treatment for chronic depression. J Clin Psychol. 2003;59(8):893-905.
4. American Psychiatric Association. Practice guidelines for the treatment of patients with major depressive disorder. 3rd ed. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Publishing, Inc.; 2010.
5. Klerman GL, Weissman MM, Rounsaville BJ, et al. Interpersonal psychotherapy of depression. New York, NY: Basic Books; 1984.
6. Weissman MM, Markowitz JC, Klerman G. Comprehensive guide to interpersonal psychotherapy. New York, NY: Basic Books; 2000.
7. Weissman M, Markowitz J, Klerman G. Clinician’s quick guide to interpersonal psychotherapy. New York, NY: Oxford University Press; 2007.
8. Brakemeier EL, Frase L. Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT) in major depressive disorder. Eur Arch Psychiatry Clin Neurosci. 2012;262(suppl 2):S117-1121.
9. Depression in adults (update): NICE guideline CG90). National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2009). http://www.nice.org.uk/cg90. Updated October 2009. Accessed March 5, 2014.
10. Depression. National Institutes of Mental Health. http://www.nimh.nih.gov/health/publications/depression/ index.shtml. Revised 2011. Accessed March 5, 2014.
11. Cuijpers P, van Straten A, Andersson G, et al. Psychotherapy for depression in adults: a meta-analysis of comparative outcome studies. J Consult Clin Psychol. 2008;76(6):909-922.
12. Cuijpers P, Geraedts AS, van Oppen P, et al. Interpersonal psychotherapy for depression: a meta-analysis [Erratum in: Am J Psychiatry. 2011;168(6):652]. Am J Psychiatry. 2011; 168(6):581-592.
13. Mufson L, Dorta K, Wickramaratne P, et al. A randomized effectiveness trial of interpersonal psychotherapy for depressed adolescents. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 2004;61(6): 577-584.
14. Schramm E, Schneider D, Zobel I, et al. Efficacy of interpersonal psychotherapy plus pharmacotherapy in chronically depressed inpatients. J Affect Disord. 2008; 109(1-2):65-73.
15. Bernecker SL. How and for whom does interpersonal psychotherapy work? Psychotherapy Bulletin. 2012;47(2):13-17.
16. Stuart S. Interpersonal psychotherapy. In: Dewan MJ, Steenbarger BN, Greenberg RP, eds. The art and science of brief psychotherapies: an illustrated guide. 2nd ed. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Publishing; 2012: 157-193.
17. Grigoriadas S, Watson P, Maunder R, eds. Psychotherapy essentials to go: Interpersonal psychotherapy for depression. New York, NY: W. W. Norton & Company, Inc.; 2013.
18. Bleiberg KL, Markowitz JC. Interpersonal psychotherapy for depression. In: Barlow D, ed. Clinical handbook of psychological disorders: a step-by-step treatment manual. New York, NY: The Guilford Press; 2008:306-327.
19. Weissman MM, Klerman GL, Prusoff BA, et al. Depressed outpatients. Results one year after treatment with drugs and/or interpersonal psychotherapy. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1981;38(1):51-55.
20. Shea MT, Elkin I, Imber SD, et al. Course of depressive symptoms over follow-up. Findings from the National Institute of Mental Health Treatment of Depression Collaborative Research Program. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1992;49(10):782-787.
21. Blatt S, Zuroff D, Bondi C, et al. Short- and long-term effect of medication and psychotherapy in the brief treatment of depression: further analyses of data from the NIMH TDCRP. Psychother Res. 2000;10(2):215-234.
22. Zobel I, Kech S, van Calker D, et al. Long-term effect of combined interpersonal psychotherapy and pharmacotherapy in a randomized trial of depressed patients. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 2011;123(4):276-282.
23. Frank E, Kupfer DJ, Perel JM, et al. Three-year outcomes for maintenance therapies in recurrent depression. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1990;47(12):1093-1099.
24. Frank E, Kupfer DJ, Buysse DJ, et al. Randomized trial of weekly, twice-monthly, and monthly interpersonal psychotherapy as maintenance treatment for women with recurrent depression. Am J Psychiatry. 2007;164(5): 761-767.
25. Reynolds CF 3rd, Frank E, Perel JM, et al. Nortriptyline and interpersonal psychotherapy as maintenance therapies for recurrent major depression: a randomized controlled trial in patients older than 59 years. JAMA. 1999;281(1): 39-45.
26. Reynolds CF 3rd, Dew MA, Pollock BG, et al. Maintenance treatment of major depression in old age. N Engl J Med. 2006;354(11):1130-1138.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(4)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(4)
Page Number
33-41B
Page Number
33-41B
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
To prevent depression recurrence, interpersonal psychotherapy is a first-line treatment with long-term benefits
Display Headline
To prevent depression recurrence, interpersonal psychotherapy is a first-line treatment with long-term benefits
Legacy Keywords
depression recurrence, interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT), behavorial therapy, major depressive disorder (MDD)
Legacy Keywords
depression recurrence, interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT), behavorial therapy, major depressive disorder (MDD)
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Taking the spice route: Psychoactive properties of culinary spices

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:02
Display Headline
Taking the spice route: Psychoactive properties of culinary spices

Many substances that are not typically thought of as “substances of abuse” possess—when adequate­ly dosed—clinically meaningful psychoactive properties. In addition to the more familiar effects of alcohol, psychostimulants, opioids, Cannabis, and hallucinogens, you may encounter psychiatric phenomena resulting from abuse of more obscure substances, including culinary spices.

The clinician treating a patient in an apparent intoxicated state who has a negative drug screen might ask that patient if he (she) abuses spices. This might be particularly relevant when treating patients thought to have limited access to il­licit substances or those with ready access to large amounts of spices, such as prisoners, young patients, and those working in the food service industry.


Abuse of spices can be a problematic diagnosis
Patients may misuse culinary spices to achieve euphoria, or a “natural high.” They may present with medical or psychiat­ric symptoms, including acute altered mental status, but the psychoactive substances are not identified on routine toxicol­ogy studies. In addition, patients may not attribute their use of spices for psychoactive effect to “drugs,” because these materials are legal and readily available. This may lead to misdiagnosis of a systemic medical disorder or a primary psy­chiatric illness to explain the patient’s symptoms and initiat­ing a psychotropic agent and other psychiatric services when a substance abuse program might be a more appropriate clini­cal intervention.

Some spices contain psychoactive compounds that can alter CNS function (Table1-7), might be abused for recreational purposes, and can be toxic in an excessive amount. Internet resources, including anonymous web-based communications, and anecdotal materials about non-traditional recreational drugs, are available to anyone with Internet access.8 However, little research has been conducted into the preva­lence of abuse (Box)9 and spices’ psychoactive properties. The lack of toxicology detection of spices in the medical setting presents a di­agnostic challenge.

The psychoactive plants used in “natural high” products mainly are psychoactively inactive in their natural form, but extracts or alkaloids obtained from them might induce 1 or more of 3 classifications of psychoactivity:
   • stimulant
   • sedative
   • hallucinogenic.

Many of these substances are considered to be aphrodisiac, and some may be abused to increase sexual function.

The following is a review of common spic­es that have been reported to possess poten­tial psychoactive properties.

Nutmeg
Nutmeg (Myristica fragrans) is a common and easily accessible means of reaching euphoria in adults.10 The aromatic oil of nutmeg contains myristicin, a psychoactive substance that is chemically similar to hal­lucinogenic compounds such as mescaline. Its psychoactive effects could be attributed to metabolic formation of amphetamine de­rivatives from its core ingredients, elemicin, myristicin, and safrole.11,12

Nutmeg and its active component, my­risticin, produce central monoamine oxi­dase (MAO) inhibition as evidenced by the ability to lower the convulsive dose of IV tryptamine in mice and to increase brain 5-hydroxytryptamine concentra­tions.13,14 Although myristicin’s potency is not comparable to that of the more potent MAO inhibitors such as tranylcypromine and iproniazid (which is not available in the United States), it seems adequate when compared with its low toxicity.14 Nutmeg extract is associated with a significant anti­depressant effect in mice, which seemed to be mediated by interaction with the adren­ergic, dopaminergic, and serotonergic sys­tems.13 Nutmeg is associated with sustained increase in sexual activity in animal studies, with no evidence of adverse effects and toxicity, suggesting that nutmeg possesses clinically significant aphrodisiac activity.15

Psychoactive effects can be achieved by ingesting 5 to 15 g of nutmeg.11 Acute nut­meg intoxication produces palpitations, dizziness, anxiety, and hallucinations, mostly resolving within 24 hours, while effects of chronic abuse are reported to be similar to Cannabis use, including euphoria, giddiness, anxiety, fear, sense of impending doom, detachment, confabulation, and hal­lucinations.11,16 Urine drug screens are nega­tive unless other psychoactive substances have been ingested.17

Suspected nutmeg intoxication or poison­ing should be treated with supportive treat­ment. Use sedatives with caution because of alternating periods of delirium and obtunda­tion during nutmeg intoxication.17

In case reports, myristicin poisoning induced CNS neuromodulatory signs that mimicked an anticholinergic hyperstimula­tion state.12,18 Fatal myristicin poisoning is rare; 2 cases have been reported, 1 in com­bination with flunitrazepam (not available in the United States).19,20 Nutmeg also has sedative properties and can cause GI symp­toms when ingesting excessive amounts.1,20,21 Grover et al21 described no harmful effects on blood pressure and electrocardiogram; how­ever, Shah et al22 reported palpitations and dry mouth.

Vanilla
Vanilla (species of the genus Vanilla) con­tains piperonal, also known as heliotropin.1 Piperonal has aromatherapeutic qualities that might elevate mood and well-being. In the early 1990s, the Memorial Sloan- Kettering Cancer Center in New York City described heliotropin as a powerful aroma­therapy tool. Patients who were undergo­ing an MRI in an environment scented with heliotropin demonstrated a 63% reduction in anxiety compared with those who were not exposed to fragrance.23 The Smell and Taste Treatment and Research Foundation in Chicago found that vanilla can promote sexual arousal.24

 

 

Short-term effects of vanillin—a major component of vanilla—include a feeling of relaxation and reduced stress; long-term use can produce an antidepressant effect.1 There are no reports of vanilla abuse to achieve these effects; however, patients might abuse vanilla extract because of its alcohol content (up to 35% ethanol).25

Fennel
The essential oil of fennel (Foeniculum vul­gare) can be neurotoxic and epileptogenic. Skalli and colleagues recently reported a case of seizure induction in a young woman after ingesting cakes containing fennel oil.26 Fennel oil also has been reported to have significant interaction with the fluoroquinolone-type antibiotics. Be aware of adverse effects associ­ated with fennel ingestion; question patients if atypical seizures or reactions to antibiotics occur.27

Spices such as fennel, dill, cinnamon, saf­fron, and anise also contain psychoactive substances that are chemically similar to my­risticin, which can induce sedation, stimula­tion, or hallucinations.7

Black pepper
Piperine, which gives black pepper (Piper ni­grum) its spiciness, enhances thermogenesis of lipid metabolism, accelerates energy me­tabolism, and increases serotonin and endor­phin production in the brain.28 Black pepper is reported to potentiate γ-aminobutyric acid A receptor subtypes,29 and could present possible applications for treating insomnia, epilepsy, and anxiety disorders.

Cloves
Non-culinary uses of clove (Syzygium aro­maticum, a tree in the myrtle family) include flavored cigarettes. However, in 2009 clove cigarettes were banned in the United States as part of a public policy to reduce the number of children who start smoking.30 Eugenol, which constitutes as much as 90% of the essential oil extracted from cloves (and is responsible for the aroma), can cause hepatotoxicity31 and palpitations32; it can be toxic in quantities as low as 5 mL.33 Eugenol is present in other spic­es, such as nutmeg and cinnamon, and has been reported to have sedative properties.1

Mace
Mace is made from the covering of nutmeg (Myristica fragrans) seeds. It has a strong aro­ma resembling that of nutmeg. Whole mace contains 4% to 14% of a volatile oil similar to that found in nutmeg. Because mace con­tains the same oils that make nutmeg psy­choactive1 in excessive amounts—although nutmeg seeds are more potent—be aware of the psychoactive potential of mace.

CinnamonCassia cinnamon (Cinnamomum aromaticum) is spicier and tarter than Ceylon cinnamon (Cinnamomum zeylanicum), which has a more flowery aroma. The 2 types of cinnamon can be distinguished by their different chemical composition. Ceylon cinnamon contains eu­genol and benzyl benzoate; cassia cinnamon contains coumarin.3 Eugenol is reported to have sedative effects.1 Coumarin is a precur­sor molecule in the synthesis of a number of synthetic anticoagulant pharmaceuticals, including coumadin. Because of the toxic component of coumarin, European health agencies have warned against consuming high amounts of cassia.34 There are no re­ports of side effects arising from the occa­sional use of cinnamon as a spice. 

In a study by Frydman-Marom et al,35 cinnamon extract (CEppt) was found to act on the CNS by inhibiting development of Alzheimer’s disease in animal models.


Asarone
Asarone is found in the Asarum family of spices that includes Acorus calamus. Asarone is chemically similar to mescaline. Although anecdotal reports indicate that A. calamus is a hallucinogen, research shows no evidence that it contains hallucinogenic substances.36 Han et al37 reported an antidepressant ef­fect with the essential oil and asarones for the rhizomes of Acorus tatarinowii. In ani­mal studies, asarone was found to reduce spontaneous motor activity, and even in low doses, reduced anxiety without decreasing acuity of perception.38

Ginger
Ginger (Zingiber officinale) is regarded as a sedative, general stimulant, and aphrodisi­ac.1,4,5 Its main constituents are phenolic com­pounds such as gingerols and shogaols, and sesquiterpenes such as zingiberene.4 Ginger is an inhibitor of thromboxane synthetase, a property shared by tricyclic antidepressants.39

Research indicates that 9 compounds found in ginger may interact with the serotonin 5-HT1A receptor, suggesting a possible mechanism for reducing anxiety.40 A study by Nievergelt et al41 indicates that by binding to human serotonin receptors, gin­ger might influence GI function. Ginger ex­tract contains a cholinergic and spasmogenic component, which provides a mechanistic insight for the prokinetic action of ginger.40

Turmeric
Turmeric (Curcuma longa) has been investigat­ed for possible benefit in Alzheimer’s disease42; research into curcumin, the active substance of turmeric, is increasing. Although the original report was retracted after publication, cur­cumin was reported to selectively bind to hu­man cannabinoid receptors type 1 (CB1) with nanomolar affinities and to function as an an­tagonist/inverse agonist.43 However, Gertsch et al44 found that curcumin did not interact functionally with the CB1 receptor, although this compound appears to share ability of the CB1 receptor inverse agonist.

Galangal
Major constituents identified in the galan­gal (or galanga) rhizome and leaf oil were 1,8-cineole, and β-pinene and cam­phor.6 Galangal, a member of the ginger (Zingiberaceae) family, interacts with MAO inhibitors, H2 receptor antagonists, and pro­ton-pump inhibitors.1 Anxiolytic, hallucino­genic, and stimulant properties have been reported.1 An excessive amount can induce diarrhea, dizziness, nausea, and vomiting.1

 

 

Saffron
Stigma of saffron (a member of the family Iridaceae) was found to be significantly more effective than placebo and equally as effica­cious as fluoxetine and imipramine in treat­ing depression. Saffron petal was found to be significantly more effective than placebo and as effective as fluoxetine and saffron stigma in a recent systematic review.45-48

Asafetida
Asafetida (Ferula assa-foetida), when combined with valerian root, is used as a sedative to treat hyperactivity.2 The active ingredients of asafet­ida are the resin, endogenous gum, essential oil, propenyl-isobutylsulfide, umbelliferone, and vanillin. Several of the volatile constitu­ents produce a sedative effect.2 Additive ef­fects can occur between the hypotensive property of asafetida and dopamine receptor agonists such as bromocriptine mesylate. Use caution when combining asafetida in conjunc­tion with a CNS depressant or a stimulant.2 

Recommendations for treating spice-abusers
Patients may present to psychiatry ser­vices with psychological and physiologi­cal evidence of intoxication with culinary spices that may mimic 1) abuse of other substances, 2) primary psychiatric illness, and 3) primary medical illness. When you encounter a patient with a new psychiat­ric symptom, consider inquiring about the abuse of spices.

Patients might abuse more than 1 spice; a comprehensive screening approach might therefore be useful. Caution patients that in­gesting these substance to excess can have harmful effects. Consider appropriate psy­chopharmacotherapy for underlying psy­chiatric symptoms to help patients who use spices maladaptively to self-medicate psy­chiatric symptoms.

Consider abuse of culinary spices in clini­cal presentations of psychiatric symptoms that do not seem adequate for a diagnosis of a primary anxiety, mood, or psychotic disorder, or in cases atypical psychiatric presentations that are—perhaps to your surprise—associat­ed with negative toxicology studies for com­mon, more familiar substances of abuse.

Physicians practicing in an environment where street drugs are difficult to obtain (eg, prisons) should consider monitoring for possible abuse of spices. Based on the available, albeit limited, literature, it ap­pears that most culinary spice–associated intoxication can be managed:
   • with an elevated level of clinical suspicion
   • by ruling out other causes of intoxication
   • using targeted, empirical psychophar­macotherapy to manage symptoms
   • with supportive care that includes close psychiatric follow-up.

Consider comorbid abuse of other, more familiar substances of abuse in patients who misuse spices. As with inhalant abuse, the concept of “substance abuse” in clinical practice may need to be further expanded to include patients who abuse culinary spices. Patients could be screened for psychiatric illnesses known to increase the risk of sub­stance abuse. These might include—but are not limited to:
   • comorbid psychotic disorders
   • mood disorders, particularly bipolar disorders
   • trauma- and stressor-related disor­ders, particularly posttraumatic stress disorder
   • personality disorders, particularly anti­social, borderline, and narcissistic personality disorders.

Pending the availability of population-based studies on abuse of culinary spices, the usual cautions regarding substance abuse seem to be appropriate when caring for these patients. Assessment for and man­agement of comorbid psychiatric conditions is essential in the comprehensive psychiatric care of patients who abuse substances.

Last, general consideration of a 12-step recovery program appears warranted for these patients; the self-reflection and group support of such programs can be useful in helping patients control their use of these substances. 

Bottom Line
Presentation of culinary spice intoxication can parallel that of other medical or psychiatric illnesses, or other drugs of abuse. Consideration and questioning for abuse of spices is necessary to ascertain the psychoactive effects of these substances when used surreptitiously. Management should follow substance abuse treatment protocols: inquiry into patterns of problematic use and readiness to change, assessment and management of psychiatric comorbidity, and referral to a recovery program.
 

Related Resources
• Srinivasan K. Role of spices beyond food flavoring: nu­traceuticals with multiple health effects. Food Reviews International. 2005;21(2):167-188.
• Parthasarathi U, Hategan A, Bourgeois JA. Out of the cup­board and into the clinic: Nutmeg-induced mood disorder. Current Psychiatry. 2013;12(12):E1-E2.


Drug Brand Names
Bromocriptine mesylate • Parlodel         Imipramine • Tofrani
Flunitrazepam • Rohypnol                     Iproniazid • Marsilid
Fluoxetine • Prozac                               Tranylcypromine • Parnate


Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. O’Mahony Carey S. Psychoactive substances. A guide to ethnobotanical plants and herbs, synthetic chemicals, compounds and products. http://www.drugs.ie/ resourcesfiles/guides/Psychoactive_substances_low_res. pdf. Accessed March 4, 2014.
2. Asafetida. Applied Health. http://www.appliedhealth.com/index.php?option=com _content&view=article&id= 108207. Accessed March 4, 2014.
3. Jayatilaka A, Poole SK, Poole CF, et al. Simultaneous micro steam distillation/solvent extraction for the isolation of semivolatile flavor compounds from cinnamon and their separation by series coupled-column gas chromatography. Analytica Chimica Acta. 1995;302(2-3):147-162.
4. Spices. History & Special Collections UCLA Louise M. Darling Biomedical Library. http://unitproj.library.ucla. edu/biomed/spice/index.cfm?displayID=15. Accessed March 4, 2014.
5. Ginger action and uses. Ginger extract. Gingerols. MDidea Web site. http://www.mdidea.com/products/new/ new02108.html. Accessed March 4, 2014.
6. Raina VK, Srivastava SK, Syamasunder KV. The essential oil of ‘greater galangal’ [Alpinia galanga (L.) Willd.] from the lower Himalayan region of India. Flavour and Fragrance Journal. 2002;17(5):358-360.
7. Wenk G. Psychoactive spices - Bon appetite! http://www.psychologytoday.com/blog/your-brain-food/201008/ psychoactive-spices-bon-appetite. Published August 4, 2010. Accessed March 4, 2014.
8. Wax PM. Just a click away: recreational drug Web sites on the Internet. Pediatrics.2002;109(6):e96.
9. Forrester MB. Nutmeg intoxication in Texas, 1998-2004. Hum Exp Toxicol. 2005;24(11):563-566.
10. Abernethy MK, Becker LB. Acute nutmeg intoxication. Am J Emerg Med. 1992;10(5):429-430.
11. Brenner N, Frank OS, Knight E. Chronic nutmeg psychosis. J R Soc Med. 1993;86(3):179-180.
12. McKenna A, Nordt SP, Ryan J. Acute nutmeg poisoning. Eur J Emerg Med. 2004;11(4):240-241.
13. Dhingra D, Sharma A. Antidepressant-like activity of n-hexane extract of nutmeg (Myristica fragrans) seeds in mice. J Med Food. 2006;9(1):84-89.
14. Truitt EB Jr, Duritz G, Ebersberger EM. Evidence of monoamine oxidase inhibition by myristicin and nutmeg. Proc Soc Exp Biol Med. 1963;112:647-650.
15. Tajuddin, Ahmad S, Latif A, et al. An experimental study of sexual function improving effect of Myristica fragrans Houtt. (nutmeg). BMC Complement Altern Med. 2005;5:16.
16. Quin GI, Fanning NF, Plunkett PK. Nutmeg intoxication. J Accid Emerg Med. 1998;15(4):287-288.
17. Barceloux DG. Nutmeg (Myristica fragrans Houtt.) Dis Mon. 2009;55(6):373-379.
18. Demetriades AK, Wallman PD, McGuiness A, et al. Low cost, high risk: accidental nutmeg intoxication. Emerg Med J. 2005;22(3):223-225.
19. Weil A. The use of nutmeg as a psychotropic agent. Bull Narc. 1966;18(4):15-23. http://www.unodc.org/unodc/en/data-and-analysis/bulletin/bulletin_1966-01-01_4_ page003.html. Accessed March 5, 2013.
20. Stein U, Greyer H, Hentschel H. Nutmeg (myristicin) poisoning - report on a fatal case and a series of cases recorded by a poison information centre. Forensic Sci Int. 2001;118(1):87-90.
21. Grover JK, Khandkar S, Vats V, et al. Pharmacological studies on Myristica fragrans—antidiarrheal, hypnotic, analgesic and hemodynamic (blood pressure) parameters. Methods Find Exp Clin Pharmacol. 2002;24(10):675-680.
22. Shah AM, Calello DP, Quintero-Solivan J, et al. The not-so-nice spice: a teenage girl with palpitations and dry mouth. Pediatr Emerg Care. 2011;27(12):1205-1207.
23. Heliotropin. Polarized light microscopy digital image gallery. http://micro.magnet.fsu.edu/primer/techniques/ polarized/gallery/pages/heliotropinsmall.html. Accessed March 5, 2014.
24. Gage E. Romancing the bean. Budget Travel. http://articles.cnn.com/2007-09-11/travel/vanilla_1_vanilla-orchid-totonaca?_s=PM:TRAVEL. Published September 11, 2007. Updated September 16, 2012. Accessed March 5, 2014.
25. Mazor S, DesLauriers CA, Mycyk MB. Adolescent ethanol intoxication from vanilla extract ingestion: a case report. The Internet Journal of Family Practice. 2005;4(1). doi: 10.5580/bc.
26. Skalli S, Soulaymani Bencheikh R. Epileptic seizure induced by fennel essential oil. Epileptic Disord. 2011;13(3):345-347.
27. Zhu M, Wong PY, Li RC. Effect of oral administration of fennel (Foeniculum vulgare) on ciprofloxacin absorption and disposition in the rat. J Pharm Pharmacol. 1999;51(12):1391-1396.
28. Malini T, Arunakaran J, Aruldhas MM, et al. Effects of piperine on the lipid composition and enzymes of the pyruvate-malate cycle in the testis of the rat in vivo. Biochem Mol Biol Int. 1999;47(3):537-545.
29. Zaugg J, Baburin I, Hering S, et al. Identifying GABAA receptor ligands in black pepper by activity profiling, LC-TOFMS, and offline microprobe NMR. Planta Med. 2009; 75(9):888-889. doi: 10.1055/s-0029-1234276.
30. Flavored tobacco. FDA.gov. http://www.fda.gov/TobaccoProducts/ProtectingKidsfromTobacco/ FlavoredTobacco/default.htm. Published September 22, 2009. Updated March 21, 2013. Accessed March 18, 2014.
31. Fujisawa S, Atsumi T, Kadoma Y, et al. Antioxidant and prooxidant action of eugenol-related compounds and their cytotoxicity. Toxicology. 2002;177(1):39-54.
32. Eugenol oil overdose. New York Times Health Guide. http://health.nytimes.com/health/guides/poison/ eugenol-oil-overdose/overview.html. Accessed March 5, 2014.
33. Hartnoll G, Moore D, Douek D. Near fatal ingestion of oil of cloves. Arch Dis Child. 1993;69(3):392-393.
34. Harris E. NPR. German Christmas cookies pose health danger. http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php? storyId=6672644. Published December 25, 2006. Accessed March 5, 2014.
35. Frydman-Marom A, Levin A, Farfara D, et al. Orally administrated cinnamon extract reduces β-amyloid oligomerization and corrects cognitive impairment in Alzheimer’s disease animal models. PLoS One. 2011; 6(1):e16564. doi:10.1371/journal.pone.001656453.
36. Björnstad K, Helander A, Hultén P, et al. Bioanalytical investigation of asarone in connection with Acorus calamus oil intoxications. J Anal Toxicol. 2009;33(9):604-609.
37. Han P, Han T, Peng W, et al. Antidepressant-like effects of essential oil and asarone, a major essential oil component from the rhizome of Acorus tatarinowii. Pharm Biol. 2013;51(5):589-594.
38. Dandiya PC, Menon MK. Actions of asarone on behavior, stress, and hyperpyrexia, and its interaction with central stimulants. J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 1964;145:42-46.
39. Bockon J. Ginger: inhibition of thromboxane synthetase and stimulation of prostacyclin: relevance for medicine and psychiatry. Med Hypotheses. 1986;20(3):271-278.
40. Ghayur MN, Gilani AH. Pharmacological basis for the medicinal use of ginger in gastrointestinal disorders. Dig Dis Sci. 2005;50(10):1889-1897.
41. Nievergelt A, Huonker P, Schoop R, et al. Identification of serotonin 5-HT1A receptor partial agonists in ginger. Bioorg Med Chem. 2010;18(9):3345-3351.
42. Mishra A, Palanivelu K. The effect of curcumin (turmeric) on Alzheimer’s disease: an overview. Ann Indian Acad Neurol. 2008;11(1):13-19.
43. Seely KA, Levi MS, Prather PL. The dietary polyphenols trans-resveratrol and curcumin selectively bind human CB1 cannabinoid receptors with nanomolar affinities and function as antagonists/inverse agonists [retracted in: J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 2009;331(3):1147]. J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 2009;330(1): 31-39.
44. Gertsch J, Pertwee RG, Di Marzo V. Phytocannabinoids beyond the Cannabis plant – do they exist? Br J Pharmacol. 2010;160(3):523-529.
45. Dwyer AV, Whitten DL, Hawrelak JA. Herbal medicines, other than St. John’s Wort, in the treatment of depression: a systematic review. Altern Med Rev. 2011;16(1):40-49.
46. Moshiri E, Basti AA, Noorbala AA, et al. Crocus sativus L. (petal) in the treatment of mild-to-moderate depression: a double-blind, randomized and placebo controlled trial. Phytomedicine. 2006;13(9-10):607-611.
47. Noorbala AA, Akhondzadeh S, Tahmacebi-Pour N, et al. Hydro-alcoholic extract of Crocus sativus L. versus fluoxetine in the treatment of mild to moderate depression: a double-blind, randomized pilot trial. J Ethnopharmacol. 2005;97(2):281-284.
48. Akhondzadeh S, Tahmacebi-Pour N, Noorbala AA, et al. Crocus sativus L. in the treatment of mild to moderate depression: a double-blind, randomized, and placebo-controlled trial. Phytother Res. 2005;19(2):148-151.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

James A. Bourgeois, OD, MD
Clinical Professor
Vice Chair, Clinical Affairs
Department of Psychiatry/Langley Porter Psychiatric Institute
University of California San Francisco
San Francisco, California

Usha Parthasarathi, MBBS
Assistant Clinical Professor

Ana Hategan, MD
Associate Clinical Professor

Department of Psychiatry and Behavioural Neurosciences
Michael G. DeGroote School of Medicine
Faculty of Health Sciences
McMaster University
Hamilton, Ontario, Canada

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(4)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
21-32
Legacy Keywords
culinary spices, psychiatric symptoms, substance abuse
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

James A. Bourgeois, OD, MD
Clinical Professor
Vice Chair, Clinical Affairs
Department of Psychiatry/Langley Porter Psychiatric Institute
University of California San Francisco
San Francisco, California

Usha Parthasarathi, MBBS
Assistant Clinical Professor

Ana Hategan, MD
Associate Clinical Professor

Department of Psychiatry and Behavioural Neurosciences
Michael G. DeGroote School of Medicine
Faculty of Health Sciences
McMaster University
Hamilton, Ontario, Canada

Author and Disclosure Information

James A. Bourgeois, OD, MD
Clinical Professor
Vice Chair, Clinical Affairs
Department of Psychiatry/Langley Porter Psychiatric Institute
University of California San Francisco
San Francisco, California

Usha Parthasarathi, MBBS
Assistant Clinical Professor

Ana Hategan, MD
Associate Clinical Professor

Department of Psychiatry and Behavioural Neurosciences
Michael G. DeGroote School of Medicine
Faculty of Health Sciences
McMaster University
Hamilton, Ontario, Canada

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Many substances that are not typically thought of as “substances of abuse” possess—when adequate­ly dosed—clinically meaningful psychoactive properties. In addition to the more familiar effects of alcohol, psychostimulants, opioids, Cannabis, and hallucinogens, you may encounter psychiatric phenomena resulting from abuse of more obscure substances, including culinary spices.

The clinician treating a patient in an apparent intoxicated state who has a negative drug screen might ask that patient if he (she) abuses spices. This might be particularly relevant when treating patients thought to have limited access to il­licit substances or those with ready access to large amounts of spices, such as prisoners, young patients, and those working in the food service industry.


Abuse of spices can be a problematic diagnosis
Patients may misuse culinary spices to achieve euphoria, or a “natural high.” They may present with medical or psychiat­ric symptoms, including acute altered mental status, but the psychoactive substances are not identified on routine toxicol­ogy studies. In addition, patients may not attribute their use of spices for psychoactive effect to “drugs,” because these materials are legal and readily available. This may lead to misdiagnosis of a systemic medical disorder or a primary psy­chiatric illness to explain the patient’s symptoms and initiat­ing a psychotropic agent and other psychiatric services when a substance abuse program might be a more appropriate clini­cal intervention.

Some spices contain psychoactive compounds that can alter CNS function (Table1-7), might be abused for recreational purposes, and can be toxic in an excessive amount. Internet resources, including anonymous web-based communications, and anecdotal materials about non-traditional recreational drugs, are available to anyone with Internet access.8 However, little research has been conducted into the preva­lence of abuse (Box)9 and spices’ psychoactive properties. The lack of toxicology detection of spices in the medical setting presents a di­agnostic challenge.

The psychoactive plants used in “natural high” products mainly are psychoactively inactive in their natural form, but extracts or alkaloids obtained from them might induce 1 or more of 3 classifications of psychoactivity:
   • stimulant
   • sedative
   • hallucinogenic.

Many of these substances are considered to be aphrodisiac, and some may be abused to increase sexual function.

The following is a review of common spic­es that have been reported to possess poten­tial psychoactive properties.

Nutmeg
Nutmeg (Myristica fragrans) is a common and easily accessible means of reaching euphoria in adults.10 The aromatic oil of nutmeg contains myristicin, a psychoactive substance that is chemically similar to hal­lucinogenic compounds such as mescaline. Its psychoactive effects could be attributed to metabolic formation of amphetamine de­rivatives from its core ingredients, elemicin, myristicin, and safrole.11,12

Nutmeg and its active component, my­risticin, produce central monoamine oxi­dase (MAO) inhibition as evidenced by the ability to lower the convulsive dose of IV tryptamine in mice and to increase brain 5-hydroxytryptamine concentra­tions.13,14 Although myristicin’s potency is not comparable to that of the more potent MAO inhibitors such as tranylcypromine and iproniazid (which is not available in the United States), it seems adequate when compared with its low toxicity.14 Nutmeg extract is associated with a significant anti­depressant effect in mice, which seemed to be mediated by interaction with the adren­ergic, dopaminergic, and serotonergic sys­tems.13 Nutmeg is associated with sustained increase in sexual activity in animal studies, with no evidence of adverse effects and toxicity, suggesting that nutmeg possesses clinically significant aphrodisiac activity.15

Psychoactive effects can be achieved by ingesting 5 to 15 g of nutmeg.11 Acute nut­meg intoxication produces palpitations, dizziness, anxiety, and hallucinations, mostly resolving within 24 hours, while effects of chronic abuse are reported to be similar to Cannabis use, including euphoria, giddiness, anxiety, fear, sense of impending doom, detachment, confabulation, and hal­lucinations.11,16 Urine drug screens are nega­tive unless other psychoactive substances have been ingested.17

Suspected nutmeg intoxication or poison­ing should be treated with supportive treat­ment. Use sedatives with caution because of alternating periods of delirium and obtunda­tion during nutmeg intoxication.17

In case reports, myristicin poisoning induced CNS neuromodulatory signs that mimicked an anticholinergic hyperstimula­tion state.12,18 Fatal myristicin poisoning is rare; 2 cases have been reported, 1 in com­bination with flunitrazepam (not available in the United States).19,20 Nutmeg also has sedative properties and can cause GI symp­toms when ingesting excessive amounts.1,20,21 Grover et al21 described no harmful effects on blood pressure and electrocardiogram; how­ever, Shah et al22 reported palpitations and dry mouth.

Vanilla
Vanilla (species of the genus Vanilla) con­tains piperonal, also known as heliotropin.1 Piperonal has aromatherapeutic qualities that might elevate mood and well-being. In the early 1990s, the Memorial Sloan- Kettering Cancer Center in New York City described heliotropin as a powerful aroma­therapy tool. Patients who were undergo­ing an MRI in an environment scented with heliotropin demonstrated a 63% reduction in anxiety compared with those who were not exposed to fragrance.23 The Smell and Taste Treatment and Research Foundation in Chicago found that vanilla can promote sexual arousal.24

 

 

Short-term effects of vanillin—a major component of vanilla—include a feeling of relaxation and reduced stress; long-term use can produce an antidepressant effect.1 There are no reports of vanilla abuse to achieve these effects; however, patients might abuse vanilla extract because of its alcohol content (up to 35% ethanol).25

Fennel
The essential oil of fennel (Foeniculum vul­gare) can be neurotoxic and epileptogenic. Skalli and colleagues recently reported a case of seizure induction in a young woman after ingesting cakes containing fennel oil.26 Fennel oil also has been reported to have significant interaction with the fluoroquinolone-type antibiotics. Be aware of adverse effects associ­ated with fennel ingestion; question patients if atypical seizures or reactions to antibiotics occur.27

Spices such as fennel, dill, cinnamon, saf­fron, and anise also contain psychoactive substances that are chemically similar to my­risticin, which can induce sedation, stimula­tion, or hallucinations.7

Black pepper
Piperine, which gives black pepper (Piper ni­grum) its spiciness, enhances thermogenesis of lipid metabolism, accelerates energy me­tabolism, and increases serotonin and endor­phin production in the brain.28 Black pepper is reported to potentiate γ-aminobutyric acid A receptor subtypes,29 and could present possible applications for treating insomnia, epilepsy, and anxiety disorders.

Cloves
Non-culinary uses of clove (Syzygium aro­maticum, a tree in the myrtle family) include flavored cigarettes. However, in 2009 clove cigarettes were banned in the United States as part of a public policy to reduce the number of children who start smoking.30 Eugenol, which constitutes as much as 90% of the essential oil extracted from cloves (and is responsible for the aroma), can cause hepatotoxicity31 and palpitations32; it can be toxic in quantities as low as 5 mL.33 Eugenol is present in other spic­es, such as nutmeg and cinnamon, and has been reported to have sedative properties.1

Mace
Mace is made from the covering of nutmeg (Myristica fragrans) seeds. It has a strong aro­ma resembling that of nutmeg. Whole mace contains 4% to 14% of a volatile oil similar to that found in nutmeg. Because mace con­tains the same oils that make nutmeg psy­choactive1 in excessive amounts—although nutmeg seeds are more potent—be aware of the psychoactive potential of mace.

CinnamonCassia cinnamon (Cinnamomum aromaticum) is spicier and tarter than Ceylon cinnamon (Cinnamomum zeylanicum), which has a more flowery aroma. The 2 types of cinnamon can be distinguished by their different chemical composition. Ceylon cinnamon contains eu­genol and benzyl benzoate; cassia cinnamon contains coumarin.3 Eugenol is reported to have sedative effects.1 Coumarin is a precur­sor molecule in the synthesis of a number of synthetic anticoagulant pharmaceuticals, including coumadin. Because of the toxic component of coumarin, European health agencies have warned against consuming high amounts of cassia.34 There are no re­ports of side effects arising from the occa­sional use of cinnamon as a spice. 

In a study by Frydman-Marom et al,35 cinnamon extract (CEppt) was found to act on the CNS by inhibiting development of Alzheimer’s disease in animal models.


Asarone
Asarone is found in the Asarum family of spices that includes Acorus calamus. Asarone is chemically similar to mescaline. Although anecdotal reports indicate that A. calamus is a hallucinogen, research shows no evidence that it contains hallucinogenic substances.36 Han et al37 reported an antidepressant ef­fect with the essential oil and asarones for the rhizomes of Acorus tatarinowii. In ani­mal studies, asarone was found to reduce spontaneous motor activity, and even in low doses, reduced anxiety without decreasing acuity of perception.38

Ginger
Ginger (Zingiber officinale) is regarded as a sedative, general stimulant, and aphrodisi­ac.1,4,5 Its main constituents are phenolic com­pounds such as gingerols and shogaols, and sesquiterpenes such as zingiberene.4 Ginger is an inhibitor of thromboxane synthetase, a property shared by tricyclic antidepressants.39

Research indicates that 9 compounds found in ginger may interact with the serotonin 5-HT1A receptor, suggesting a possible mechanism for reducing anxiety.40 A study by Nievergelt et al41 indicates that by binding to human serotonin receptors, gin­ger might influence GI function. Ginger ex­tract contains a cholinergic and spasmogenic component, which provides a mechanistic insight for the prokinetic action of ginger.40

Turmeric
Turmeric (Curcuma longa) has been investigat­ed for possible benefit in Alzheimer’s disease42; research into curcumin, the active substance of turmeric, is increasing. Although the original report was retracted after publication, cur­cumin was reported to selectively bind to hu­man cannabinoid receptors type 1 (CB1) with nanomolar affinities and to function as an an­tagonist/inverse agonist.43 However, Gertsch et al44 found that curcumin did not interact functionally with the CB1 receptor, although this compound appears to share ability of the CB1 receptor inverse agonist.

Galangal
Major constituents identified in the galan­gal (or galanga) rhizome and leaf oil were 1,8-cineole, and β-pinene and cam­phor.6 Galangal, a member of the ginger (Zingiberaceae) family, interacts with MAO inhibitors, H2 receptor antagonists, and pro­ton-pump inhibitors.1 Anxiolytic, hallucino­genic, and stimulant properties have been reported.1 An excessive amount can induce diarrhea, dizziness, nausea, and vomiting.1

 

 

Saffron
Stigma of saffron (a member of the family Iridaceae) was found to be significantly more effective than placebo and equally as effica­cious as fluoxetine and imipramine in treat­ing depression. Saffron petal was found to be significantly more effective than placebo and as effective as fluoxetine and saffron stigma in a recent systematic review.45-48

Asafetida
Asafetida (Ferula assa-foetida), when combined with valerian root, is used as a sedative to treat hyperactivity.2 The active ingredients of asafet­ida are the resin, endogenous gum, essential oil, propenyl-isobutylsulfide, umbelliferone, and vanillin. Several of the volatile constitu­ents produce a sedative effect.2 Additive ef­fects can occur between the hypotensive property of asafetida and dopamine receptor agonists such as bromocriptine mesylate. Use caution when combining asafetida in conjunc­tion with a CNS depressant or a stimulant.2 

Recommendations for treating spice-abusers
Patients may present to psychiatry ser­vices with psychological and physiologi­cal evidence of intoxication with culinary spices that may mimic 1) abuse of other substances, 2) primary psychiatric illness, and 3) primary medical illness. When you encounter a patient with a new psychiat­ric symptom, consider inquiring about the abuse of spices.

Patients might abuse more than 1 spice; a comprehensive screening approach might therefore be useful. Caution patients that in­gesting these substance to excess can have harmful effects. Consider appropriate psy­chopharmacotherapy for underlying psy­chiatric symptoms to help patients who use spices maladaptively to self-medicate psy­chiatric symptoms.

Consider abuse of culinary spices in clini­cal presentations of psychiatric symptoms that do not seem adequate for a diagnosis of a primary anxiety, mood, or psychotic disorder, or in cases atypical psychiatric presentations that are—perhaps to your surprise—associat­ed with negative toxicology studies for com­mon, more familiar substances of abuse.

Physicians practicing in an environment where street drugs are difficult to obtain (eg, prisons) should consider monitoring for possible abuse of spices. Based on the available, albeit limited, literature, it ap­pears that most culinary spice–associated intoxication can be managed:
   • with an elevated level of clinical suspicion
   • by ruling out other causes of intoxication
   • using targeted, empirical psychophar­macotherapy to manage symptoms
   • with supportive care that includes close psychiatric follow-up.

Consider comorbid abuse of other, more familiar substances of abuse in patients who misuse spices. As with inhalant abuse, the concept of “substance abuse” in clinical practice may need to be further expanded to include patients who abuse culinary spices. Patients could be screened for psychiatric illnesses known to increase the risk of sub­stance abuse. These might include—but are not limited to:
   • comorbid psychotic disorders
   • mood disorders, particularly bipolar disorders
   • trauma- and stressor-related disor­ders, particularly posttraumatic stress disorder
   • personality disorders, particularly anti­social, borderline, and narcissistic personality disorders.

Pending the availability of population-based studies on abuse of culinary spices, the usual cautions regarding substance abuse seem to be appropriate when caring for these patients. Assessment for and man­agement of comorbid psychiatric conditions is essential in the comprehensive psychiatric care of patients who abuse substances.

Last, general consideration of a 12-step recovery program appears warranted for these patients; the self-reflection and group support of such programs can be useful in helping patients control their use of these substances. 

Bottom Line
Presentation of culinary spice intoxication can parallel that of other medical or psychiatric illnesses, or other drugs of abuse. Consideration and questioning for abuse of spices is necessary to ascertain the psychoactive effects of these substances when used surreptitiously. Management should follow substance abuse treatment protocols: inquiry into patterns of problematic use and readiness to change, assessment and management of psychiatric comorbidity, and referral to a recovery program.
 

Related Resources
• Srinivasan K. Role of spices beyond food flavoring: nu­traceuticals with multiple health effects. Food Reviews International. 2005;21(2):167-188.
• Parthasarathi U, Hategan A, Bourgeois JA. Out of the cup­board and into the clinic: Nutmeg-induced mood disorder. Current Psychiatry. 2013;12(12):E1-E2.


Drug Brand Names
Bromocriptine mesylate • Parlodel         Imipramine • Tofrani
Flunitrazepam • Rohypnol                     Iproniazid • Marsilid
Fluoxetine • Prozac                               Tranylcypromine • Parnate


Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Many substances that are not typically thought of as “substances of abuse” possess—when adequate­ly dosed—clinically meaningful psychoactive properties. In addition to the more familiar effects of alcohol, psychostimulants, opioids, Cannabis, and hallucinogens, you may encounter psychiatric phenomena resulting from abuse of more obscure substances, including culinary spices.

The clinician treating a patient in an apparent intoxicated state who has a negative drug screen might ask that patient if he (she) abuses spices. This might be particularly relevant when treating patients thought to have limited access to il­licit substances or those with ready access to large amounts of spices, such as prisoners, young patients, and those working in the food service industry.


Abuse of spices can be a problematic diagnosis
Patients may misuse culinary spices to achieve euphoria, or a “natural high.” They may present with medical or psychiat­ric symptoms, including acute altered mental status, but the psychoactive substances are not identified on routine toxicol­ogy studies. In addition, patients may not attribute their use of spices for psychoactive effect to “drugs,” because these materials are legal and readily available. This may lead to misdiagnosis of a systemic medical disorder or a primary psy­chiatric illness to explain the patient’s symptoms and initiat­ing a psychotropic agent and other psychiatric services when a substance abuse program might be a more appropriate clini­cal intervention.

Some spices contain psychoactive compounds that can alter CNS function (Table1-7), might be abused for recreational purposes, and can be toxic in an excessive amount. Internet resources, including anonymous web-based communications, and anecdotal materials about non-traditional recreational drugs, are available to anyone with Internet access.8 However, little research has been conducted into the preva­lence of abuse (Box)9 and spices’ psychoactive properties. The lack of toxicology detection of spices in the medical setting presents a di­agnostic challenge.

The psychoactive plants used in “natural high” products mainly are psychoactively inactive in their natural form, but extracts or alkaloids obtained from them might induce 1 or more of 3 classifications of psychoactivity:
   • stimulant
   • sedative
   • hallucinogenic.

Many of these substances are considered to be aphrodisiac, and some may be abused to increase sexual function.

The following is a review of common spic­es that have been reported to possess poten­tial psychoactive properties.

Nutmeg
Nutmeg (Myristica fragrans) is a common and easily accessible means of reaching euphoria in adults.10 The aromatic oil of nutmeg contains myristicin, a psychoactive substance that is chemically similar to hal­lucinogenic compounds such as mescaline. Its psychoactive effects could be attributed to metabolic formation of amphetamine de­rivatives from its core ingredients, elemicin, myristicin, and safrole.11,12

Nutmeg and its active component, my­risticin, produce central monoamine oxi­dase (MAO) inhibition as evidenced by the ability to lower the convulsive dose of IV tryptamine in mice and to increase brain 5-hydroxytryptamine concentra­tions.13,14 Although myristicin’s potency is not comparable to that of the more potent MAO inhibitors such as tranylcypromine and iproniazid (which is not available in the United States), it seems adequate when compared with its low toxicity.14 Nutmeg extract is associated with a significant anti­depressant effect in mice, which seemed to be mediated by interaction with the adren­ergic, dopaminergic, and serotonergic sys­tems.13 Nutmeg is associated with sustained increase in sexual activity in animal studies, with no evidence of adverse effects and toxicity, suggesting that nutmeg possesses clinically significant aphrodisiac activity.15

Psychoactive effects can be achieved by ingesting 5 to 15 g of nutmeg.11 Acute nut­meg intoxication produces palpitations, dizziness, anxiety, and hallucinations, mostly resolving within 24 hours, while effects of chronic abuse are reported to be similar to Cannabis use, including euphoria, giddiness, anxiety, fear, sense of impending doom, detachment, confabulation, and hal­lucinations.11,16 Urine drug screens are nega­tive unless other psychoactive substances have been ingested.17

Suspected nutmeg intoxication or poison­ing should be treated with supportive treat­ment. Use sedatives with caution because of alternating periods of delirium and obtunda­tion during nutmeg intoxication.17

In case reports, myristicin poisoning induced CNS neuromodulatory signs that mimicked an anticholinergic hyperstimula­tion state.12,18 Fatal myristicin poisoning is rare; 2 cases have been reported, 1 in com­bination with flunitrazepam (not available in the United States).19,20 Nutmeg also has sedative properties and can cause GI symp­toms when ingesting excessive amounts.1,20,21 Grover et al21 described no harmful effects on blood pressure and electrocardiogram; how­ever, Shah et al22 reported palpitations and dry mouth.

Vanilla
Vanilla (species of the genus Vanilla) con­tains piperonal, also known as heliotropin.1 Piperonal has aromatherapeutic qualities that might elevate mood and well-being. In the early 1990s, the Memorial Sloan- Kettering Cancer Center in New York City described heliotropin as a powerful aroma­therapy tool. Patients who were undergo­ing an MRI in an environment scented with heliotropin demonstrated a 63% reduction in anxiety compared with those who were not exposed to fragrance.23 The Smell and Taste Treatment and Research Foundation in Chicago found that vanilla can promote sexual arousal.24

 

 

Short-term effects of vanillin—a major component of vanilla—include a feeling of relaxation and reduced stress; long-term use can produce an antidepressant effect.1 There are no reports of vanilla abuse to achieve these effects; however, patients might abuse vanilla extract because of its alcohol content (up to 35% ethanol).25

Fennel
The essential oil of fennel (Foeniculum vul­gare) can be neurotoxic and epileptogenic. Skalli and colleagues recently reported a case of seizure induction in a young woman after ingesting cakes containing fennel oil.26 Fennel oil also has been reported to have significant interaction with the fluoroquinolone-type antibiotics. Be aware of adverse effects associ­ated with fennel ingestion; question patients if atypical seizures or reactions to antibiotics occur.27

Spices such as fennel, dill, cinnamon, saf­fron, and anise also contain psychoactive substances that are chemically similar to my­risticin, which can induce sedation, stimula­tion, or hallucinations.7

Black pepper
Piperine, which gives black pepper (Piper ni­grum) its spiciness, enhances thermogenesis of lipid metabolism, accelerates energy me­tabolism, and increases serotonin and endor­phin production in the brain.28 Black pepper is reported to potentiate γ-aminobutyric acid A receptor subtypes,29 and could present possible applications for treating insomnia, epilepsy, and anxiety disorders.

Cloves
Non-culinary uses of clove (Syzygium aro­maticum, a tree in the myrtle family) include flavored cigarettes. However, in 2009 clove cigarettes were banned in the United States as part of a public policy to reduce the number of children who start smoking.30 Eugenol, which constitutes as much as 90% of the essential oil extracted from cloves (and is responsible for the aroma), can cause hepatotoxicity31 and palpitations32; it can be toxic in quantities as low as 5 mL.33 Eugenol is present in other spic­es, such as nutmeg and cinnamon, and has been reported to have sedative properties.1

Mace
Mace is made from the covering of nutmeg (Myristica fragrans) seeds. It has a strong aro­ma resembling that of nutmeg. Whole mace contains 4% to 14% of a volatile oil similar to that found in nutmeg. Because mace con­tains the same oils that make nutmeg psy­choactive1 in excessive amounts—although nutmeg seeds are more potent—be aware of the psychoactive potential of mace.

CinnamonCassia cinnamon (Cinnamomum aromaticum) is spicier and tarter than Ceylon cinnamon (Cinnamomum zeylanicum), which has a more flowery aroma. The 2 types of cinnamon can be distinguished by their different chemical composition. Ceylon cinnamon contains eu­genol and benzyl benzoate; cassia cinnamon contains coumarin.3 Eugenol is reported to have sedative effects.1 Coumarin is a precur­sor molecule in the synthesis of a number of synthetic anticoagulant pharmaceuticals, including coumadin. Because of the toxic component of coumarin, European health agencies have warned against consuming high amounts of cassia.34 There are no re­ports of side effects arising from the occa­sional use of cinnamon as a spice. 

In a study by Frydman-Marom et al,35 cinnamon extract (CEppt) was found to act on the CNS by inhibiting development of Alzheimer’s disease in animal models.


Asarone
Asarone is found in the Asarum family of spices that includes Acorus calamus. Asarone is chemically similar to mescaline. Although anecdotal reports indicate that A. calamus is a hallucinogen, research shows no evidence that it contains hallucinogenic substances.36 Han et al37 reported an antidepressant ef­fect with the essential oil and asarones for the rhizomes of Acorus tatarinowii. In ani­mal studies, asarone was found to reduce spontaneous motor activity, and even in low doses, reduced anxiety without decreasing acuity of perception.38

Ginger
Ginger (Zingiber officinale) is regarded as a sedative, general stimulant, and aphrodisi­ac.1,4,5 Its main constituents are phenolic com­pounds such as gingerols and shogaols, and sesquiterpenes such as zingiberene.4 Ginger is an inhibitor of thromboxane synthetase, a property shared by tricyclic antidepressants.39

Research indicates that 9 compounds found in ginger may interact with the serotonin 5-HT1A receptor, suggesting a possible mechanism for reducing anxiety.40 A study by Nievergelt et al41 indicates that by binding to human serotonin receptors, gin­ger might influence GI function. Ginger ex­tract contains a cholinergic and spasmogenic component, which provides a mechanistic insight for the prokinetic action of ginger.40

Turmeric
Turmeric (Curcuma longa) has been investigat­ed for possible benefit in Alzheimer’s disease42; research into curcumin, the active substance of turmeric, is increasing. Although the original report was retracted after publication, cur­cumin was reported to selectively bind to hu­man cannabinoid receptors type 1 (CB1) with nanomolar affinities and to function as an an­tagonist/inverse agonist.43 However, Gertsch et al44 found that curcumin did not interact functionally with the CB1 receptor, although this compound appears to share ability of the CB1 receptor inverse agonist.

Galangal
Major constituents identified in the galan­gal (or galanga) rhizome and leaf oil were 1,8-cineole, and β-pinene and cam­phor.6 Galangal, a member of the ginger (Zingiberaceae) family, interacts with MAO inhibitors, H2 receptor antagonists, and pro­ton-pump inhibitors.1 Anxiolytic, hallucino­genic, and stimulant properties have been reported.1 An excessive amount can induce diarrhea, dizziness, nausea, and vomiting.1

 

 

Saffron
Stigma of saffron (a member of the family Iridaceae) was found to be significantly more effective than placebo and equally as effica­cious as fluoxetine and imipramine in treat­ing depression. Saffron petal was found to be significantly more effective than placebo and as effective as fluoxetine and saffron stigma in a recent systematic review.45-48

Asafetida
Asafetida (Ferula assa-foetida), when combined with valerian root, is used as a sedative to treat hyperactivity.2 The active ingredients of asafet­ida are the resin, endogenous gum, essential oil, propenyl-isobutylsulfide, umbelliferone, and vanillin. Several of the volatile constitu­ents produce a sedative effect.2 Additive ef­fects can occur between the hypotensive property of asafetida and dopamine receptor agonists such as bromocriptine mesylate. Use caution when combining asafetida in conjunc­tion with a CNS depressant or a stimulant.2 

Recommendations for treating spice-abusers
Patients may present to psychiatry ser­vices with psychological and physiologi­cal evidence of intoxication with culinary spices that may mimic 1) abuse of other substances, 2) primary psychiatric illness, and 3) primary medical illness. When you encounter a patient with a new psychiat­ric symptom, consider inquiring about the abuse of spices.

Patients might abuse more than 1 spice; a comprehensive screening approach might therefore be useful. Caution patients that in­gesting these substance to excess can have harmful effects. Consider appropriate psy­chopharmacotherapy for underlying psy­chiatric symptoms to help patients who use spices maladaptively to self-medicate psy­chiatric symptoms.

Consider abuse of culinary spices in clini­cal presentations of psychiatric symptoms that do not seem adequate for a diagnosis of a primary anxiety, mood, or psychotic disorder, or in cases atypical psychiatric presentations that are—perhaps to your surprise—associat­ed with negative toxicology studies for com­mon, more familiar substances of abuse.

Physicians practicing in an environment where street drugs are difficult to obtain (eg, prisons) should consider monitoring for possible abuse of spices. Based on the available, albeit limited, literature, it ap­pears that most culinary spice–associated intoxication can be managed:
   • with an elevated level of clinical suspicion
   • by ruling out other causes of intoxication
   • using targeted, empirical psychophar­macotherapy to manage symptoms
   • with supportive care that includes close psychiatric follow-up.

Consider comorbid abuse of other, more familiar substances of abuse in patients who misuse spices. As with inhalant abuse, the concept of “substance abuse” in clinical practice may need to be further expanded to include patients who abuse culinary spices. Patients could be screened for psychiatric illnesses known to increase the risk of sub­stance abuse. These might include—but are not limited to:
   • comorbid psychotic disorders
   • mood disorders, particularly bipolar disorders
   • trauma- and stressor-related disor­ders, particularly posttraumatic stress disorder
   • personality disorders, particularly anti­social, borderline, and narcissistic personality disorders.

Pending the availability of population-based studies on abuse of culinary spices, the usual cautions regarding substance abuse seem to be appropriate when caring for these patients. Assessment for and man­agement of comorbid psychiatric conditions is essential in the comprehensive psychiatric care of patients who abuse substances.

Last, general consideration of a 12-step recovery program appears warranted for these patients; the self-reflection and group support of such programs can be useful in helping patients control their use of these substances. 

Bottom Line
Presentation of culinary spice intoxication can parallel that of other medical or psychiatric illnesses, or other drugs of abuse. Consideration and questioning for abuse of spices is necessary to ascertain the psychoactive effects of these substances when used surreptitiously. Management should follow substance abuse treatment protocols: inquiry into patterns of problematic use and readiness to change, assessment and management of psychiatric comorbidity, and referral to a recovery program.
 

Related Resources
• Srinivasan K. Role of spices beyond food flavoring: nu­traceuticals with multiple health effects. Food Reviews International. 2005;21(2):167-188.
• Parthasarathi U, Hategan A, Bourgeois JA. Out of the cup­board and into the clinic: Nutmeg-induced mood disorder. Current Psychiatry. 2013;12(12):E1-E2.


Drug Brand Names
Bromocriptine mesylate • Parlodel         Imipramine • Tofrani
Flunitrazepam • Rohypnol                     Iproniazid • Marsilid
Fluoxetine • Prozac                               Tranylcypromine • Parnate


Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. O’Mahony Carey S. Psychoactive substances. A guide to ethnobotanical plants and herbs, synthetic chemicals, compounds and products. http://www.drugs.ie/ resourcesfiles/guides/Psychoactive_substances_low_res. pdf. Accessed March 4, 2014.
2. Asafetida. Applied Health. http://www.appliedhealth.com/index.php?option=com _content&view=article&id= 108207. Accessed March 4, 2014.
3. Jayatilaka A, Poole SK, Poole CF, et al. Simultaneous micro steam distillation/solvent extraction for the isolation of semivolatile flavor compounds from cinnamon and their separation by series coupled-column gas chromatography. Analytica Chimica Acta. 1995;302(2-3):147-162.
4. Spices. History & Special Collections UCLA Louise M. Darling Biomedical Library. http://unitproj.library.ucla. edu/biomed/spice/index.cfm?displayID=15. Accessed March 4, 2014.
5. Ginger action and uses. Ginger extract. Gingerols. MDidea Web site. http://www.mdidea.com/products/new/ new02108.html. Accessed March 4, 2014.
6. Raina VK, Srivastava SK, Syamasunder KV. The essential oil of ‘greater galangal’ [Alpinia galanga (L.) Willd.] from the lower Himalayan region of India. Flavour and Fragrance Journal. 2002;17(5):358-360.
7. Wenk G. Psychoactive spices - Bon appetite! http://www.psychologytoday.com/blog/your-brain-food/201008/ psychoactive-spices-bon-appetite. Published August 4, 2010. Accessed March 4, 2014.
8. Wax PM. Just a click away: recreational drug Web sites on the Internet. Pediatrics.2002;109(6):e96.
9. Forrester MB. Nutmeg intoxication in Texas, 1998-2004. Hum Exp Toxicol. 2005;24(11):563-566.
10. Abernethy MK, Becker LB. Acute nutmeg intoxication. Am J Emerg Med. 1992;10(5):429-430.
11. Brenner N, Frank OS, Knight E. Chronic nutmeg psychosis. J R Soc Med. 1993;86(3):179-180.
12. McKenna A, Nordt SP, Ryan J. Acute nutmeg poisoning. Eur J Emerg Med. 2004;11(4):240-241.
13. Dhingra D, Sharma A. Antidepressant-like activity of n-hexane extract of nutmeg (Myristica fragrans) seeds in mice. J Med Food. 2006;9(1):84-89.
14. Truitt EB Jr, Duritz G, Ebersberger EM. Evidence of monoamine oxidase inhibition by myristicin and nutmeg. Proc Soc Exp Biol Med. 1963;112:647-650.
15. Tajuddin, Ahmad S, Latif A, et al. An experimental study of sexual function improving effect of Myristica fragrans Houtt. (nutmeg). BMC Complement Altern Med. 2005;5:16.
16. Quin GI, Fanning NF, Plunkett PK. Nutmeg intoxication. J Accid Emerg Med. 1998;15(4):287-288.
17. Barceloux DG. Nutmeg (Myristica fragrans Houtt.) Dis Mon. 2009;55(6):373-379.
18. Demetriades AK, Wallman PD, McGuiness A, et al. Low cost, high risk: accidental nutmeg intoxication. Emerg Med J. 2005;22(3):223-225.
19. Weil A. The use of nutmeg as a psychotropic agent. Bull Narc. 1966;18(4):15-23. http://www.unodc.org/unodc/en/data-and-analysis/bulletin/bulletin_1966-01-01_4_ page003.html. Accessed March 5, 2013.
20. Stein U, Greyer H, Hentschel H. Nutmeg (myristicin) poisoning - report on a fatal case and a series of cases recorded by a poison information centre. Forensic Sci Int. 2001;118(1):87-90.
21. Grover JK, Khandkar S, Vats V, et al. Pharmacological studies on Myristica fragrans—antidiarrheal, hypnotic, analgesic and hemodynamic (blood pressure) parameters. Methods Find Exp Clin Pharmacol. 2002;24(10):675-680.
22. Shah AM, Calello DP, Quintero-Solivan J, et al. The not-so-nice spice: a teenage girl with palpitations and dry mouth. Pediatr Emerg Care. 2011;27(12):1205-1207.
23. Heliotropin. Polarized light microscopy digital image gallery. http://micro.magnet.fsu.edu/primer/techniques/ polarized/gallery/pages/heliotropinsmall.html. Accessed March 5, 2014.
24. Gage E. Romancing the bean. Budget Travel. http://articles.cnn.com/2007-09-11/travel/vanilla_1_vanilla-orchid-totonaca?_s=PM:TRAVEL. Published September 11, 2007. Updated September 16, 2012. Accessed March 5, 2014.
25. Mazor S, DesLauriers CA, Mycyk MB. Adolescent ethanol intoxication from vanilla extract ingestion: a case report. The Internet Journal of Family Practice. 2005;4(1). doi: 10.5580/bc.
26. Skalli S, Soulaymani Bencheikh R. Epileptic seizure induced by fennel essential oil. Epileptic Disord. 2011;13(3):345-347.
27. Zhu M, Wong PY, Li RC. Effect of oral administration of fennel (Foeniculum vulgare) on ciprofloxacin absorption and disposition in the rat. J Pharm Pharmacol. 1999;51(12):1391-1396.
28. Malini T, Arunakaran J, Aruldhas MM, et al. Effects of piperine on the lipid composition and enzymes of the pyruvate-malate cycle in the testis of the rat in vivo. Biochem Mol Biol Int. 1999;47(3):537-545.
29. Zaugg J, Baburin I, Hering S, et al. Identifying GABAA receptor ligands in black pepper by activity profiling, LC-TOFMS, and offline microprobe NMR. Planta Med. 2009; 75(9):888-889. doi: 10.1055/s-0029-1234276.
30. Flavored tobacco. FDA.gov. http://www.fda.gov/TobaccoProducts/ProtectingKidsfromTobacco/ FlavoredTobacco/default.htm. Published September 22, 2009. Updated March 21, 2013. Accessed March 18, 2014.
31. Fujisawa S, Atsumi T, Kadoma Y, et al. Antioxidant and prooxidant action of eugenol-related compounds and their cytotoxicity. Toxicology. 2002;177(1):39-54.
32. Eugenol oil overdose. New York Times Health Guide. http://health.nytimes.com/health/guides/poison/ eugenol-oil-overdose/overview.html. Accessed March 5, 2014.
33. Hartnoll G, Moore D, Douek D. Near fatal ingestion of oil of cloves. Arch Dis Child. 1993;69(3):392-393.
34. Harris E. NPR. German Christmas cookies pose health danger. http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php? storyId=6672644. Published December 25, 2006. Accessed March 5, 2014.
35. Frydman-Marom A, Levin A, Farfara D, et al. Orally administrated cinnamon extract reduces β-amyloid oligomerization and corrects cognitive impairment in Alzheimer’s disease animal models. PLoS One. 2011; 6(1):e16564. doi:10.1371/journal.pone.001656453.
36. Björnstad K, Helander A, Hultén P, et al. Bioanalytical investigation of asarone in connection with Acorus calamus oil intoxications. J Anal Toxicol. 2009;33(9):604-609.
37. Han P, Han T, Peng W, et al. Antidepressant-like effects of essential oil and asarone, a major essential oil component from the rhizome of Acorus tatarinowii. Pharm Biol. 2013;51(5):589-594.
38. Dandiya PC, Menon MK. Actions of asarone on behavior, stress, and hyperpyrexia, and its interaction with central stimulants. J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 1964;145:42-46.
39. Bockon J. Ginger: inhibition of thromboxane synthetase and stimulation of prostacyclin: relevance for medicine and psychiatry. Med Hypotheses. 1986;20(3):271-278.
40. Ghayur MN, Gilani AH. Pharmacological basis for the medicinal use of ginger in gastrointestinal disorders. Dig Dis Sci. 2005;50(10):1889-1897.
41. Nievergelt A, Huonker P, Schoop R, et al. Identification of serotonin 5-HT1A receptor partial agonists in ginger. Bioorg Med Chem. 2010;18(9):3345-3351.
42. Mishra A, Palanivelu K. The effect of curcumin (turmeric) on Alzheimer’s disease: an overview. Ann Indian Acad Neurol. 2008;11(1):13-19.
43. Seely KA, Levi MS, Prather PL. The dietary polyphenols trans-resveratrol and curcumin selectively bind human CB1 cannabinoid receptors with nanomolar affinities and function as antagonists/inverse agonists [retracted in: J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 2009;331(3):1147]. J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 2009;330(1): 31-39.
44. Gertsch J, Pertwee RG, Di Marzo V. Phytocannabinoids beyond the Cannabis plant – do they exist? Br J Pharmacol. 2010;160(3):523-529.
45. Dwyer AV, Whitten DL, Hawrelak JA. Herbal medicines, other than St. John’s Wort, in the treatment of depression: a systematic review. Altern Med Rev. 2011;16(1):40-49.
46. Moshiri E, Basti AA, Noorbala AA, et al. Crocus sativus L. (petal) in the treatment of mild-to-moderate depression: a double-blind, randomized and placebo controlled trial. Phytomedicine. 2006;13(9-10):607-611.
47. Noorbala AA, Akhondzadeh S, Tahmacebi-Pour N, et al. Hydro-alcoholic extract of Crocus sativus L. versus fluoxetine in the treatment of mild to moderate depression: a double-blind, randomized pilot trial. J Ethnopharmacol. 2005;97(2):281-284.
48. Akhondzadeh S, Tahmacebi-Pour N, Noorbala AA, et al. Crocus sativus L. in the treatment of mild to moderate depression: a double-blind, randomized, and placebo-controlled trial. Phytother Res. 2005;19(2):148-151.

References


1. O’Mahony Carey S. Psychoactive substances. A guide to ethnobotanical plants and herbs, synthetic chemicals, compounds and products. http://www.drugs.ie/ resourcesfiles/guides/Psychoactive_substances_low_res. pdf. Accessed March 4, 2014.
2. Asafetida. Applied Health. http://www.appliedhealth.com/index.php?option=com _content&view=article&id= 108207. Accessed March 4, 2014.
3. Jayatilaka A, Poole SK, Poole CF, et al. Simultaneous micro steam distillation/solvent extraction for the isolation of semivolatile flavor compounds from cinnamon and their separation by series coupled-column gas chromatography. Analytica Chimica Acta. 1995;302(2-3):147-162.
4. Spices. History & Special Collections UCLA Louise M. Darling Biomedical Library. http://unitproj.library.ucla. edu/biomed/spice/index.cfm?displayID=15. Accessed March 4, 2014.
5. Ginger action and uses. Ginger extract. Gingerols. MDidea Web site. http://www.mdidea.com/products/new/ new02108.html. Accessed March 4, 2014.
6. Raina VK, Srivastava SK, Syamasunder KV. The essential oil of ‘greater galangal’ [Alpinia galanga (L.) Willd.] from the lower Himalayan region of India. Flavour and Fragrance Journal. 2002;17(5):358-360.
7. Wenk G. Psychoactive spices - Bon appetite! http://www.psychologytoday.com/blog/your-brain-food/201008/ psychoactive-spices-bon-appetite. Published August 4, 2010. Accessed March 4, 2014.
8. Wax PM. Just a click away: recreational drug Web sites on the Internet. Pediatrics.2002;109(6):e96.
9. Forrester MB. Nutmeg intoxication in Texas, 1998-2004. Hum Exp Toxicol. 2005;24(11):563-566.
10. Abernethy MK, Becker LB. Acute nutmeg intoxication. Am J Emerg Med. 1992;10(5):429-430.
11. Brenner N, Frank OS, Knight E. Chronic nutmeg psychosis. J R Soc Med. 1993;86(3):179-180.
12. McKenna A, Nordt SP, Ryan J. Acute nutmeg poisoning. Eur J Emerg Med. 2004;11(4):240-241.
13. Dhingra D, Sharma A. Antidepressant-like activity of n-hexane extract of nutmeg (Myristica fragrans) seeds in mice. J Med Food. 2006;9(1):84-89.
14. Truitt EB Jr, Duritz G, Ebersberger EM. Evidence of monoamine oxidase inhibition by myristicin and nutmeg. Proc Soc Exp Biol Med. 1963;112:647-650.
15. Tajuddin, Ahmad S, Latif A, et al. An experimental study of sexual function improving effect of Myristica fragrans Houtt. (nutmeg). BMC Complement Altern Med. 2005;5:16.
16. Quin GI, Fanning NF, Plunkett PK. Nutmeg intoxication. J Accid Emerg Med. 1998;15(4):287-288.
17. Barceloux DG. Nutmeg (Myristica fragrans Houtt.) Dis Mon. 2009;55(6):373-379.
18. Demetriades AK, Wallman PD, McGuiness A, et al. Low cost, high risk: accidental nutmeg intoxication. Emerg Med J. 2005;22(3):223-225.
19. Weil A. The use of nutmeg as a psychotropic agent. Bull Narc. 1966;18(4):15-23. http://www.unodc.org/unodc/en/data-and-analysis/bulletin/bulletin_1966-01-01_4_ page003.html. Accessed March 5, 2013.
20. Stein U, Greyer H, Hentschel H. Nutmeg (myristicin) poisoning - report on a fatal case and a series of cases recorded by a poison information centre. Forensic Sci Int. 2001;118(1):87-90.
21. Grover JK, Khandkar S, Vats V, et al. Pharmacological studies on Myristica fragrans—antidiarrheal, hypnotic, analgesic and hemodynamic (blood pressure) parameters. Methods Find Exp Clin Pharmacol. 2002;24(10):675-680.
22. Shah AM, Calello DP, Quintero-Solivan J, et al. The not-so-nice spice: a teenage girl with palpitations and dry mouth. Pediatr Emerg Care. 2011;27(12):1205-1207.
23. Heliotropin. Polarized light microscopy digital image gallery. http://micro.magnet.fsu.edu/primer/techniques/ polarized/gallery/pages/heliotropinsmall.html. Accessed March 5, 2014.
24. Gage E. Romancing the bean. Budget Travel. http://articles.cnn.com/2007-09-11/travel/vanilla_1_vanilla-orchid-totonaca?_s=PM:TRAVEL. Published September 11, 2007. Updated September 16, 2012. Accessed March 5, 2014.
25. Mazor S, DesLauriers CA, Mycyk MB. Adolescent ethanol intoxication from vanilla extract ingestion: a case report. The Internet Journal of Family Practice. 2005;4(1). doi: 10.5580/bc.
26. Skalli S, Soulaymani Bencheikh R. Epileptic seizure induced by fennel essential oil. Epileptic Disord. 2011;13(3):345-347.
27. Zhu M, Wong PY, Li RC. Effect of oral administration of fennel (Foeniculum vulgare) on ciprofloxacin absorption and disposition in the rat. J Pharm Pharmacol. 1999;51(12):1391-1396.
28. Malini T, Arunakaran J, Aruldhas MM, et al. Effects of piperine on the lipid composition and enzymes of the pyruvate-malate cycle in the testis of the rat in vivo. Biochem Mol Biol Int. 1999;47(3):537-545.
29. Zaugg J, Baburin I, Hering S, et al. Identifying GABAA receptor ligands in black pepper by activity profiling, LC-TOFMS, and offline microprobe NMR. Planta Med. 2009; 75(9):888-889. doi: 10.1055/s-0029-1234276.
30. Flavored tobacco. FDA.gov. http://www.fda.gov/TobaccoProducts/ProtectingKidsfromTobacco/ FlavoredTobacco/default.htm. Published September 22, 2009. Updated March 21, 2013. Accessed March 18, 2014.
31. Fujisawa S, Atsumi T, Kadoma Y, et al. Antioxidant and prooxidant action of eugenol-related compounds and their cytotoxicity. Toxicology. 2002;177(1):39-54.
32. Eugenol oil overdose. New York Times Health Guide. http://health.nytimes.com/health/guides/poison/ eugenol-oil-overdose/overview.html. Accessed March 5, 2014.
33. Hartnoll G, Moore D, Douek D. Near fatal ingestion of oil of cloves. Arch Dis Child. 1993;69(3):392-393.
34. Harris E. NPR. German Christmas cookies pose health danger. http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php? storyId=6672644. Published December 25, 2006. Accessed March 5, 2014.
35. Frydman-Marom A, Levin A, Farfara D, et al. Orally administrated cinnamon extract reduces β-amyloid oligomerization and corrects cognitive impairment in Alzheimer’s disease animal models. PLoS One. 2011; 6(1):e16564. doi:10.1371/journal.pone.001656453.
36. Björnstad K, Helander A, Hultén P, et al. Bioanalytical investigation of asarone in connection with Acorus calamus oil intoxications. J Anal Toxicol. 2009;33(9):604-609.
37. Han P, Han T, Peng W, et al. Antidepressant-like effects of essential oil and asarone, a major essential oil component from the rhizome of Acorus tatarinowii. Pharm Biol. 2013;51(5):589-594.
38. Dandiya PC, Menon MK. Actions of asarone on behavior, stress, and hyperpyrexia, and its interaction with central stimulants. J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 1964;145:42-46.
39. Bockon J. Ginger: inhibition of thromboxane synthetase and stimulation of prostacyclin: relevance for medicine and psychiatry. Med Hypotheses. 1986;20(3):271-278.
40. Ghayur MN, Gilani AH. Pharmacological basis for the medicinal use of ginger in gastrointestinal disorders. Dig Dis Sci. 2005;50(10):1889-1897.
41. Nievergelt A, Huonker P, Schoop R, et al. Identification of serotonin 5-HT1A receptor partial agonists in ginger. Bioorg Med Chem. 2010;18(9):3345-3351.
42. Mishra A, Palanivelu K. The effect of curcumin (turmeric) on Alzheimer’s disease: an overview. Ann Indian Acad Neurol. 2008;11(1):13-19.
43. Seely KA, Levi MS, Prather PL. The dietary polyphenols trans-resveratrol and curcumin selectively bind human CB1 cannabinoid receptors with nanomolar affinities and function as antagonists/inverse agonists [retracted in: J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 2009;331(3):1147]. J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 2009;330(1): 31-39.
44. Gertsch J, Pertwee RG, Di Marzo V. Phytocannabinoids beyond the Cannabis plant – do they exist? Br J Pharmacol. 2010;160(3):523-529.
45. Dwyer AV, Whitten DL, Hawrelak JA. Herbal medicines, other than St. John’s Wort, in the treatment of depression: a systematic review. Altern Med Rev. 2011;16(1):40-49.
46. Moshiri E, Basti AA, Noorbala AA, et al. Crocus sativus L. (petal) in the treatment of mild-to-moderate depression: a double-blind, randomized and placebo controlled trial. Phytomedicine. 2006;13(9-10):607-611.
47. Noorbala AA, Akhondzadeh S, Tahmacebi-Pour N, et al. Hydro-alcoholic extract of Crocus sativus L. versus fluoxetine in the treatment of mild to moderate depression: a double-blind, randomized pilot trial. J Ethnopharmacol. 2005;97(2):281-284.
48. Akhondzadeh S, Tahmacebi-Pour N, Noorbala AA, et al. Crocus sativus L. in the treatment of mild to moderate depression: a double-blind, randomized, and placebo-controlled trial. Phytother Res. 2005;19(2):148-151.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(4)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(4)
Page Number
21-32
Page Number
21-32
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Taking the spice route: Psychoactive properties of culinary spices
Display Headline
Taking the spice route: Psychoactive properties of culinary spices
Legacy Keywords
culinary spices, psychiatric symptoms, substance abuse
Legacy Keywords
culinary spices, psychiatric symptoms, substance abuse
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Strategies to enhance patients’ acceptance of voluntary psychiatric admission

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 03/28/2019 - 15:51
Display Headline
Strategies to enhance patients’ acceptance of voluntary psychiatric admission

Voluntary psychiatric admission has become more problematic because of managed care authorization policies, restrictive inpatient entry criteria, uninsured
patients, and a decline in hospital beds.

In addition, patients often are ambivalent or resistant to hospitalization. It can be challenging to persuade a patient, as well as his (her) family, of the need for psychiatric admission, even when he acknowledges emotional suffering and impaired functioning.

The strategies offered here can enhance the probability that your patient, and his family, will agree to voluntary admission.

Provide a compelling rationale. Stress the need for immediate, specialized, and intensive services. If the patient is receiving outpatient mental health care, advise him that these services have been unsuccessful in achieving safety and clinical stability, and that it is not possible to quickly establish a modified outpatient plan or a day hospital placement that would meet his needs. For a patient who is not receiving outpatient care, explain that it is not feasible to implement a workable plan “from the ground up” in a timely manner.

Reset the clock. Redefine admission as a way to interrupt a downward spiral and offer a new start with a treatment team that has “fresh eyes.”

Use language of the medical model. Explain to the patient that a person who has a dangerously high, poorly controlled body temperature unquestionably needs to be hospitalized and that, by analogy, he—your patient—is running a “high emotional temperature” that warrants inpatient care.

Consider having the patient complete a brief, self-report rating scale, such as the Beck Depression Inventory-II or the Generalized Anxiety Disorder 7-item scale.1 Review findings with him and his family to show the frequency, duration, and severity of symptoms.

Dispel misconceptions and myths. These include catastrophic fears—often based on stereotypes—about coercive treatment and indefinite confinement. Clarifying what a patient can expect with voluntary admission with regard to probable length of stay, participation in the milieu, visitation, and discharge planning is helpful for allaying such fears.

Build bridges with significant others. Ally with parties who support voluntary admission, including the patient’s primary care or mental health provider, if appropriate. Getting family members and significant others on board; having them talk with the patient can go a long way toward reaching an agreement to proceed with hospitalization.

Maintain an empathic stance.
For many patients, psychiatric admission evokes considerable distress. Remain sensitive to the situational concerns that typically arise, such as disruption to family and job responsibilities, insurance coverage, and whether there will be an outpatient plan in place at discharge.

A psychiatric admission often triggers long-standing psychological vulnerabilities— such as feelings of humiliation or failure, fear of separation and abandonment, worry about being a burden to family, stigma, and anxiety about having a serious mental illness—all of which might require exploration to allay upset and enhance compliance.


Disclosure
Dr. Pollak reports no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned with this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

Reference
1. Blais MA. A guide to applying rating scales in clinical psychiatry. Psychiatr Times. 2011;28:58-62.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Jerrold Pollak, PhD

Program in Medical and Forensic Neuropsychology, and the Emergency Services Department, Seacoast Mental Health Center
Portsmouth, New Hampshire.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
54
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Jerrold Pollak, PhD

Program in Medical and Forensic Neuropsychology, and the Emergency Services Department, Seacoast Mental Health Center
Portsmouth, New Hampshire.

Author and Disclosure Information

Jerrold Pollak, PhD

Program in Medical and Forensic Neuropsychology, and the Emergency Services Department, Seacoast Mental Health Center
Portsmouth, New Hampshire.

Article PDF
Article PDF

Voluntary psychiatric admission has become more problematic because of managed care authorization policies, restrictive inpatient entry criteria, uninsured
patients, and a decline in hospital beds.

In addition, patients often are ambivalent or resistant to hospitalization. It can be challenging to persuade a patient, as well as his (her) family, of the need for psychiatric admission, even when he acknowledges emotional suffering and impaired functioning.

The strategies offered here can enhance the probability that your patient, and his family, will agree to voluntary admission.

Provide a compelling rationale. Stress the need for immediate, specialized, and intensive services. If the patient is receiving outpatient mental health care, advise him that these services have been unsuccessful in achieving safety and clinical stability, and that it is not possible to quickly establish a modified outpatient plan or a day hospital placement that would meet his needs. For a patient who is not receiving outpatient care, explain that it is not feasible to implement a workable plan “from the ground up” in a timely manner.

Reset the clock. Redefine admission as a way to interrupt a downward spiral and offer a new start with a treatment team that has “fresh eyes.”

Use language of the medical model. Explain to the patient that a person who has a dangerously high, poorly controlled body temperature unquestionably needs to be hospitalized and that, by analogy, he—your patient—is running a “high emotional temperature” that warrants inpatient care.

Consider having the patient complete a brief, self-report rating scale, such as the Beck Depression Inventory-II or the Generalized Anxiety Disorder 7-item scale.1 Review findings with him and his family to show the frequency, duration, and severity of symptoms.

Dispel misconceptions and myths. These include catastrophic fears—often based on stereotypes—about coercive treatment and indefinite confinement. Clarifying what a patient can expect with voluntary admission with regard to probable length of stay, participation in the milieu, visitation, and discharge planning is helpful for allaying such fears.

Build bridges with significant others. Ally with parties who support voluntary admission, including the patient’s primary care or mental health provider, if appropriate. Getting family members and significant others on board; having them talk with the patient can go a long way toward reaching an agreement to proceed with hospitalization.

Maintain an empathic stance.
For many patients, psychiatric admission evokes considerable distress. Remain sensitive to the situational concerns that typically arise, such as disruption to family and job responsibilities, insurance coverage, and whether there will be an outpatient plan in place at discharge.

A psychiatric admission often triggers long-standing psychological vulnerabilities— such as feelings of humiliation or failure, fear of separation and abandonment, worry about being a burden to family, stigma, and anxiety about having a serious mental illness—all of which might require exploration to allay upset and enhance compliance.


Disclosure
Dr. Pollak reports no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned with this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Voluntary psychiatric admission has become more problematic because of managed care authorization policies, restrictive inpatient entry criteria, uninsured
patients, and a decline in hospital beds.

In addition, patients often are ambivalent or resistant to hospitalization. It can be challenging to persuade a patient, as well as his (her) family, of the need for psychiatric admission, even when he acknowledges emotional suffering and impaired functioning.

The strategies offered here can enhance the probability that your patient, and his family, will agree to voluntary admission.

Provide a compelling rationale. Stress the need for immediate, specialized, and intensive services. If the patient is receiving outpatient mental health care, advise him that these services have been unsuccessful in achieving safety and clinical stability, and that it is not possible to quickly establish a modified outpatient plan or a day hospital placement that would meet his needs. For a patient who is not receiving outpatient care, explain that it is not feasible to implement a workable plan “from the ground up” in a timely manner.

Reset the clock. Redefine admission as a way to interrupt a downward spiral and offer a new start with a treatment team that has “fresh eyes.”

Use language of the medical model. Explain to the patient that a person who has a dangerously high, poorly controlled body temperature unquestionably needs to be hospitalized and that, by analogy, he—your patient—is running a “high emotional temperature” that warrants inpatient care.

Consider having the patient complete a brief, self-report rating scale, such as the Beck Depression Inventory-II or the Generalized Anxiety Disorder 7-item scale.1 Review findings with him and his family to show the frequency, duration, and severity of symptoms.

Dispel misconceptions and myths. These include catastrophic fears—often based on stereotypes—about coercive treatment and indefinite confinement. Clarifying what a patient can expect with voluntary admission with regard to probable length of stay, participation in the milieu, visitation, and discharge planning is helpful for allaying such fears.

Build bridges with significant others. Ally with parties who support voluntary admission, including the patient’s primary care or mental health provider, if appropriate. Getting family members and significant others on board; having them talk with the patient can go a long way toward reaching an agreement to proceed with hospitalization.

Maintain an empathic stance.
For many patients, psychiatric admission evokes considerable distress. Remain sensitive to the situational concerns that typically arise, such as disruption to family and job responsibilities, insurance coverage, and whether there will be an outpatient plan in place at discharge.

A psychiatric admission often triggers long-standing psychological vulnerabilities— such as feelings of humiliation or failure, fear of separation and abandonment, worry about being a burden to family, stigma, and anxiety about having a serious mental illness—all of which might require exploration to allay upset and enhance compliance.


Disclosure
Dr. Pollak reports no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned with this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

Reference
1. Blais MA. A guide to applying rating scales in clinical psychiatry. Psychiatr Times. 2011;28:58-62.

References

Reference
1. Blais MA. A guide to applying rating scales in clinical psychiatry. Psychiatr Times. 2011;28:58-62.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Page Number
54
Page Number
54
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Strategies to enhance patients’ acceptance of voluntary psychiatric admission
Display Headline
Strategies to enhance patients’ acceptance of voluntary psychiatric admission
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Be aware: Sudden discontinuation of a psychotropic risks a lethal outcome

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:18
Display Headline
Be aware: Sudden discontinuation of a psychotropic risks a lethal outcome

For mentally ill young men, especially, abruptly stopping a psychotropic medication can be lethal.1 Under such circumstances, excited delirium syndrome (EDS), also known as sudden in-custody death syndrome and Bell’s mania, can occur, warranting your careful observation.

Approximately 10% of EDS cases are fatal2; >95% of fatalities occur in men
(mean age, 36 years).3 Most cases involve stimulant abuse—usually cocaine, although cases associated with methamphetamine, phencyclidine, and LSD have been reported. Patients who present with EDS experience a characteristic loss of
the dopamine transporter in the striatum and excessive dopamine stimulation in
the striatum.


What should you watch for?

Other syndromes and disorders can mimic EDS (Table), but there are certain specific symptoms to look for. Patients who have EDS can present with delirium and an excited or agitated state. Other common symptoms include:
   • altered sensorium
   • aggressive, agitated behavior
   • “superhuman” strength (including a tendency to break glass or unwillingness
      to yield to overwhelming force)
   • diaphoresis
   • hyperthermia
   • attraction to light.

Patients who have EDS often exhibit constant physical movement. They are likely to be naked or inadequately clothed; to sweat profusely; and to make unintelligible, animal-like noises. They are insensitive to extreme pain. In a small percentage of cases, EDS progresses to sudden cardiopulmonary arrestand death.3


Medication or restraints?
Many clinicians consider aggressive chemical sedation the first-line intervention for
EDS2,3; choice of medication varies from practice to practice. Restraints often are
necessary to ensure the safety of patient and staff, but use them only in conjunction with aggressive chemical sedation. Physical struggle is a greater contributor to catecholamine surge and metabolic acidosis than other types of exertion; methods of physical control should therefore minimize the time a patient spends struggling while safely achieving physical control.


What is the treatment for EDS?

Begin treatment while you are evaluating the patient for precipitating causes or additional pathology. There are cases of death from EDS even with minimal restraint (such as handcuffs),1,2 without the use of an electronic control device or so-called hog-tie restraint.

When providing pharmacotherapy for EDS, consider a benzodiazepine (midazolam, lorazepam, diazepam), an antipsychotic (haloperidol, droperidol, ziprasidone, olanzapine), or ketamine.4 Because these agents can have depressive respiratory and cardiovascular effects, continuously monitor heart and lungs.


Disclosure
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. Morrison A, Sadler D. Death of a psychiatric patient during physical restraint. Excited delirium—a case report. Med Sci Law. 2001;41(1):46-50.
2. Vilke GM, Debard ML, Chan TC, et al. Excited delirium syndrome (ExDS): defining based on a review of the literature. J Emerg Med. 2012;43(5):897-905.
4. Vilke GM, Payne-James J, Karch SB. Excited delirium syndrome (ExDS): redefining an old diagnosis. J Forensic Leg Med. 2012;19(1):7-11.
4. Hick JL, Ho JD. Ketamine chemical restraint to facilitate rescue of a combative “jumper.” Prehosp Emerg Care. 2005; 9(1):85-89.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Shailesh Jain, MD, MPH, ABDH
Associate Professor and Regional Chair

Rakesh Jain, MD, MPH
Associate Clinical Professor

Department of Psychiatry,
Texas Tech Health Science Center,
Permian Basin, Odessa, Texas

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
47-48
Legacy Keywords
psychotropic medications, excited delirium syndrome (EDS), sudden-in-custody death syndrome, Bell's mania
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Shailesh Jain, MD, MPH, ABDH
Associate Professor and Regional Chair

Rakesh Jain, MD, MPH
Associate Clinical Professor

Department of Psychiatry,
Texas Tech Health Science Center,
Permian Basin, Odessa, Texas

Author and Disclosure Information

Shailesh Jain, MD, MPH, ABDH
Associate Professor and Regional Chair

Rakesh Jain, MD, MPH
Associate Clinical Professor

Department of Psychiatry,
Texas Tech Health Science Center,
Permian Basin, Odessa, Texas

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

For mentally ill young men, especially, abruptly stopping a psychotropic medication can be lethal.1 Under such circumstances, excited delirium syndrome (EDS), also known as sudden in-custody death syndrome and Bell’s mania, can occur, warranting your careful observation.

Approximately 10% of EDS cases are fatal2; >95% of fatalities occur in men
(mean age, 36 years).3 Most cases involve stimulant abuse—usually cocaine, although cases associated with methamphetamine, phencyclidine, and LSD have been reported. Patients who present with EDS experience a characteristic loss of
the dopamine transporter in the striatum and excessive dopamine stimulation in
the striatum.


What should you watch for?

Other syndromes and disorders can mimic EDS (Table), but there are certain specific symptoms to look for. Patients who have EDS can present with delirium and an excited or agitated state. Other common symptoms include:
   • altered sensorium
   • aggressive, agitated behavior
   • “superhuman” strength (including a tendency to break glass or unwillingness
      to yield to overwhelming force)
   • diaphoresis
   • hyperthermia
   • attraction to light.

Patients who have EDS often exhibit constant physical movement. They are likely to be naked or inadequately clothed; to sweat profusely; and to make unintelligible, animal-like noises. They are insensitive to extreme pain. In a small percentage of cases, EDS progresses to sudden cardiopulmonary arrestand death.3


Medication or restraints?
Many clinicians consider aggressive chemical sedation the first-line intervention for
EDS2,3; choice of medication varies from practice to practice. Restraints often are
necessary to ensure the safety of patient and staff, but use them only in conjunction with aggressive chemical sedation. Physical struggle is a greater contributor to catecholamine surge and metabolic acidosis than other types of exertion; methods of physical control should therefore minimize the time a patient spends struggling while safely achieving physical control.


What is the treatment for EDS?

Begin treatment while you are evaluating the patient for precipitating causes or additional pathology. There are cases of death from EDS even with minimal restraint (such as handcuffs),1,2 without the use of an electronic control device or so-called hog-tie restraint.

When providing pharmacotherapy for EDS, consider a benzodiazepine (midazolam, lorazepam, diazepam), an antipsychotic (haloperidol, droperidol, ziprasidone, olanzapine), or ketamine.4 Because these agents can have depressive respiratory and cardiovascular effects, continuously monitor heart and lungs.


Disclosure
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

For mentally ill young men, especially, abruptly stopping a psychotropic medication can be lethal.1 Under such circumstances, excited delirium syndrome (EDS), also known as sudden in-custody death syndrome and Bell’s mania, can occur, warranting your careful observation.

Approximately 10% of EDS cases are fatal2; >95% of fatalities occur in men
(mean age, 36 years).3 Most cases involve stimulant abuse—usually cocaine, although cases associated with methamphetamine, phencyclidine, and LSD have been reported. Patients who present with EDS experience a characteristic loss of
the dopamine transporter in the striatum and excessive dopamine stimulation in
the striatum.


What should you watch for?

Other syndromes and disorders can mimic EDS (Table), but there are certain specific symptoms to look for. Patients who have EDS can present with delirium and an excited or agitated state. Other common symptoms include:
   • altered sensorium
   • aggressive, agitated behavior
   • “superhuman” strength (including a tendency to break glass or unwillingness
      to yield to overwhelming force)
   • diaphoresis
   • hyperthermia
   • attraction to light.

Patients who have EDS often exhibit constant physical movement. They are likely to be naked or inadequately clothed; to sweat profusely; and to make unintelligible, animal-like noises. They are insensitive to extreme pain. In a small percentage of cases, EDS progresses to sudden cardiopulmonary arrestand death.3


Medication or restraints?
Many clinicians consider aggressive chemical sedation the first-line intervention for
EDS2,3; choice of medication varies from practice to practice. Restraints often are
necessary to ensure the safety of patient and staff, but use them only in conjunction with aggressive chemical sedation. Physical struggle is a greater contributor to catecholamine surge and metabolic acidosis than other types of exertion; methods of physical control should therefore minimize the time a patient spends struggling while safely achieving physical control.


What is the treatment for EDS?

Begin treatment while you are evaluating the patient for precipitating causes or additional pathology. There are cases of death from EDS even with minimal restraint (such as handcuffs),1,2 without the use of an electronic control device or so-called hog-tie restraint.

When providing pharmacotherapy for EDS, consider a benzodiazepine (midazolam, lorazepam, diazepam), an antipsychotic (haloperidol, droperidol, ziprasidone, olanzapine), or ketamine.4 Because these agents can have depressive respiratory and cardiovascular effects, continuously monitor heart and lungs.


Disclosure
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. Morrison A, Sadler D. Death of a psychiatric patient during physical restraint. Excited delirium—a case report. Med Sci Law. 2001;41(1):46-50.
2. Vilke GM, Debard ML, Chan TC, et al. Excited delirium syndrome (ExDS): defining based on a review of the literature. J Emerg Med. 2012;43(5):897-905.
4. Vilke GM, Payne-James J, Karch SB. Excited delirium syndrome (ExDS): redefining an old diagnosis. J Forensic Leg Med. 2012;19(1):7-11.
4. Hick JL, Ho JD. Ketamine chemical restraint to facilitate rescue of a combative “jumper.” Prehosp Emerg Care. 2005; 9(1):85-89.

References


1. Morrison A, Sadler D. Death of a psychiatric patient during physical restraint. Excited delirium—a case report. Med Sci Law. 2001;41(1):46-50.
2. Vilke GM, Debard ML, Chan TC, et al. Excited delirium syndrome (ExDS): defining based on a review of the literature. J Emerg Med. 2012;43(5):897-905.
4. Vilke GM, Payne-James J, Karch SB. Excited delirium syndrome (ExDS): redefining an old diagnosis. J Forensic Leg Med. 2012;19(1):7-11.
4. Hick JL, Ho JD. Ketamine chemical restraint to facilitate rescue of a combative “jumper.” Prehosp Emerg Care. 2005; 9(1):85-89.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Page Number
47-48
Page Number
47-48
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Be aware: Sudden discontinuation of a psychotropic risks a lethal outcome
Display Headline
Be aware: Sudden discontinuation of a psychotropic risks a lethal outcome
Legacy Keywords
psychotropic medications, excited delirium syndrome (EDS), sudden-in-custody death syndrome, Bell's mania
Legacy Keywords
psychotropic medications, excited delirium syndrome (EDS), sudden-in-custody death syndrome, Bell's mania
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Answers to 7 questions about using neuropsychological testing in your practice

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 03/28/2019 - 15:51
Display Headline
Answers to 7 questions about using neuropsychological testing in your practice

Neuropsychological evaluation, consisting of a thorough examination of cognitive and behavioral functioning, can make an invaluable contribution to the care of psychiatric patients. Through the vehicle of standardized measures of abilities, patients’ cognitive strengths and weaknesses can be elucidated—revealing potential areas for further interventions or to explain impediments to treatment. A licensed clinical psychologist provides this service.

You, as a consumer of reported findings, can use the results to inform your diagnosis and treatment plan. Recommendations from the neuropsychologist often address dispositional planning, cognitive intervention, psychiatric intervention, and work and school accommodations.


Probing the brain−behavior relationship

Neuropsychology is a subspecialty of clinical psychology that is focused on understanding the brain–behavior relationship. Drawing information from multiple disciplines, including psychiatry and neurology, neuropsychology seeks to uncover the cognitive, behavioral, and emotional difficulties that can result from known or suspected brain dysfunction. Increasingly, to protect the public and referral sources, clinical psychologists who perform neuropsychological testing demonstrate their competence through board certification (eg, the American Board of Clinical Neuropsychology).

How is testing conducted?
Evaluations comprise measures that are standardized, scored objectively, and have established psychometric properties. Testing can performed on an outpatient or inpatient basis; the duration of testing depends on the question for which the referring practitioner seeks an answer.

Measures typically are administered by paper and pencil, although computer-based
assessments are increasingly being employed. Because of the influence of demographic variables (age, sex, years of education, race), scores are compared with normative samples that resemble those of the patient’s background as closely as possible.

A thorough clinical interview with the patient, a collateral interview with caregivers
and family, and review of relevant medical records are crucial parts of the assessment. Multiple areas of cognition are assessed:
   • intelligence
   • academic functioning
   • attention
   • working memory
   • speed of processing
   • learning and memory
   • visual spatial skills
   • fine motor skills
   • executive functioning.

Essentially, the evaluation speaks to a patient’s neurocognitive functioning and cerebral integrity.

How are results scored? Interpretation of test scores is contingent on expectations of how a patient should perform in the absence of neurologic or psychiatric illness (ie, based on normative data and performancebased estimates of premorbid functioning).1 The overall pattern of intact scores and deficit scores can be used to form specific impressions about a diagnosis, cognitive strengths and weaknesses, and strategies for intervention.

Personality testing. In addition to the cognitive aspect of the evaluation, personality measures are incorporated when relevant to the referral question or presenting concern.

Personality tests can be broadly divided into objective and projective measures.
Objective personality measures, such as the Minnesota Multiphasic Personality
Inventory-Second Edition, require the examinee to respond to a set of items as
true or false or on a Likert-type scale from strongly agree to disagree. Responses are then scored in standardized fashion, making comparisons to normative data, which are then analyzed to determine the extent to which the examinee experiences psychiatric symptoms.

As part of testing, patients’ responses to ambiguous or unstructured standard
stimuli—such as a series of drawings, abstract patterns, or incomplete sentences—
are analyzed to determine underlying personality traits, feelings, and attitudes.
Classic examples of these measures include the Rorschach Test and the Thematic
Apperception Test.

Personality measures and psychiatric testing are designed to answer questions
related to patients’ emotional status. These measures assess psychiatric symptoms and diagnoses, whereas neuropsychological measures provide an understanding of patients’ cognitive assets and limitations.


7 Common questions about neuropsychological testing

1 Will my patient’s insurance cover these assessments? The question is common from practitioners who are considering requesting an assessment for a patient. The short answer is “Yes.”

Most payers follow Medicare guidelines for reimbursement of neuropsychological
testing; if testing is determined to be medically necessary, insurance companies often cover the assessment. Medicaid also pays for psychometric testing services. Neuropsychologists who have a hospital-based practice typically include patients
with all types of insurance coverage. For example, 40% of patients seen in a hospital are covered by Medicare or Medicaid.2

A caveat: Local intermediaries interpret policies and procedures in different ways,
so there is variability in coverage by geographic region. That is why it is crucial
for neuropsychologists to obtain preauthorization, as would be the case with other medical procedures and services sought by referral.

Last, insurance companies do not pay for assessment of a learning disability. The
rationale typically offered for this lack of coverage? The assessment is for academic, not medical, purposes. In such a situation, patients and their families are offered a private-pay option.

2 What are the indications for neuropsychological assessment? Psychiatric practitioners are one of the top medical specialties that refer their patients for neuropsychological testing.3 This is because many patients with a psychiatric or
neurologic disorder experience changes in cognition, mood, and personality. Such
changes can range in severity from subtle to dramatic, and might reflect an underlying disease state or a side effect of medication or other treatment. Whatever the nature of a patient’s problem, careful assessment might help elucidate specific areas with which he (she) is struggling—so that you can better target your interventions. Table 1 lists common reasons for referring a patient for neuropsychological evaluation. Throughout this discussion, we describe examples of clinical situations in which neuropsychological testing is useful for establishing a differential diagnosis and dispositional planning.

 

 

3 How does neuropsychological testing help with the differential diagnosis? As an example, one area in which cognitive testing can be beneficial is in geriatric psychiatry.Dementia. Aging often is accompanied by a normal decline in memory and other cognitive functions. But because subtle changes in memory and cognition also canbe the sign of a progressive cognitive disorder, differentiating normal aging from early dementia is essential. Table 2 summarizes typical changes in cognition with aging.

Neuropsychologists, through knowledge of psychometric testing and the brain−behavior relationship, can help you detect dementia and plan treatment early. To determine if cognitive changes are progressive, patients might undergo re-evaluation—typically, every 6 to 12 months—to ascertain if changes have occurred. Mood disorders. Neuropsychological evaluation can be useful in building a differential diagnosis when determining whether cognitive symptoms are attributable to a mood disorder or a medical illness. Cognitive deficits associated with an affective disturbance generally include impairments in attention, memory, and executive functioning.4 The severity of deficits has been linked to severity of illness. When patients with a mood disorder demonstrate localizing impairments or those of greater severity than expected, suspicion arises that another cause likely better explains those deficits, and further medical testing then is often recommended. Medical procedures. Increasingly, neuropsychological assessment is used to assist in determining the appropriateness of medical procedures. For example, neurosurgical patients being considered for deep brain stimulation, brain tumor resectioning, and epilepsy surgery often are referred for preoperative and postoperative testing. Treating clinicians need an understanding of current cognitive status, localization of functioning, and psychological status to make appropriate decisions about a patient’s candidacy for one of these procedures,and to understand associated risk.

4 How is neuropsychological testing used for dispositional planning? The
results of cognitive and psychological testing have implications for dispositional
planning for patients who are receiving psychiatric care. The primary issue often is
to determine the patient’s level of independence and ability to make decisions about his affairs.5

Neuropsychological testing can help determine if cognitive deficits limit aspects of functional independence—for example, can the patient live alone, or must he live with family or in a residential care facility? Generally, the greater the cognitive impairment, the more supervision and assistance are required. This relationship between cognitive ability and independence in activities of daily living has been demonstrated in many groups of psychiatric patients, including older adults with dementia,6 patients with schizophrenia,7 and those with bipolar disorder.8

Specific recommendations can be made regarding management of finances, administering medications, and driving. To formulate an appropriate dispositional plan, the referring psychiatrist might integrate recommendations from the neuropsychological assessment with findings of other evaluations and with information that has been collected about the patient.

5 Can neuropsychological testing be used to refer a patient for neurological and cognitive rehabilitation? Yes. The neuropsychologist is singularly qualified to make recommendations about a range of interventions for cognitive deficits that have been identified on formal testing.

Typically, recommendations for addressing cognitive deficits involve rehabilitation
focused on development and use of compensatory strategies and modification to promote brain health.9,10 Rehabilitation therapy typically is aimed at increasing functioning independence and reducing physical and cognitive deficits associated
with illness (eg, traumatic brain injury [TBI], stroke, orthopedic injury, debility).

Patients who have a TBI or who have had a stroke often have comorbid psychiatric problems, including mood and anxiety disorders, that can exacerbate deficits and impede engagement in rehabilitation. The neuropsychological evaluation can determine if this is the case and if psychiatric consultation is warranted to assist with managing symptoms.

Premorbid psychiatric illness can affect rehabilitation. Formal neuropsychological testing can assist with parsing out deficits associated with new-onset illness compared with premorbid psychiatric problems. The evaluation of a patient before he begins rehabilitation also can be compared with evaluations made during treatment and after discharge to 1) assess for changes and 2) update recommendations about management.

Recommendations about cognitive interventions might include specific compensatory strategies to address areas of weakness and capitalize on strengths. Such strategies can include using internal mnemonics, such as visual imagery (ie, using a visual image to help encode verbal information) or semantic elaboration (using semantic cues to aid in encoding and recall of information). Methods can help train patients to capitalize on areas of stronger cognitive functioning in compensating for their weaknesses; an example is the spaced-retrieval technique, which relies on repetition of information that is to be learned over time.11

Perhaps the most practical strategies for addressing areas of weakness are nonmnemonic-based external memory aids, such as diaries, notebooks, calendars, alarms, and lists.12 For example, for a patient with a TBI who has impaired memory, recommendations might include using written notes or a calendar system; using a pillbox for medication management; and using labels to promote structure and consistency in the home. These strategies are meant to promote increased independence and to minimize the effect of cognitive deficits on daily functioning.   

 

 

Recommended strategies can include lifestyle changes to promote improved cognitive functioning and overall health, such as:
   • sleep hygiene, to reduce the effects of fatigue
   • encouraging the patient to adhere to a diet, take prescribed medications, and  follow up with his health care providers
   • developing cognitive and physical exercise routines.

In addition, a patient who has had a stroke or who have a TBI might benefit from psychotherapy or referral to a group program or community resources to help cope with the effects of illness.13

6 How does neuropsychological testing help determine the appropriate psychiatric intervention for a patient? Results of neuropsychological testing can help determine appropriate interventions for a psychiatric condition that might be the principal factor affecting the patient’s functioning.

Concerning psychoactive medications, consider the following:

Mood and anxiety disorders. Neuropsychological measures can help substantiate the need for pharmacotherapy in a comorbid mood or anxiety disorder in a patient who has a neurologic illness, such as stroke or TBI.

ADHD. In a patient who has attentiondeficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), results of cognitive testing might help determine if attention issues undermine daily functioning. Testing provides information beyond rating scale scores to justify diagnosis and psychopharmacotherapy.14

Dementia. Geriatric patients who have dementia often have coexisting behavioral and mood changes that, once evaluated, might improve with pharmacotherapy.

Other areas.
Cognitive side effects of medications can be monitored by conducting testing before and after medication is started. The evaluation can address the patient’s ability to engage in psychotherapeutic interventions. Patients who have severe cognitive deficits might have greater difficulty engaging in psychotherapy, compared with patients who have less severe, or no, cognitive
impairment.15


7 Does neuropsychological testing help patients make return-to-work
and return-to-school decisions?
Yes. Cognitive and psychiatric functioning have
implications for decisions about occupational and academic pursuits.

Patients who have severe cognitive or psychiatric symptoms might be or might not be able to maintain gainful employment or participate in school. Testing can help 1) document and justify disability and 2) establish recommendations about disability status. Those whose cognitive impairments or psychiatric symptoms are less severe might benefit from neuropsychological testing so that recommendations can be made regarding accommodations at work or in school, such as:
   • reduced work or school schedule
   • reduced level of occupational or academic demand
   • change in supervision or evaluation procedures by employer or school.

Cognitive strengths and weaknesses can be used to help a patient devise and implement compensatory strategies at work or school, such as:
   • note-taking
   • audio recording of meetings and lectures
   • using a calendar.

Patients sometimes benefit from formal vocational rehabilitation services to facilitate finding appropriate employment, returning to employment, and implementing workplace accommodations.


In conclusion


Neuropsychological evaluation, typically covered by health insurance, provides the
referring clinician with objective information about patients’ cognitive assets and limitations. In turn, this information can help you make a diagnosis and plan
treatment.

Unlike psychological testing, in which the patient is assessed for psychiatric
symptoms and conditions, neuropsychological measures offer insight into such
abilities as attention, memory, and reasoning. Neuropsychological evaluations also
can add insight to your determination of the cause of symptoms, thereby influencing decisions about medical therapy.

Last, these evaluations can aid with decision-making about dispositional planning
and whether adjunctive services, such as rehabilitation, would be of benefit.


Bottom Line

Neuropsychological assessments are a useful consultation to consider for patients
in a psychiatric setting. These evaluations can aid you in building and narrowing the differential diagnosis; identifying patients’ strengths and weakness; and making informed recommendations about functional independence.


Disclosure
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. Donders J. A survey of report writing by neuropsychologists, I: general characteristics and content. Clin Neuropsychol. 2001;15(2):137-149.
2. Lamberty GT, Courtney JC, Heilbronner RC. The practice of clinical neuropsychology: a survey of practices and settings. New York, NY: Taylor & Francis; 2005.
3. Sweet JJ, Meyer DG, Nelson NW, et al. The TCN/AACN 2010 “salary survey”: professional practices, beliefs, and incomes of U.S. neuropsychologists. Clin Neuropsychol. 2011;25(1):12-61.
4. Marvel CL, Paradiso S. Cognitive and neurologic impairment in mood disorders. Psychiatr Clin North Am. 2004;27(1):19-36,vii-viii.
5. Moberg PJ, Rick JH. Decision-making capacity and competency in the elderly: a clinical and neuropsychological perspective. NeuroRehabilitation. 2008;23(5):
403-413.
6. Bradshaw LE, Goldberg SE, Lewis SA, et al. Six-month outcomes following an emergency hospital admission for older adults with co-morbid mental health problems indicate complexity of care needs. Age Ageing. 2013; 42(5):582-588.
7. Medalia A, Lim RW. Self-awareness of cognitive functioning in schizophrenia. Schizophr Res. 2004;71(2-3):331-338.
8. Andreou C, Bozikas VP. The predictive significance of neurocognitive factors for functional outcome in bipolar disorder. Curr Opin Psychiatry. 2013;26(1):54-59.
9. Stuss DT, Winocur G, Robertson IH, eds. Cognitive neurorehabilitation: evidence and application. 2nd ed. New York, NY: Cambridge University Press; 2008.
10. Raskin SA, ed. Neuroplasticity and rehabilitation. New York, NY: The Guilford Press; 2011.
11. Glisky EL, Glisky ML. Memory rehabilitation in older adults. In: Stuss DT, Winocur G, Robertson IH. Cognitive neurorehabilitation. 1st ed. New York, NY: Cambridge University Press; 2008.
12. Kapur N, Glisky EL, Wilson BA. External memory aids and computers in memory rehabilitation. In: Baddeley AD, Kopelman MD, Wilson BA. Handbook of memory disorders. Chichester, United Kingdom: Wiley; 2002:757-784.
13. Stalder-Luthy F, Messerli-Burgy N, Hofer H, et al. Effect of psychological interventions on depressive symptoms in long-term rehabilitation after an acquired brain injury: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Arch Phys Med Rehabil.
2013;94(7):1386-1397.
14. Hale JB, Reddy LA, Semrud-Clikeman M, et al. Executive impairment determines ADHD medication response: implications for academic achievement. J Learn Disabil. 2011;44(2):196-212.
15. Medalia A, Lim R. Treatment of cognitive dysfunction in psychiatric disorders. J Psychiatr Pract. 2004;10(1):17-25.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Lauren Schwarz, PhD, ABPP
Assistant Professor
Department of Neurology and Psychiatry


P. Tyler Roskos, PhD, ABPP
Assistant Professor
Department of Neurosurgery


George T. Grossberg, MD
Samuel W. Fordyce Professor
Department of Neurology and Psychiatry

Saint Louis University
St. Louis, Missouri

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
33-39
Legacy Keywords
neuropsychological testing, cognitive, personality, practice trends, behavior
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Lauren Schwarz, PhD, ABPP
Assistant Professor
Department of Neurology and Psychiatry


P. Tyler Roskos, PhD, ABPP
Assistant Professor
Department of Neurosurgery


George T. Grossberg, MD
Samuel W. Fordyce Professor
Department of Neurology and Psychiatry

Saint Louis University
St. Louis, Missouri

Author and Disclosure Information

Lauren Schwarz, PhD, ABPP
Assistant Professor
Department of Neurology and Psychiatry


P. Tyler Roskos, PhD, ABPP
Assistant Professor
Department of Neurosurgery


George T. Grossberg, MD
Samuel W. Fordyce Professor
Department of Neurology and Psychiatry

Saint Louis University
St. Louis, Missouri

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Neuropsychological evaluation, consisting of a thorough examination of cognitive and behavioral functioning, can make an invaluable contribution to the care of psychiatric patients. Through the vehicle of standardized measures of abilities, patients’ cognitive strengths and weaknesses can be elucidated—revealing potential areas for further interventions or to explain impediments to treatment. A licensed clinical psychologist provides this service.

You, as a consumer of reported findings, can use the results to inform your diagnosis and treatment plan. Recommendations from the neuropsychologist often address dispositional planning, cognitive intervention, psychiatric intervention, and work and school accommodations.


Probing the brain−behavior relationship

Neuropsychology is a subspecialty of clinical psychology that is focused on understanding the brain–behavior relationship. Drawing information from multiple disciplines, including psychiatry and neurology, neuropsychology seeks to uncover the cognitive, behavioral, and emotional difficulties that can result from known or suspected brain dysfunction. Increasingly, to protect the public and referral sources, clinical psychologists who perform neuropsychological testing demonstrate their competence through board certification (eg, the American Board of Clinical Neuropsychology).

How is testing conducted?
Evaluations comprise measures that are standardized, scored objectively, and have established psychometric properties. Testing can performed on an outpatient or inpatient basis; the duration of testing depends on the question for which the referring practitioner seeks an answer.

Measures typically are administered by paper and pencil, although computer-based
assessments are increasingly being employed. Because of the influence of demographic variables (age, sex, years of education, race), scores are compared with normative samples that resemble those of the patient’s background as closely as possible.

A thorough clinical interview with the patient, a collateral interview with caregivers
and family, and review of relevant medical records are crucial parts of the assessment. Multiple areas of cognition are assessed:
   • intelligence
   • academic functioning
   • attention
   • working memory
   • speed of processing
   • learning and memory
   • visual spatial skills
   • fine motor skills
   • executive functioning.

Essentially, the evaluation speaks to a patient’s neurocognitive functioning and cerebral integrity.

How are results scored? Interpretation of test scores is contingent on expectations of how a patient should perform in the absence of neurologic or psychiatric illness (ie, based on normative data and performancebased estimates of premorbid functioning).1 The overall pattern of intact scores and deficit scores can be used to form specific impressions about a diagnosis, cognitive strengths and weaknesses, and strategies for intervention.

Personality testing. In addition to the cognitive aspect of the evaluation, personality measures are incorporated when relevant to the referral question or presenting concern.

Personality tests can be broadly divided into objective and projective measures.
Objective personality measures, such as the Minnesota Multiphasic Personality
Inventory-Second Edition, require the examinee to respond to a set of items as
true or false or on a Likert-type scale from strongly agree to disagree. Responses are then scored in standardized fashion, making comparisons to normative data, which are then analyzed to determine the extent to which the examinee experiences psychiatric symptoms.

As part of testing, patients’ responses to ambiguous or unstructured standard
stimuli—such as a series of drawings, abstract patterns, or incomplete sentences—
are analyzed to determine underlying personality traits, feelings, and attitudes.
Classic examples of these measures include the Rorschach Test and the Thematic
Apperception Test.

Personality measures and psychiatric testing are designed to answer questions
related to patients’ emotional status. These measures assess psychiatric symptoms and diagnoses, whereas neuropsychological measures provide an understanding of patients’ cognitive assets and limitations.


7 Common questions about neuropsychological testing

1 Will my patient’s insurance cover these assessments? The question is common from practitioners who are considering requesting an assessment for a patient. The short answer is “Yes.”

Most payers follow Medicare guidelines for reimbursement of neuropsychological
testing; if testing is determined to be medically necessary, insurance companies often cover the assessment. Medicaid also pays for psychometric testing services. Neuropsychologists who have a hospital-based practice typically include patients
with all types of insurance coverage. For example, 40% of patients seen in a hospital are covered by Medicare or Medicaid.2

A caveat: Local intermediaries interpret policies and procedures in different ways,
so there is variability in coverage by geographic region. That is why it is crucial
for neuropsychologists to obtain preauthorization, as would be the case with other medical procedures and services sought by referral.

Last, insurance companies do not pay for assessment of a learning disability. The
rationale typically offered for this lack of coverage? The assessment is for academic, not medical, purposes. In such a situation, patients and their families are offered a private-pay option.

2 What are the indications for neuropsychological assessment? Psychiatric practitioners are one of the top medical specialties that refer their patients for neuropsychological testing.3 This is because many patients with a psychiatric or
neurologic disorder experience changes in cognition, mood, and personality. Such
changes can range in severity from subtle to dramatic, and might reflect an underlying disease state or a side effect of medication or other treatment. Whatever the nature of a patient’s problem, careful assessment might help elucidate specific areas with which he (she) is struggling—so that you can better target your interventions. Table 1 lists common reasons for referring a patient for neuropsychological evaluation. Throughout this discussion, we describe examples of clinical situations in which neuropsychological testing is useful for establishing a differential diagnosis and dispositional planning.

 

 

3 How does neuropsychological testing help with the differential diagnosis? As an example, one area in which cognitive testing can be beneficial is in geriatric psychiatry.Dementia. Aging often is accompanied by a normal decline in memory and other cognitive functions. But because subtle changes in memory and cognition also canbe the sign of a progressive cognitive disorder, differentiating normal aging from early dementia is essential. Table 2 summarizes typical changes in cognition with aging.

Neuropsychologists, through knowledge of psychometric testing and the brain−behavior relationship, can help you detect dementia and plan treatment early. To determine if cognitive changes are progressive, patients might undergo re-evaluation—typically, every 6 to 12 months—to ascertain if changes have occurred. Mood disorders. Neuropsychological evaluation can be useful in building a differential diagnosis when determining whether cognitive symptoms are attributable to a mood disorder or a medical illness. Cognitive deficits associated with an affective disturbance generally include impairments in attention, memory, and executive functioning.4 The severity of deficits has been linked to severity of illness. When patients with a mood disorder demonstrate localizing impairments or those of greater severity than expected, suspicion arises that another cause likely better explains those deficits, and further medical testing then is often recommended. Medical procedures. Increasingly, neuropsychological assessment is used to assist in determining the appropriateness of medical procedures. For example, neurosurgical patients being considered for deep brain stimulation, brain tumor resectioning, and epilepsy surgery often are referred for preoperative and postoperative testing. Treating clinicians need an understanding of current cognitive status, localization of functioning, and psychological status to make appropriate decisions about a patient’s candidacy for one of these procedures,and to understand associated risk.

4 How is neuropsychological testing used for dispositional planning? The
results of cognitive and psychological testing have implications for dispositional
planning for patients who are receiving psychiatric care. The primary issue often is
to determine the patient’s level of independence and ability to make decisions about his affairs.5

Neuropsychological testing can help determine if cognitive deficits limit aspects of functional independence—for example, can the patient live alone, or must he live with family or in a residential care facility? Generally, the greater the cognitive impairment, the more supervision and assistance are required. This relationship between cognitive ability and independence in activities of daily living has been demonstrated in many groups of psychiatric patients, including older adults with dementia,6 patients with schizophrenia,7 and those with bipolar disorder.8

Specific recommendations can be made regarding management of finances, administering medications, and driving. To formulate an appropriate dispositional plan, the referring psychiatrist might integrate recommendations from the neuropsychological assessment with findings of other evaluations and with information that has been collected about the patient.

5 Can neuropsychological testing be used to refer a patient for neurological and cognitive rehabilitation? Yes. The neuropsychologist is singularly qualified to make recommendations about a range of interventions for cognitive deficits that have been identified on formal testing.

Typically, recommendations for addressing cognitive deficits involve rehabilitation
focused on development and use of compensatory strategies and modification to promote brain health.9,10 Rehabilitation therapy typically is aimed at increasing functioning independence and reducing physical and cognitive deficits associated
with illness (eg, traumatic brain injury [TBI], stroke, orthopedic injury, debility).

Patients who have a TBI or who have had a stroke often have comorbid psychiatric problems, including mood and anxiety disorders, that can exacerbate deficits and impede engagement in rehabilitation. The neuropsychological evaluation can determine if this is the case and if psychiatric consultation is warranted to assist with managing symptoms.

Premorbid psychiatric illness can affect rehabilitation. Formal neuropsychological testing can assist with parsing out deficits associated with new-onset illness compared with premorbid psychiatric problems. The evaluation of a patient before he begins rehabilitation also can be compared with evaluations made during treatment and after discharge to 1) assess for changes and 2) update recommendations about management.

Recommendations about cognitive interventions might include specific compensatory strategies to address areas of weakness and capitalize on strengths. Such strategies can include using internal mnemonics, such as visual imagery (ie, using a visual image to help encode verbal information) or semantic elaboration (using semantic cues to aid in encoding and recall of information). Methods can help train patients to capitalize on areas of stronger cognitive functioning in compensating for their weaknesses; an example is the spaced-retrieval technique, which relies on repetition of information that is to be learned over time.11

Perhaps the most practical strategies for addressing areas of weakness are nonmnemonic-based external memory aids, such as diaries, notebooks, calendars, alarms, and lists.12 For example, for a patient with a TBI who has impaired memory, recommendations might include using written notes or a calendar system; using a pillbox for medication management; and using labels to promote structure and consistency in the home. These strategies are meant to promote increased independence and to minimize the effect of cognitive deficits on daily functioning.   

 

 

Recommended strategies can include lifestyle changes to promote improved cognitive functioning and overall health, such as:
   • sleep hygiene, to reduce the effects of fatigue
   • encouraging the patient to adhere to a diet, take prescribed medications, and  follow up with his health care providers
   • developing cognitive and physical exercise routines.

In addition, a patient who has had a stroke or who have a TBI might benefit from psychotherapy or referral to a group program or community resources to help cope with the effects of illness.13

6 How does neuropsychological testing help determine the appropriate psychiatric intervention for a patient? Results of neuropsychological testing can help determine appropriate interventions for a psychiatric condition that might be the principal factor affecting the patient’s functioning.

Concerning psychoactive medications, consider the following:

Mood and anxiety disorders. Neuropsychological measures can help substantiate the need for pharmacotherapy in a comorbid mood or anxiety disorder in a patient who has a neurologic illness, such as stroke or TBI.

ADHD. In a patient who has attentiondeficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), results of cognitive testing might help determine if attention issues undermine daily functioning. Testing provides information beyond rating scale scores to justify diagnosis and psychopharmacotherapy.14

Dementia. Geriatric patients who have dementia often have coexisting behavioral and mood changes that, once evaluated, might improve with pharmacotherapy.

Other areas.
Cognitive side effects of medications can be monitored by conducting testing before and after medication is started. The evaluation can address the patient’s ability to engage in psychotherapeutic interventions. Patients who have severe cognitive deficits might have greater difficulty engaging in psychotherapy, compared with patients who have less severe, or no, cognitive
impairment.15


7 Does neuropsychological testing help patients make return-to-work
and return-to-school decisions?
Yes. Cognitive and psychiatric functioning have
implications for decisions about occupational and academic pursuits.

Patients who have severe cognitive or psychiatric symptoms might be or might not be able to maintain gainful employment or participate in school. Testing can help 1) document and justify disability and 2) establish recommendations about disability status. Those whose cognitive impairments or psychiatric symptoms are less severe might benefit from neuropsychological testing so that recommendations can be made regarding accommodations at work or in school, such as:
   • reduced work or school schedule
   • reduced level of occupational or academic demand
   • change in supervision or evaluation procedures by employer or school.

Cognitive strengths and weaknesses can be used to help a patient devise and implement compensatory strategies at work or school, such as:
   • note-taking
   • audio recording of meetings and lectures
   • using a calendar.

Patients sometimes benefit from formal vocational rehabilitation services to facilitate finding appropriate employment, returning to employment, and implementing workplace accommodations.


In conclusion


Neuropsychological evaluation, typically covered by health insurance, provides the
referring clinician with objective information about patients’ cognitive assets and limitations. In turn, this information can help you make a diagnosis and plan
treatment.

Unlike psychological testing, in which the patient is assessed for psychiatric
symptoms and conditions, neuropsychological measures offer insight into such
abilities as attention, memory, and reasoning. Neuropsychological evaluations also
can add insight to your determination of the cause of symptoms, thereby influencing decisions about medical therapy.

Last, these evaluations can aid with decision-making about dispositional planning
and whether adjunctive services, such as rehabilitation, would be of benefit.


Bottom Line

Neuropsychological assessments are a useful consultation to consider for patients
in a psychiatric setting. These evaluations can aid you in building and narrowing the differential diagnosis; identifying patients’ strengths and weakness; and making informed recommendations about functional independence.


Disclosure
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Neuropsychological evaluation, consisting of a thorough examination of cognitive and behavioral functioning, can make an invaluable contribution to the care of psychiatric patients. Through the vehicle of standardized measures of abilities, patients’ cognitive strengths and weaknesses can be elucidated—revealing potential areas for further interventions or to explain impediments to treatment. A licensed clinical psychologist provides this service.

You, as a consumer of reported findings, can use the results to inform your diagnosis and treatment plan. Recommendations from the neuropsychologist often address dispositional planning, cognitive intervention, psychiatric intervention, and work and school accommodations.


Probing the brain−behavior relationship

Neuropsychology is a subspecialty of clinical psychology that is focused on understanding the brain–behavior relationship. Drawing information from multiple disciplines, including psychiatry and neurology, neuropsychology seeks to uncover the cognitive, behavioral, and emotional difficulties that can result from known or suspected brain dysfunction. Increasingly, to protect the public and referral sources, clinical psychologists who perform neuropsychological testing demonstrate their competence through board certification (eg, the American Board of Clinical Neuropsychology).

How is testing conducted?
Evaluations comprise measures that are standardized, scored objectively, and have established psychometric properties. Testing can performed on an outpatient or inpatient basis; the duration of testing depends on the question for which the referring practitioner seeks an answer.

Measures typically are administered by paper and pencil, although computer-based
assessments are increasingly being employed. Because of the influence of demographic variables (age, sex, years of education, race), scores are compared with normative samples that resemble those of the patient’s background as closely as possible.

A thorough clinical interview with the patient, a collateral interview with caregivers
and family, and review of relevant medical records are crucial parts of the assessment. Multiple areas of cognition are assessed:
   • intelligence
   • academic functioning
   • attention
   • working memory
   • speed of processing
   • learning and memory
   • visual spatial skills
   • fine motor skills
   • executive functioning.

Essentially, the evaluation speaks to a patient’s neurocognitive functioning and cerebral integrity.

How are results scored? Interpretation of test scores is contingent on expectations of how a patient should perform in the absence of neurologic or psychiatric illness (ie, based on normative data and performancebased estimates of premorbid functioning).1 The overall pattern of intact scores and deficit scores can be used to form specific impressions about a diagnosis, cognitive strengths and weaknesses, and strategies for intervention.

Personality testing. In addition to the cognitive aspect of the evaluation, personality measures are incorporated when relevant to the referral question or presenting concern.

Personality tests can be broadly divided into objective and projective measures.
Objective personality measures, such as the Minnesota Multiphasic Personality
Inventory-Second Edition, require the examinee to respond to a set of items as
true or false or on a Likert-type scale from strongly agree to disagree. Responses are then scored in standardized fashion, making comparisons to normative data, which are then analyzed to determine the extent to which the examinee experiences psychiatric symptoms.

As part of testing, patients’ responses to ambiguous or unstructured standard
stimuli—such as a series of drawings, abstract patterns, or incomplete sentences—
are analyzed to determine underlying personality traits, feelings, and attitudes.
Classic examples of these measures include the Rorschach Test and the Thematic
Apperception Test.

Personality measures and psychiatric testing are designed to answer questions
related to patients’ emotional status. These measures assess psychiatric symptoms and diagnoses, whereas neuropsychological measures provide an understanding of patients’ cognitive assets and limitations.


7 Common questions about neuropsychological testing

1 Will my patient’s insurance cover these assessments? The question is common from practitioners who are considering requesting an assessment for a patient. The short answer is “Yes.”

Most payers follow Medicare guidelines for reimbursement of neuropsychological
testing; if testing is determined to be medically necessary, insurance companies often cover the assessment. Medicaid also pays for psychometric testing services. Neuropsychologists who have a hospital-based practice typically include patients
with all types of insurance coverage. For example, 40% of patients seen in a hospital are covered by Medicare or Medicaid.2

A caveat: Local intermediaries interpret policies and procedures in different ways,
so there is variability in coverage by geographic region. That is why it is crucial
for neuropsychologists to obtain preauthorization, as would be the case with other medical procedures and services sought by referral.

Last, insurance companies do not pay for assessment of a learning disability. The
rationale typically offered for this lack of coverage? The assessment is for academic, not medical, purposes. In such a situation, patients and their families are offered a private-pay option.

2 What are the indications for neuropsychological assessment? Psychiatric practitioners are one of the top medical specialties that refer their patients for neuropsychological testing.3 This is because many patients with a psychiatric or
neurologic disorder experience changes in cognition, mood, and personality. Such
changes can range in severity from subtle to dramatic, and might reflect an underlying disease state or a side effect of medication or other treatment. Whatever the nature of a patient’s problem, careful assessment might help elucidate specific areas with which he (she) is struggling—so that you can better target your interventions. Table 1 lists common reasons for referring a patient for neuropsychological evaluation. Throughout this discussion, we describe examples of clinical situations in which neuropsychological testing is useful for establishing a differential diagnosis and dispositional planning.

 

 

3 How does neuropsychological testing help with the differential diagnosis? As an example, one area in which cognitive testing can be beneficial is in geriatric psychiatry.Dementia. Aging often is accompanied by a normal decline in memory and other cognitive functions. But because subtle changes in memory and cognition also canbe the sign of a progressive cognitive disorder, differentiating normal aging from early dementia is essential. Table 2 summarizes typical changes in cognition with aging.

Neuropsychologists, through knowledge of psychometric testing and the brain−behavior relationship, can help you detect dementia and plan treatment early. To determine if cognitive changes are progressive, patients might undergo re-evaluation—typically, every 6 to 12 months—to ascertain if changes have occurred. Mood disorders. Neuropsychological evaluation can be useful in building a differential diagnosis when determining whether cognitive symptoms are attributable to a mood disorder or a medical illness. Cognitive deficits associated with an affective disturbance generally include impairments in attention, memory, and executive functioning.4 The severity of deficits has been linked to severity of illness. When patients with a mood disorder demonstrate localizing impairments or those of greater severity than expected, suspicion arises that another cause likely better explains those deficits, and further medical testing then is often recommended. Medical procedures. Increasingly, neuropsychological assessment is used to assist in determining the appropriateness of medical procedures. For example, neurosurgical patients being considered for deep brain stimulation, brain tumor resectioning, and epilepsy surgery often are referred for preoperative and postoperative testing. Treating clinicians need an understanding of current cognitive status, localization of functioning, and psychological status to make appropriate decisions about a patient’s candidacy for one of these procedures,and to understand associated risk.

4 How is neuropsychological testing used for dispositional planning? The
results of cognitive and psychological testing have implications for dispositional
planning for patients who are receiving psychiatric care. The primary issue often is
to determine the patient’s level of independence and ability to make decisions about his affairs.5

Neuropsychological testing can help determine if cognitive deficits limit aspects of functional independence—for example, can the patient live alone, or must he live with family or in a residential care facility? Generally, the greater the cognitive impairment, the more supervision and assistance are required. This relationship between cognitive ability and independence in activities of daily living has been demonstrated in many groups of psychiatric patients, including older adults with dementia,6 patients with schizophrenia,7 and those with bipolar disorder.8

Specific recommendations can be made regarding management of finances, administering medications, and driving. To formulate an appropriate dispositional plan, the referring psychiatrist might integrate recommendations from the neuropsychological assessment with findings of other evaluations and with information that has been collected about the patient.

5 Can neuropsychological testing be used to refer a patient for neurological and cognitive rehabilitation? Yes. The neuropsychologist is singularly qualified to make recommendations about a range of interventions for cognitive deficits that have been identified on formal testing.

Typically, recommendations for addressing cognitive deficits involve rehabilitation
focused on development and use of compensatory strategies and modification to promote brain health.9,10 Rehabilitation therapy typically is aimed at increasing functioning independence and reducing physical and cognitive deficits associated
with illness (eg, traumatic brain injury [TBI], stroke, orthopedic injury, debility).

Patients who have a TBI or who have had a stroke often have comorbid psychiatric problems, including mood and anxiety disorders, that can exacerbate deficits and impede engagement in rehabilitation. The neuropsychological evaluation can determine if this is the case and if psychiatric consultation is warranted to assist with managing symptoms.

Premorbid psychiatric illness can affect rehabilitation. Formal neuropsychological testing can assist with parsing out deficits associated with new-onset illness compared with premorbid psychiatric problems. The evaluation of a patient before he begins rehabilitation also can be compared with evaluations made during treatment and after discharge to 1) assess for changes and 2) update recommendations about management.

Recommendations about cognitive interventions might include specific compensatory strategies to address areas of weakness and capitalize on strengths. Such strategies can include using internal mnemonics, such as visual imagery (ie, using a visual image to help encode verbal information) or semantic elaboration (using semantic cues to aid in encoding and recall of information). Methods can help train patients to capitalize on areas of stronger cognitive functioning in compensating for their weaknesses; an example is the spaced-retrieval technique, which relies on repetition of information that is to be learned over time.11

Perhaps the most practical strategies for addressing areas of weakness are nonmnemonic-based external memory aids, such as diaries, notebooks, calendars, alarms, and lists.12 For example, for a patient with a TBI who has impaired memory, recommendations might include using written notes or a calendar system; using a pillbox for medication management; and using labels to promote structure and consistency in the home. These strategies are meant to promote increased independence and to minimize the effect of cognitive deficits on daily functioning.   

 

 

Recommended strategies can include lifestyle changes to promote improved cognitive functioning and overall health, such as:
   • sleep hygiene, to reduce the effects of fatigue
   • encouraging the patient to adhere to a diet, take prescribed medications, and  follow up with his health care providers
   • developing cognitive and physical exercise routines.

In addition, a patient who has had a stroke or who have a TBI might benefit from psychotherapy or referral to a group program or community resources to help cope with the effects of illness.13

6 How does neuropsychological testing help determine the appropriate psychiatric intervention for a patient? Results of neuropsychological testing can help determine appropriate interventions for a psychiatric condition that might be the principal factor affecting the patient’s functioning.

Concerning psychoactive medications, consider the following:

Mood and anxiety disorders. Neuropsychological measures can help substantiate the need for pharmacotherapy in a comorbid mood or anxiety disorder in a patient who has a neurologic illness, such as stroke or TBI.

ADHD. In a patient who has attentiondeficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), results of cognitive testing might help determine if attention issues undermine daily functioning. Testing provides information beyond rating scale scores to justify diagnosis and psychopharmacotherapy.14

Dementia. Geriatric patients who have dementia often have coexisting behavioral and mood changes that, once evaluated, might improve with pharmacotherapy.

Other areas.
Cognitive side effects of medications can be monitored by conducting testing before and after medication is started. The evaluation can address the patient’s ability to engage in psychotherapeutic interventions. Patients who have severe cognitive deficits might have greater difficulty engaging in psychotherapy, compared with patients who have less severe, or no, cognitive
impairment.15


7 Does neuropsychological testing help patients make return-to-work
and return-to-school decisions?
Yes. Cognitive and psychiatric functioning have
implications for decisions about occupational and academic pursuits.

Patients who have severe cognitive or psychiatric symptoms might be or might not be able to maintain gainful employment or participate in school. Testing can help 1) document and justify disability and 2) establish recommendations about disability status. Those whose cognitive impairments or psychiatric symptoms are less severe might benefit from neuropsychological testing so that recommendations can be made regarding accommodations at work or in school, such as:
   • reduced work or school schedule
   • reduced level of occupational or academic demand
   • change in supervision or evaluation procedures by employer or school.

Cognitive strengths and weaknesses can be used to help a patient devise and implement compensatory strategies at work or school, such as:
   • note-taking
   • audio recording of meetings and lectures
   • using a calendar.

Patients sometimes benefit from formal vocational rehabilitation services to facilitate finding appropriate employment, returning to employment, and implementing workplace accommodations.


In conclusion


Neuropsychological evaluation, typically covered by health insurance, provides the
referring clinician with objective information about patients’ cognitive assets and limitations. In turn, this information can help you make a diagnosis and plan
treatment.

Unlike psychological testing, in which the patient is assessed for psychiatric
symptoms and conditions, neuropsychological measures offer insight into such
abilities as attention, memory, and reasoning. Neuropsychological evaluations also
can add insight to your determination of the cause of symptoms, thereby influencing decisions about medical therapy.

Last, these evaluations can aid with decision-making about dispositional planning
and whether adjunctive services, such as rehabilitation, would be of benefit.


Bottom Line

Neuropsychological assessments are a useful consultation to consider for patients
in a psychiatric setting. These evaluations can aid you in building and narrowing the differential diagnosis; identifying patients’ strengths and weakness; and making informed recommendations about functional independence.


Disclosure
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. Donders J. A survey of report writing by neuropsychologists, I: general characteristics and content. Clin Neuropsychol. 2001;15(2):137-149.
2. Lamberty GT, Courtney JC, Heilbronner RC. The practice of clinical neuropsychology: a survey of practices and settings. New York, NY: Taylor & Francis; 2005.
3. Sweet JJ, Meyer DG, Nelson NW, et al. The TCN/AACN 2010 “salary survey”: professional practices, beliefs, and incomes of U.S. neuropsychologists. Clin Neuropsychol. 2011;25(1):12-61.
4. Marvel CL, Paradiso S. Cognitive and neurologic impairment in mood disorders. Psychiatr Clin North Am. 2004;27(1):19-36,vii-viii.
5. Moberg PJ, Rick JH. Decision-making capacity and competency in the elderly: a clinical and neuropsychological perspective. NeuroRehabilitation. 2008;23(5):
403-413.
6. Bradshaw LE, Goldberg SE, Lewis SA, et al. Six-month outcomes following an emergency hospital admission for older adults with co-morbid mental health problems indicate complexity of care needs. Age Ageing. 2013; 42(5):582-588.
7. Medalia A, Lim RW. Self-awareness of cognitive functioning in schizophrenia. Schizophr Res. 2004;71(2-3):331-338.
8. Andreou C, Bozikas VP. The predictive significance of neurocognitive factors for functional outcome in bipolar disorder. Curr Opin Psychiatry. 2013;26(1):54-59.
9. Stuss DT, Winocur G, Robertson IH, eds. Cognitive neurorehabilitation: evidence and application. 2nd ed. New York, NY: Cambridge University Press; 2008.
10. Raskin SA, ed. Neuroplasticity and rehabilitation. New York, NY: The Guilford Press; 2011.
11. Glisky EL, Glisky ML. Memory rehabilitation in older adults. In: Stuss DT, Winocur G, Robertson IH. Cognitive neurorehabilitation. 1st ed. New York, NY: Cambridge University Press; 2008.
12. Kapur N, Glisky EL, Wilson BA. External memory aids and computers in memory rehabilitation. In: Baddeley AD, Kopelman MD, Wilson BA. Handbook of memory disorders. Chichester, United Kingdom: Wiley; 2002:757-784.
13. Stalder-Luthy F, Messerli-Burgy N, Hofer H, et al. Effect of psychological interventions on depressive symptoms in long-term rehabilitation after an acquired brain injury: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Arch Phys Med Rehabil.
2013;94(7):1386-1397.
14. Hale JB, Reddy LA, Semrud-Clikeman M, et al. Executive impairment determines ADHD medication response: implications for academic achievement. J Learn Disabil. 2011;44(2):196-212.
15. Medalia A, Lim R. Treatment of cognitive dysfunction in psychiatric disorders. J Psychiatr Pract. 2004;10(1):17-25.

References


1. Donders J. A survey of report writing by neuropsychologists, I: general characteristics and content. Clin Neuropsychol. 2001;15(2):137-149.
2. Lamberty GT, Courtney JC, Heilbronner RC. The practice of clinical neuropsychology: a survey of practices and settings. New York, NY: Taylor & Francis; 2005.
3. Sweet JJ, Meyer DG, Nelson NW, et al. The TCN/AACN 2010 “salary survey”: professional practices, beliefs, and incomes of U.S. neuropsychologists. Clin Neuropsychol. 2011;25(1):12-61.
4. Marvel CL, Paradiso S. Cognitive and neurologic impairment in mood disorders. Psychiatr Clin North Am. 2004;27(1):19-36,vii-viii.
5. Moberg PJ, Rick JH. Decision-making capacity and competency in the elderly: a clinical and neuropsychological perspective. NeuroRehabilitation. 2008;23(5):
403-413.
6. Bradshaw LE, Goldberg SE, Lewis SA, et al. Six-month outcomes following an emergency hospital admission for older adults with co-morbid mental health problems indicate complexity of care needs. Age Ageing. 2013; 42(5):582-588.
7. Medalia A, Lim RW. Self-awareness of cognitive functioning in schizophrenia. Schizophr Res. 2004;71(2-3):331-338.
8. Andreou C, Bozikas VP. The predictive significance of neurocognitive factors for functional outcome in bipolar disorder. Curr Opin Psychiatry. 2013;26(1):54-59.
9. Stuss DT, Winocur G, Robertson IH, eds. Cognitive neurorehabilitation: evidence and application. 2nd ed. New York, NY: Cambridge University Press; 2008.
10. Raskin SA, ed. Neuroplasticity and rehabilitation. New York, NY: The Guilford Press; 2011.
11. Glisky EL, Glisky ML. Memory rehabilitation in older adults. In: Stuss DT, Winocur G, Robertson IH. Cognitive neurorehabilitation. 1st ed. New York, NY: Cambridge University Press; 2008.
12. Kapur N, Glisky EL, Wilson BA. External memory aids and computers in memory rehabilitation. In: Baddeley AD, Kopelman MD, Wilson BA. Handbook of memory disorders. Chichester, United Kingdom: Wiley; 2002:757-784.
13. Stalder-Luthy F, Messerli-Burgy N, Hofer H, et al. Effect of psychological interventions on depressive symptoms in long-term rehabilitation after an acquired brain injury: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Arch Phys Med Rehabil.
2013;94(7):1386-1397.
14. Hale JB, Reddy LA, Semrud-Clikeman M, et al. Executive impairment determines ADHD medication response: implications for academic achievement. J Learn Disabil. 2011;44(2):196-212.
15. Medalia A, Lim R. Treatment of cognitive dysfunction in psychiatric disorders. J Psychiatr Pract. 2004;10(1):17-25.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Page Number
33-39
Page Number
33-39
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Answers to 7 questions about using neuropsychological testing in your practice
Display Headline
Answers to 7 questions about using neuropsychological testing in your practice
Legacy Keywords
neuropsychological testing, cognitive, personality, practice trends, behavior
Legacy Keywords
neuropsychological testing, cognitive, personality, practice trends, behavior
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Zolpidem may cause visual distortions and other psychotic symptoms

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:18
Display Headline
Zolpidem may cause visual distortions and other psychotic symptoms

Zolpidem, an imidazopyridine hypnotic, has been used as an alternative to benzodiazepines for treating short-term insomnia because it has a relatively favorable side effect profile and less potential for abuse.1

However, several cases of zolpidemrelated psychotic symptoms have been reported,2 including a report of an association between zolpidem and hallucinations.1 The case illustrated here describes distortion of visual perception that can occur after ingestion of more than the recommended dosage of zolpidem.


CASE: Terrified and paranoid with distorted vision

Ms. K, age 33, an English-speaking woman from Portugal with a history of schizoaffective disorder, is brought to the emergency department in a terrified state. She describes visual distortion and paranoia because she fears losing her vision. She complains of suicidal ideation, depressed mood, insomnia, auditory
hallucinations, and distortion of visual perception. She reports seeing shadows, recurring movements of the ceiling bearing down on her, and molding or melting walls.

Ms. K reports that the visual distortions began when she started zolpidem, 10 mg/d, 2 months earlier, after her mother in Portugal gave it to her.

Ms. K describes feeling disoriented and disconnected from reality. She reports taking extra doses of zolpidem (40 mg)—recommended maximum dosage is 10 mg3—and clonazepam (1 mg) to address her insomnia.

On examination, Ms. K appears shaky and tremulous, and we note that her eyeballs roll upward. Vital signs are within normal limits, and she is awake, alert, and oriented to person, place, and time.

We diagnose exacerbation of schizoaffective disorder.

Ms. K is admitted to the inpatient psychiatric unit for observation and treatment. Quetiapine, 100 mg at bedtime, and sertraline, 100 mg/d, are started and zolpidem is discontinued.

The morning after admission, Ms. K reports that her vision has improved and that she no longer sees shadows or colored spots. All visual distortions resolve within 1 day after discontinuing zolpidem.

Discussion

Ms. K had no history of ophthalmologic or neurologic disease or alcohol or substance use. Physical and neurologic examination and laboratory testing failed to reveal any abnormality that accounts for her clinical presentation. Also, she reported visual distortions in the absence of drowsiness,4 thereby ruling out hypnagogic hallucination.5

Visual hallucinations are uncommon in schizoaffective disorder, but have been shown to occur with zolpidem use.1,4 The clinical manifestations in Ms. K’s case are
consistent with those of 3 reports, in which patients reported visual symptoms shortly after an initial dose of zolpidem, 10 mg.1,6 In those cases, symptoms resolved soon after zolpidem was discontinued.

Ms. K’s case is similar to other reports in regard to time of onset and manifestations of visual distortions. Iruela and colleagues documented that hallucinations could be reproduced with a lower challenge dose of zolpidem (5 or 2.5 mg), and that, with such a challenge, symptoms should be less severe.7 How zolpidem induces visual hallucinations remains unknown. Several studies have looked at variables that might predispose a patient taking zolpidem to visual
perceptual distortions.1

Sex might play an important role.1,7 After administering the same dosage of zolpidem, women age 20 to 40 had a blood concentration of the drug that was, on average, 45% higher than those measured in men.6 This difference in serum concentration is more remarkable in older women; the blood concentration of the drug in women age >60 was 63% higher than that of men.

Influence of hormones. Pharmacokinetics of zolpidem seem to be related to endocrine factors associated with cytochrome P450 (CYP) 3A4 metabolism. A low plasma concentration of free testosterone may contribute to lower CYP3A activity, with women achieving as much as a 50% higher plasma level of zolpidem, whereas exposure to testosterone activates biotransformation via CYP3A.8

Body weight is important when dosing zolpidem. Zolpidem-induced macropsia
has been reported in women with anorexia.7 The protein-binding capacity of zolpidem is approximately 92%, mainly to albumin (66%) and α1-acid glycoprotein (56.6%).4 In malnourished patients with anorexia nervosa, hypoalbuminemia is common and, therefore, unbound drug concentration is higher. This effect could account for, or contribute to, zolpidem toxicity.7

Ms. K did not have anorexia nervosa and was not underweight, and her liver function and kidney function were within normal limits. However, prescribing guidelines call for an initial dosage of 5 mg/d for women (10 mg/d for men)3; Ms. K ingested 8 times the recommended daily dosage.

The lesson for practitioners? When you encounter a patient who has a psychiatric disorder with psychotic features, explore causes unrelated to their primary disorder—such as taking a hypnotic or multiple psychoactive medications—as a possible source of the presenting symptoms (Box). In Ms. K’s case, her unusual symptoms resolved after a change in pharmacotherapy, leading us to conclude that her visual distortions likely were secondary to zolpidem and not to her schizoaffective disorder—a confounding factor.

 

 


Disclosure
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. Huang CL, Chang CJ, Hung CF, et al. Zolpidem-induced distortion in visual perception. Ann Pharmacother. 2003;37(5):683-686.
2. Ansseau M, Pitchot W, Hansenne M, et al. Psychotic reaction to zolpidem (letter). Lancet. 1992;339(8796):809.
3. Ambien [package insert]. Bridgewater, NJ: sanofi-aventis U.S. LLC; 2013.
4. van Puijenbroek EP, Egberts AC, Krom HJ. Visual hallucinations and amnesia associated with the use of zolpidem (letter). Int J Clin Pharmacol Ther. 1996;34(7):318.
5. Morselli PL. Zolpidem side-effects (letter). Lancet. 1993; 342(8875):868-869.
6. Salvà P, Costa J. Clinical pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of zolpidem. Therapeutic implications. Clin Pharmacokinet. 1995;29(3):142-153.
7. Iruela LM, Ibañez-Rojo V, Baca E. Zolpidem-induced macropsia in anorexic woman (letter). Lancet. 1993; 342(8868):443-444.
8. Cubała WJ, Wiglusz M, Burkiewicz A, et al. Zolpidem pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics in metabolic interactions involving CYP3A: sex as a differentiating factor. Eur J Clin Pharmacol. 2010;66(9):955.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Mahreen Raza, MD
PGY-3 resident

Cheryl A. Kennedy, MD
Associate Professor

Saima Latif, MD
PGY-4 resident

Department of Psychiatry
Rutgers New Jersey Medical School
Newark, New Jersey

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
31-32
Legacy Keywords
zolpidem, hallucinations, schizoaffective disorder, benzodiazepines, visual distortions
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Mahreen Raza, MD
PGY-3 resident

Cheryl A. Kennedy, MD
Associate Professor

Saima Latif, MD
PGY-4 resident

Department of Psychiatry
Rutgers New Jersey Medical School
Newark, New Jersey

Author and Disclosure Information

Mahreen Raza, MD
PGY-3 resident

Cheryl A. Kennedy, MD
Associate Professor

Saima Latif, MD
PGY-4 resident

Department of Psychiatry
Rutgers New Jersey Medical School
Newark, New Jersey

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Zolpidem, an imidazopyridine hypnotic, has been used as an alternative to benzodiazepines for treating short-term insomnia because it has a relatively favorable side effect profile and less potential for abuse.1

However, several cases of zolpidemrelated psychotic symptoms have been reported,2 including a report of an association between zolpidem and hallucinations.1 The case illustrated here describes distortion of visual perception that can occur after ingestion of more than the recommended dosage of zolpidem.


CASE: Terrified and paranoid with distorted vision

Ms. K, age 33, an English-speaking woman from Portugal with a history of schizoaffective disorder, is brought to the emergency department in a terrified state. She describes visual distortion and paranoia because she fears losing her vision. She complains of suicidal ideation, depressed mood, insomnia, auditory
hallucinations, and distortion of visual perception. She reports seeing shadows, recurring movements of the ceiling bearing down on her, and molding or melting walls.

Ms. K reports that the visual distortions began when she started zolpidem, 10 mg/d, 2 months earlier, after her mother in Portugal gave it to her.

Ms. K describes feeling disoriented and disconnected from reality. She reports taking extra doses of zolpidem (40 mg)—recommended maximum dosage is 10 mg3—and clonazepam (1 mg) to address her insomnia.

On examination, Ms. K appears shaky and tremulous, and we note that her eyeballs roll upward. Vital signs are within normal limits, and she is awake, alert, and oriented to person, place, and time.

We diagnose exacerbation of schizoaffective disorder.

Ms. K is admitted to the inpatient psychiatric unit for observation and treatment. Quetiapine, 100 mg at bedtime, and sertraline, 100 mg/d, are started and zolpidem is discontinued.

The morning after admission, Ms. K reports that her vision has improved and that she no longer sees shadows or colored spots. All visual distortions resolve within 1 day after discontinuing zolpidem.

Discussion

Ms. K had no history of ophthalmologic or neurologic disease or alcohol or substance use. Physical and neurologic examination and laboratory testing failed to reveal any abnormality that accounts for her clinical presentation. Also, she reported visual distortions in the absence of drowsiness,4 thereby ruling out hypnagogic hallucination.5

Visual hallucinations are uncommon in schizoaffective disorder, but have been shown to occur with zolpidem use.1,4 The clinical manifestations in Ms. K’s case are
consistent with those of 3 reports, in which patients reported visual symptoms shortly after an initial dose of zolpidem, 10 mg.1,6 In those cases, symptoms resolved soon after zolpidem was discontinued.

Ms. K’s case is similar to other reports in regard to time of onset and manifestations of visual distortions. Iruela and colleagues documented that hallucinations could be reproduced with a lower challenge dose of zolpidem (5 or 2.5 mg), and that, with such a challenge, symptoms should be less severe.7 How zolpidem induces visual hallucinations remains unknown. Several studies have looked at variables that might predispose a patient taking zolpidem to visual
perceptual distortions.1

Sex might play an important role.1,7 After administering the same dosage of zolpidem, women age 20 to 40 had a blood concentration of the drug that was, on average, 45% higher than those measured in men.6 This difference in serum concentration is more remarkable in older women; the blood concentration of the drug in women age >60 was 63% higher than that of men.

Influence of hormones. Pharmacokinetics of zolpidem seem to be related to endocrine factors associated with cytochrome P450 (CYP) 3A4 metabolism. A low plasma concentration of free testosterone may contribute to lower CYP3A activity, with women achieving as much as a 50% higher plasma level of zolpidem, whereas exposure to testosterone activates biotransformation via CYP3A.8

Body weight is important when dosing zolpidem. Zolpidem-induced macropsia
has been reported in women with anorexia.7 The protein-binding capacity of zolpidem is approximately 92%, mainly to albumin (66%) and α1-acid glycoprotein (56.6%).4 In malnourished patients with anorexia nervosa, hypoalbuminemia is common and, therefore, unbound drug concentration is higher. This effect could account for, or contribute to, zolpidem toxicity.7

Ms. K did not have anorexia nervosa and was not underweight, and her liver function and kidney function were within normal limits. However, prescribing guidelines call for an initial dosage of 5 mg/d for women (10 mg/d for men)3; Ms. K ingested 8 times the recommended daily dosage.

The lesson for practitioners? When you encounter a patient who has a psychiatric disorder with psychotic features, explore causes unrelated to their primary disorder—such as taking a hypnotic or multiple psychoactive medications—as a possible source of the presenting symptoms (Box). In Ms. K’s case, her unusual symptoms resolved after a change in pharmacotherapy, leading us to conclude that her visual distortions likely were secondary to zolpidem and not to her schizoaffective disorder—a confounding factor.

 

 


Disclosure
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Zolpidem, an imidazopyridine hypnotic, has been used as an alternative to benzodiazepines for treating short-term insomnia because it has a relatively favorable side effect profile and less potential for abuse.1

However, several cases of zolpidemrelated psychotic symptoms have been reported,2 including a report of an association between zolpidem and hallucinations.1 The case illustrated here describes distortion of visual perception that can occur after ingestion of more than the recommended dosage of zolpidem.


CASE: Terrified and paranoid with distorted vision

Ms. K, age 33, an English-speaking woman from Portugal with a history of schizoaffective disorder, is brought to the emergency department in a terrified state. She describes visual distortion and paranoia because she fears losing her vision. She complains of suicidal ideation, depressed mood, insomnia, auditory
hallucinations, and distortion of visual perception. She reports seeing shadows, recurring movements of the ceiling bearing down on her, and molding or melting walls.

Ms. K reports that the visual distortions began when she started zolpidem, 10 mg/d, 2 months earlier, after her mother in Portugal gave it to her.

Ms. K describes feeling disoriented and disconnected from reality. She reports taking extra doses of zolpidem (40 mg)—recommended maximum dosage is 10 mg3—and clonazepam (1 mg) to address her insomnia.

On examination, Ms. K appears shaky and tremulous, and we note that her eyeballs roll upward. Vital signs are within normal limits, and she is awake, alert, and oriented to person, place, and time.

We diagnose exacerbation of schizoaffective disorder.

Ms. K is admitted to the inpatient psychiatric unit for observation and treatment. Quetiapine, 100 mg at bedtime, and sertraline, 100 mg/d, are started and zolpidem is discontinued.

The morning after admission, Ms. K reports that her vision has improved and that she no longer sees shadows or colored spots. All visual distortions resolve within 1 day after discontinuing zolpidem.

Discussion

Ms. K had no history of ophthalmologic or neurologic disease or alcohol or substance use. Physical and neurologic examination and laboratory testing failed to reveal any abnormality that accounts for her clinical presentation. Also, she reported visual distortions in the absence of drowsiness,4 thereby ruling out hypnagogic hallucination.5

Visual hallucinations are uncommon in schizoaffective disorder, but have been shown to occur with zolpidem use.1,4 The clinical manifestations in Ms. K’s case are
consistent with those of 3 reports, in which patients reported visual symptoms shortly after an initial dose of zolpidem, 10 mg.1,6 In those cases, symptoms resolved soon after zolpidem was discontinued.

Ms. K’s case is similar to other reports in regard to time of onset and manifestations of visual distortions. Iruela and colleagues documented that hallucinations could be reproduced with a lower challenge dose of zolpidem (5 or 2.5 mg), and that, with such a challenge, symptoms should be less severe.7 How zolpidem induces visual hallucinations remains unknown. Several studies have looked at variables that might predispose a patient taking zolpidem to visual
perceptual distortions.1

Sex might play an important role.1,7 After administering the same dosage of zolpidem, women age 20 to 40 had a blood concentration of the drug that was, on average, 45% higher than those measured in men.6 This difference in serum concentration is more remarkable in older women; the blood concentration of the drug in women age >60 was 63% higher than that of men.

Influence of hormones. Pharmacokinetics of zolpidem seem to be related to endocrine factors associated with cytochrome P450 (CYP) 3A4 metabolism. A low plasma concentration of free testosterone may contribute to lower CYP3A activity, with women achieving as much as a 50% higher plasma level of zolpidem, whereas exposure to testosterone activates biotransformation via CYP3A.8

Body weight is important when dosing zolpidem. Zolpidem-induced macropsia
has been reported in women with anorexia.7 The protein-binding capacity of zolpidem is approximately 92%, mainly to albumin (66%) and α1-acid glycoprotein (56.6%).4 In malnourished patients with anorexia nervosa, hypoalbuminemia is common and, therefore, unbound drug concentration is higher. This effect could account for, or contribute to, zolpidem toxicity.7

Ms. K did not have anorexia nervosa and was not underweight, and her liver function and kidney function were within normal limits. However, prescribing guidelines call for an initial dosage of 5 mg/d for women (10 mg/d for men)3; Ms. K ingested 8 times the recommended daily dosage.

The lesson for practitioners? When you encounter a patient who has a psychiatric disorder with psychotic features, explore causes unrelated to their primary disorder—such as taking a hypnotic or multiple psychoactive medications—as a possible source of the presenting symptoms (Box). In Ms. K’s case, her unusual symptoms resolved after a change in pharmacotherapy, leading us to conclude that her visual distortions likely were secondary to zolpidem and not to her schizoaffective disorder—a confounding factor.

 

 


Disclosure
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. Huang CL, Chang CJ, Hung CF, et al. Zolpidem-induced distortion in visual perception. Ann Pharmacother. 2003;37(5):683-686.
2. Ansseau M, Pitchot W, Hansenne M, et al. Psychotic reaction to zolpidem (letter). Lancet. 1992;339(8796):809.
3. Ambien [package insert]. Bridgewater, NJ: sanofi-aventis U.S. LLC; 2013.
4. van Puijenbroek EP, Egberts AC, Krom HJ. Visual hallucinations and amnesia associated with the use of zolpidem (letter). Int J Clin Pharmacol Ther. 1996;34(7):318.
5. Morselli PL. Zolpidem side-effects (letter). Lancet. 1993; 342(8875):868-869.
6. Salvà P, Costa J. Clinical pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of zolpidem. Therapeutic implications. Clin Pharmacokinet. 1995;29(3):142-153.
7. Iruela LM, Ibañez-Rojo V, Baca E. Zolpidem-induced macropsia in anorexic woman (letter). Lancet. 1993; 342(8868):443-444.
8. Cubała WJ, Wiglusz M, Burkiewicz A, et al. Zolpidem pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics in metabolic interactions involving CYP3A: sex as a differentiating factor. Eur J Clin Pharmacol. 2010;66(9):955.

References


1. Huang CL, Chang CJ, Hung CF, et al. Zolpidem-induced distortion in visual perception. Ann Pharmacother. 2003;37(5):683-686.
2. Ansseau M, Pitchot W, Hansenne M, et al. Psychotic reaction to zolpidem (letter). Lancet. 1992;339(8796):809.
3. Ambien [package insert]. Bridgewater, NJ: sanofi-aventis U.S. LLC; 2013.
4. van Puijenbroek EP, Egberts AC, Krom HJ. Visual hallucinations and amnesia associated with the use of zolpidem (letter). Int J Clin Pharmacol Ther. 1996;34(7):318.
5. Morselli PL. Zolpidem side-effects (letter). Lancet. 1993; 342(8875):868-869.
6. Salvà P, Costa J. Clinical pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of zolpidem. Therapeutic implications. Clin Pharmacokinet. 1995;29(3):142-153.
7. Iruela LM, Ibañez-Rojo V, Baca E. Zolpidem-induced macropsia in anorexic woman (letter). Lancet. 1993; 342(8868):443-444.
8. Cubała WJ, Wiglusz M, Burkiewicz A, et al. Zolpidem pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics in metabolic interactions involving CYP3A: sex as a differentiating factor. Eur J Clin Pharmacol. 2010;66(9):955.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Page Number
31-32
Page Number
31-32
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Zolpidem may cause visual distortions and other psychotic symptoms
Display Headline
Zolpidem may cause visual distortions and other psychotic symptoms
Legacy Keywords
zolpidem, hallucinations, schizoaffective disorder, benzodiazepines, visual distortions
Legacy Keywords
zolpidem, hallucinations, schizoaffective disorder, benzodiazepines, visual distortions
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Schizophrenia prodrome: An optimal approach

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:02
Display Headline
Schizophrenia prodrome: An optimal approach

In studies of schizophrenia, one of the more striking findings is the delay in the initiation of treatment. That delay ranges from 1 to 2 years for patients experiencing psychotic symptoms to several years if the prodromal phase is taken into account.1 Yet duration of untreated psychosis has been found to be a critical factor in prognosis, including psychosocial functioning, in patients with schizophrenia.2,3 Identification of individuals in the prodromal phase not only offers an opportunity to intervene at an earlier symptomatic stage, but might be associated with a better response to antipsychotics and a better overall treatment outcome as well.


What’s in a name?

Several terms, including ultra high risk, clinical high risk, at-risk mental state, psychosis risk syndrome, and schizophrenia/psychosis prodrome, have been used to describe the prodromal phase of schizophrenia. The proposal to include attenuated psychosis syndrome (APS) in the DSM-5—originally intended to capture those with subthreshold delusions, hallucinations, or disorganized behavior, occurring at least once a week for the past month and worsening over the past year—generated a debate about the validity of such a diagnostic category4,5 that culminated in the inclusion of APS as a condition for further study but not as a term for clinical use.6 Its presence in the DSM-5 brings to the forefront the importance of early clinical intervention in patients at risk of developing psychotic illness.


Schizophrenia is not inevitable

The prodromal phase can be viewed as a sequence of evolving symptoms7 (Box 18,9), starting with subtle differences evident only to the person experiencing them and often progressing to brief limited intermittent psychosis (BLIPS) or attenuated psychosis.8

In fact, prodrome is a retrospective diagnosis. The predictive power of conversion to psychosis has been found to fluctuate from as low as 9% to as high as 76%,10 prompting ethical concerns about a high false-positive rate, the assumption of inevitability associated with the term “schizophrenia prodrome,”9 and the potential for overdiagnosis and misdiagnosis. Concerns about psychosocial stigma and exposure to antipsychotic medications have been expressed as well.11


A case for early engagement

In retrospect, patients who eventually progress to psychotic illness are commonly found to have been in the prodromal phase for several years. Yet many patients’ first contact with psychiatric services occurs during a florid episode of acute psychosis. Identifying patients in the early prodromal period offers the opportunity to more effectively engage them and form a therapeutic alliance.12 Any young adult who presents with a decline in academic or occupational function, social withdrawal, perplexity, and apparent distress or agitation (Table 113-16) without a clear precipitating factor should therefore be closely monitored, particularly if he (she) has a family history of psychosis.

Screening tools. A variety of interviews and rating scales (Table 28) have been developed to assess and monitor at-risk persons, a number of which have been designed to detect basic symptoms in the early phase of prodrome. In addition to the structured scales, several self-report tools—including the Prodromal Questionnaire-Brief (PQ-B), Youth Psychosis At Risk Questionnaire-Brief (YPARQ-B), Prime Screen-Revised, and PROD-screen (Screen for prodromal symptoms of psychosis)—have been found to be useful in screening a large sample to identify those who might need further evaluation.17

Increased risk of conversion. Several clinical factors are associated with an increased risk of conversion to psychotic illness.9 In addition to family history, these include:

  • greater severity and longer duration of attenuated positive symptoms
  • presence of bizarre thoughts and behavior
  • paranoia
  • decline in global assessment of functioning score over the previous year
  • use of either Cannabis or amphetamines.

A history of childhood trauma, increased sensitivity to psychosocial stressors, and dysregulation of the hypothalamicpituitary axis also have been associated with progression to psychosis.18

Recent evidence suggests that the prodromal phase is a predictor not only for psychosis but also for other disabling psychiatric illnesses, such as bipolar disorder and obsessive-compulsive disorder.19

From a phenomenological standpoint, disturbance of the sense of self—characterized by features such as depersonalization, derealization, decreased reactivity to other people and the environment, and intense reflectivity to oneself or others—has been proposed as a critical marker for progression to psychosis.20 Another predictor is the perception of negativity of others toward oneself. Examples include heightened sensitivity to rejection or shame, which seems to emerge from a pattern of insecure attachment, and the outsider status experienced by immigrants faced with multiple social, cultural, and language barriers.21 The presence of obsessivecompulsive symptoms during the prodromal phase has been linked to significant impairment in functioning, an acute switch to psychosis, and an increased risk of suicide.22

 

 


Monitor or treat? An optimal approach

A key dilemma in the management of patients who exhibit signs and symptoms of schizophrenia prodrome is whether to simply monitor closely or to initiate treatment.

International clinical practice guidelines recommend several practical steps in the monitoring of patients in a prepsychotic state (Table 3),23 but caution against the use of antipsychotic agents unless the patient meets diagnostic criteria for a psychotic disorder.

CBT. Some evidence supports the initiation of cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) during the initial prodromal phase and the addition of alow-dose atypical antipsychotic if the patient progresses to a later phase, characterized by BLIPS/APS.24,25 Evidence also suggests that a combination of CBT and antipsychotic medication might delay, but not prevent, the progression to a psychotic episode.9 Any risk of adverse metabolic complications precludes use ofan atypical antipsychotic.One potential alternative is the use of omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids (Box 2).26,27

A clinically useful approach would be to view schizophrenia/psychosis prodrome not as a distinct diagnostic category but as a cluster of signs and symptoms associated with an increased risk of psychosis, with persons in this phase in need of close follow-up and, possibly, early initiation of an antipsychotic agent. It is important to engage the patient and his family at an early stage to educate them about the diagnostic uncertainty; to help them deal with the stigma; to manage risk factors; and, collaboratively, to decide on an intervention strategy.23,28


Bottom Line

Despite several drawbacks, the concept of schizophrenia/psychosis prodrome may
be viewed as a cluster of signs and symptoms (rather than a distinct diagnostic category) associated with increased risk for psychosis that need close follow up. Follow up may involve psychoeducational and psychotherapeutic interventions and, need be, early initiation of antipsychotics. In addition, such symptoms may be associated with other psychiatric disorders such as bipolar disorder and obsessive- compulsive disorder. Timely attention and early intervention may alter the course
and improve overall prognosis.

Related Resources
• Early intervention in psychosis. WPA Education Committee’s recommended roles of the psychiatrist. www.wpanet.org/uploads/Education/Educational_Resources/earlyintervention-psychosis.pdf.
• Early Psychosis Prevention and Intervention Centre, Melbourne, Australia. http://eppic.org.au/psychosis.
• International Early Psychosis Association Writing Group. International clinical practice guidelines for early psychosis. Br J Psychiatry. 2005;187:s120-124. http://bjp.rcpsych.org/content/187/48/s120.full.


Disclosures
Dr. Madaan is an employee of University of Virginia Health System. As an employee with the University of Virginia, Dr. Madaan has received research support from Eli Lilly and Company, Forest, Merck, Otsuka, Pfizer, Shire, and Sunovion. He also has served as a consultant for the NOW Coalition for Bipolar Disorder, and on the American Psychiatric Association’s Focus Self-Assessment editorial board. Drs. Bestha and Kolli report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. Salokangas RK, McGlashan TH. Early detection and intervention of psychosis. A review. Nord J Psychiatry. 2008;62:92-105.
2. Perkins DO, Gu H, Boteva K, et al. Relationship between duration of untreated psychosis and outcome in first-episode schizophrenia: a critical review and meta-analysis. Am J Psychiatry. 2005;162(10): 1785-1804.
3. Stefanopoulou E, Lafuente AR, Fonseca AS, et al. Global assessment of psychosocial functioning and predictors of outcome in schizophrenia. Int J Psychiatry Clin Pract. 2011;15(1):62-68.
4. Yung AR, Nelson B, Thompson AD, et al. Should a “Risk Syndrome for Psychosis” be included in the DSMV? Schizophr Res. 2010;120(1-3):7-15.
5. Corcoran CM, First MB, Cornblatt B. The psychosis risk syndrome and its proposed inclusion in the DSM-V: a risk-benefit analysis. Schizophr Res. 2010;120(1-3):16-22.
6. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders, 5th ed, text rev. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association; 2013.
7. Schultze-Lutter F, Ruhrmann S, Berning J, et al. Basic symptoms and ultrahigh risk criteria: symptom development in the initial prodromal state. Schizophr Bull. 2010;36(1):182-191.
8. Correll CU, Hauser M, Auther AM, et al. Research in people with psychosis risk syndrome: a review of the current evidence and future directions. J Child Psychol
Psychiatry. 2010;51(4):390-431.
9. Addington J, Heinssen R. Prediction and prevention of psychosis in youth at clinical high risk. Annu Rev Clin Psychol. 2012;8:269-289.
10. Cannon TD, Cadenhead K, Cornblatt B, et al. Prediction of psychosis in youth at high clinical risk: a multisite longitudinal study in North America. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 2008;65(1):28-37.
11. Singh F, Mirzakhanian H, Fusar-Poli P, et al. Ethical implications for clinical practice and future research in “at risk” individuals. Curr Pharm Des. 2012;18(4):606-612.
12. Bota RG, Munro JS, Ricci WF, et al. The dynamics of insight in the prodrome of schizophrenia. CNS Spectr. 2006;11(5):355-362.
13. Phillips LJ, Yung AR, McGorry PD. Identification of young people at risk of psychosis: validation of Personal Assessment and Crisis Evaluation Clinic intake criteria. Aust N Z J Psychiatry. 2000;34(suppl):S164-S169.
14. Miller TJ, McGlashan TH, Woods SW, et al. Symptom assessment in schizophrenic prodromal states. Psychiatr Q. 1999;70(4):273-287.
15. Schultze-Lutter F, Klosterkötter J, Picker H. Predicting first-episode psychosis by basic symptom criteria. Clinical Neuropsychiatry. 2007;4(1):11-22.
16. Schultze-Lutter F, Ruhrmann S, Picker H, et al. Basic symptoms in early psychotic and depressive disorders. Br J Psychiatry Suppl. 2007;51:s31-s37.
17. Kline E, Wilson C, Ereshefsky S, et al. Convergent and discriminant validity of attenuated psychosis screening tools. Schizophr Res. 2012;134(1):49-53.
18. Holtzman CW, Shapiro DI, Trotman HD, et al. Stress and the prodromal phase of psychosis. Curr Pharm Des. 2012;18(4):527-533.
19. Rössler W, Hengartner MP, Ajdacic-Gross V, et al. Subclinical psychosis symptoms in young adults are risk factors for subsequent common mental disorders. Schizophr Res. 2011;131(1-3):18-23.
20. Nelson B, Yung AR, Bechdolf A, et al. The phenomenological critique and self-disturbance: implications for ultra-high risk (“prodrome”) research. Schizophr Bull. 2008;34(2):381-392.
21. Salokangas RK, Heinimaa M, Svirskis T, et al. Perceived negative attitude of others as an early sign of psychosis. Eur Psychiatry. 2009;24(4):233-238.
22. Niendam TA, Berzak J, Cannon TD, et al. Obsessive compulsive symptoms in the psychosis prodrome:correlates of clinical and functional outcome. Schizophr
Res. 2009;108(1-3):170-175.
23. Addington J, Amminger GP, Barbato A. International clinical practice guidelines for early psychosis. Br J Psychiatry. 2005;187:s120-s124.
24. Klosterkötter J, Schultze-Lutter F, Bechdolf A, et al. Prediction and prevention of schizophrenia: what has been achieved and where to go next? World Psychiatry.
2011;10(3):165-174.
25. Stafford MR, Jackson H, Mayo-Wilson E, et al. Early interventions to prevent psychosis: systematic review and meta-analysis. BMJ. 2013;346:f185.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Vishal Madaan, MD
University of Virginia Health System
Charlottesville, Virginia


Durga P. Bestha, MBBS
Carolinas Medical Center
Charlotte, North Carolina

Venkata Kolli, MBBS, MRCPsych
Creighton University Medical Center
Omaha, Nebraska

Audio / Podcast
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
16-20, 29-30
Legacy Keywords
schizophrenia prodome, ultra high risk, at-risk mental state, psychosis risk syndrome, schizophrenia, psychosis, CBT
Sections
Audio / Podcast
Audio / Podcast
Author and Disclosure Information

Vishal Madaan, MD
University of Virginia Health System
Charlottesville, Virginia


Durga P. Bestha, MBBS
Carolinas Medical Center
Charlotte, North Carolina

Venkata Kolli, MBBS, MRCPsych
Creighton University Medical Center
Omaha, Nebraska

Author and Disclosure Information

Vishal Madaan, MD
University of Virginia Health System
Charlottesville, Virginia


Durga P. Bestha, MBBS
Carolinas Medical Center
Charlotte, North Carolina

Venkata Kolli, MBBS, MRCPsych
Creighton University Medical Center
Omaha, Nebraska

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

In studies of schizophrenia, one of the more striking findings is the delay in the initiation of treatment. That delay ranges from 1 to 2 years for patients experiencing psychotic symptoms to several years if the prodromal phase is taken into account.1 Yet duration of untreated psychosis has been found to be a critical factor in prognosis, including psychosocial functioning, in patients with schizophrenia.2,3 Identification of individuals in the prodromal phase not only offers an opportunity to intervene at an earlier symptomatic stage, but might be associated with a better response to antipsychotics and a better overall treatment outcome as well.


What’s in a name?

Several terms, including ultra high risk, clinical high risk, at-risk mental state, psychosis risk syndrome, and schizophrenia/psychosis prodrome, have been used to describe the prodromal phase of schizophrenia. The proposal to include attenuated psychosis syndrome (APS) in the DSM-5—originally intended to capture those with subthreshold delusions, hallucinations, or disorganized behavior, occurring at least once a week for the past month and worsening over the past year—generated a debate about the validity of such a diagnostic category4,5 that culminated in the inclusion of APS as a condition for further study but not as a term for clinical use.6 Its presence in the DSM-5 brings to the forefront the importance of early clinical intervention in patients at risk of developing psychotic illness.


Schizophrenia is not inevitable

The prodromal phase can be viewed as a sequence of evolving symptoms7 (Box 18,9), starting with subtle differences evident only to the person experiencing them and often progressing to brief limited intermittent psychosis (BLIPS) or attenuated psychosis.8

In fact, prodrome is a retrospective diagnosis. The predictive power of conversion to psychosis has been found to fluctuate from as low as 9% to as high as 76%,10 prompting ethical concerns about a high false-positive rate, the assumption of inevitability associated with the term “schizophrenia prodrome,”9 and the potential for overdiagnosis and misdiagnosis. Concerns about psychosocial stigma and exposure to antipsychotic medications have been expressed as well.11


A case for early engagement

In retrospect, patients who eventually progress to psychotic illness are commonly found to have been in the prodromal phase for several years. Yet many patients’ first contact with psychiatric services occurs during a florid episode of acute psychosis. Identifying patients in the early prodromal period offers the opportunity to more effectively engage them and form a therapeutic alliance.12 Any young adult who presents with a decline in academic or occupational function, social withdrawal, perplexity, and apparent distress or agitation (Table 113-16) without a clear precipitating factor should therefore be closely monitored, particularly if he (she) has a family history of psychosis.

Screening tools. A variety of interviews and rating scales (Table 28) have been developed to assess and monitor at-risk persons, a number of which have been designed to detect basic symptoms in the early phase of prodrome. In addition to the structured scales, several self-report tools—including the Prodromal Questionnaire-Brief (PQ-B), Youth Psychosis At Risk Questionnaire-Brief (YPARQ-B), Prime Screen-Revised, and PROD-screen (Screen for prodromal symptoms of psychosis)—have been found to be useful in screening a large sample to identify those who might need further evaluation.17

Increased risk of conversion. Several clinical factors are associated with an increased risk of conversion to psychotic illness.9 In addition to family history, these include:

  • greater severity and longer duration of attenuated positive symptoms
  • presence of bizarre thoughts and behavior
  • paranoia
  • decline in global assessment of functioning score over the previous year
  • use of either Cannabis or amphetamines.

A history of childhood trauma, increased sensitivity to psychosocial stressors, and dysregulation of the hypothalamicpituitary axis also have been associated with progression to psychosis.18

Recent evidence suggests that the prodromal phase is a predictor not only for psychosis but also for other disabling psychiatric illnesses, such as bipolar disorder and obsessive-compulsive disorder.19

From a phenomenological standpoint, disturbance of the sense of self—characterized by features such as depersonalization, derealization, decreased reactivity to other people and the environment, and intense reflectivity to oneself or others—has been proposed as a critical marker for progression to psychosis.20 Another predictor is the perception of negativity of others toward oneself. Examples include heightened sensitivity to rejection or shame, which seems to emerge from a pattern of insecure attachment, and the outsider status experienced by immigrants faced with multiple social, cultural, and language barriers.21 The presence of obsessivecompulsive symptoms during the prodromal phase has been linked to significant impairment in functioning, an acute switch to psychosis, and an increased risk of suicide.22

 

 


Monitor or treat? An optimal approach

A key dilemma in the management of patients who exhibit signs and symptoms of schizophrenia prodrome is whether to simply monitor closely or to initiate treatment.

International clinical practice guidelines recommend several practical steps in the monitoring of patients in a prepsychotic state (Table 3),23 but caution against the use of antipsychotic agents unless the patient meets diagnostic criteria for a psychotic disorder.

CBT. Some evidence supports the initiation of cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) during the initial prodromal phase and the addition of alow-dose atypical antipsychotic if the patient progresses to a later phase, characterized by BLIPS/APS.24,25 Evidence also suggests that a combination of CBT and antipsychotic medication might delay, but not prevent, the progression to a psychotic episode.9 Any risk of adverse metabolic complications precludes use ofan atypical antipsychotic.One potential alternative is the use of omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids (Box 2).26,27

A clinically useful approach would be to view schizophrenia/psychosis prodrome not as a distinct diagnostic category but as a cluster of signs and symptoms associated with an increased risk of psychosis, with persons in this phase in need of close follow-up and, possibly, early initiation of an antipsychotic agent. It is important to engage the patient and his family at an early stage to educate them about the diagnostic uncertainty; to help them deal with the stigma; to manage risk factors; and, collaboratively, to decide on an intervention strategy.23,28


Bottom Line

Despite several drawbacks, the concept of schizophrenia/psychosis prodrome may
be viewed as a cluster of signs and symptoms (rather than a distinct diagnostic category) associated with increased risk for psychosis that need close follow up. Follow up may involve psychoeducational and psychotherapeutic interventions and, need be, early initiation of antipsychotics. In addition, such symptoms may be associated with other psychiatric disorders such as bipolar disorder and obsessive- compulsive disorder. Timely attention and early intervention may alter the course
and improve overall prognosis.

Related Resources
• Early intervention in psychosis. WPA Education Committee’s recommended roles of the psychiatrist. www.wpanet.org/uploads/Education/Educational_Resources/earlyintervention-psychosis.pdf.
• Early Psychosis Prevention and Intervention Centre, Melbourne, Australia. http://eppic.org.au/psychosis.
• International Early Psychosis Association Writing Group. International clinical practice guidelines for early psychosis. Br J Psychiatry. 2005;187:s120-124. http://bjp.rcpsych.org/content/187/48/s120.full.


Disclosures
Dr. Madaan is an employee of University of Virginia Health System. As an employee with the University of Virginia, Dr. Madaan has received research support from Eli Lilly and Company, Forest, Merck, Otsuka, Pfizer, Shire, and Sunovion. He also has served as a consultant for the NOW Coalition for Bipolar Disorder, and on the American Psychiatric Association’s Focus Self-Assessment editorial board. Drs. Bestha and Kolli report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

In studies of schizophrenia, one of the more striking findings is the delay in the initiation of treatment. That delay ranges from 1 to 2 years for patients experiencing psychotic symptoms to several years if the prodromal phase is taken into account.1 Yet duration of untreated psychosis has been found to be a critical factor in prognosis, including psychosocial functioning, in patients with schizophrenia.2,3 Identification of individuals in the prodromal phase not only offers an opportunity to intervene at an earlier symptomatic stage, but might be associated with a better response to antipsychotics and a better overall treatment outcome as well.


What’s in a name?

Several terms, including ultra high risk, clinical high risk, at-risk mental state, psychosis risk syndrome, and schizophrenia/psychosis prodrome, have been used to describe the prodromal phase of schizophrenia. The proposal to include attenuated psychosis syndrome (APS) in the DSM-5—originally intended to capture those with subthreshold delusions, hallucinations, or disorganized behavior, occurring at least once a week for the past month and worsening over the past year—generated a debate about the validity of such a diagnostic category4,5 that culminated in the inclusion of APS as a condition for further study but not as a term for clinical use.6 Its presence in the DSM-5 brings to the forefront the importance of early clinical intervention in patients at risk of developing psychotic illness.


Schizophrenia is not inevitable

The prodromal phase can be viewed as a sequence of evolving symptoms7 (Box 18,9), starting with subtle differences evident only to the person experiencing them and often progressing to brief limited intermittent psychosis (BLIPS) or attenuated psychosis.8

In fact, prodrome is a retrospective diagnosis. The predictive power of conversion to psychosis has been found to fluctuate from as low as 9% to as high as 76%,10 prompting ethical concerns about a high false-positive rate, the assumption of inevitability associated with the term “schizophrenia prodrome,”9 and the potential for overdiagnosis and misdiagnosis. Concerns about psychosocial stigma and exposure to antipsychotic medications have been expressed as well.11


A case for early engagement

In retrospect, patients who eventually progress to psychotic illness are commonly found to have been in the prodromal phase for several years. Yet many patients’ first contact with psychiatric services occurs during a florid episode of acute psychosis. Identifying patients in the early prodromal period offers the opportunity to more effectively engage them and form a therapeutic alliance.12 Any young adult who presents with a decline in academic or occupational function, social withdrawal, perplexity, and apparent distress or agitation (Table 113-16) without a clear precipitating factor should therefore be closely monitored, particularly if he (she) has a family history of psychosis.

Screening tools. A variety of interviews and rating scales (Table 28) have been developed to assess and monitor at-risk persons, a number of which have been designed to detect basic symptoms in the early phase of prodrome. In addition to the structured scales, several self-report tools—including the Prodromal Questionnaire-Brief (PQ-B), Youth Psychosis At Risk Questionnaire-Brief (YPARQ-B), Prime Screen-Revised, and PROD-screen (Screen for prodromal symptoms of psychosis)—have been found to be useful in screening a large sample to identify those who might need further evaluation.17

Increased risk of conversion. Several clinical factors are associated with an increased risk of conversion to psychotic illness.9 In addition to family history, these include:

  • greater severity and longer duration of attenuated positive symptoms
  • presence of bizarre thoughts and behavior
  • paranoia
  • decline in global assessment of functioning score over the previous year
  • use of either Cannabis or amphetamines.

A history of childhood trauma, increased sensitivity to psychosocial stressors, and dysregulation of the hypothalamicpituitary axis also have been associated with progression to psychosis.18

Recent evidence suggests that the prodromal phase is a predictor not only for psychosis but also for other disabling psychiatric illnesses, such as bipolar disorder and obsessive-compulsive disorder.19

From a phenomenological standpoint, disturbance of the sense of self—characterized by features such as depersonalization, derealization, decreased reactivity to other people and the environment, and intense reflectivity to oneself or others—has been proposed as a critical marker for progression to psychosis.20 Another predictor is the perception of negativity of others toward oneself. Examples include heightened sensitivity to rejection or shame, which seems to emerge from a pattern of insecure attachment, and the outsider status experienced by immigrants faced with multiple social, cultural, and language barriers.21 The presence of obsessivecompulsive symptoms during the prodromal phase has been linked to significant impairment in functioning, an acute switch to psychosis, and an increased risk of suicide.22

 

 


Monitor or treat? An optimal approach

A key dilemma in the management of patients who exhibit signs and symptoms of schizophrenia prodrome is whether to simply monitor closely or to initiate treatment.

International clinical practice guidelines recommend several practical steps in the monitoring of patients in a prepsychotic state (Table 3),23 but caution against the use of antipsychotic agents unless the patient meets diagnostic criteria for a psychotic disorder.

CBT. Some evidence supports the initiation of cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) during the initial prodromal phase and the addition of alow-dose atypical antipsychotic if the patient progresses to a later phase, characterized by BLIPS/APS.24,25 Evidence also suggests that a combination of CBT and antipsychotic medication might delay, but not prevent, the progression to a psychotic episode.9 Any risk of adverse metabolic complications precludes use ofan atypical antipsychotic.One potential alternative is the use of omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids (Box 2).26,27

A clinically useful approach would be to view schizophrenia/psychosis prodrome not as a distinct diagnostic category but as a cluster of signs and symptoms associated with an increased risk of psychosis, with persons in this phase in need of close follow-up and, possibly, early initiation of an antipsychotic agent. It is important to engage the patient and his family at an early stage to educate them about the diagnostic uncertainty; to help them deal with the stigma; to manage risk factors; and, collaboratively, to decide on an intervention strategy.23,28


Bottom Line

Despite several drawbacks, the concept of schizophrenia/psychosis prodrome may
be viewed as a cluster of signs and symptoms (rather than a distinct diagnostic category) associated with increased risk for psychosis that need close follow up. Follow up may involve psychoeducational and psychotherapeutic interventions and, need be, early initiation of antipsychotics. In addition, such symptoms may be associated with other psychiatric disorders such as bipolar disorder and obsessive- compulsive disorder. Timely attention and early intervention may alter the course
and improve overall prognosis.

Related Resources
• Early intervention in psychosis. WPA Education Committee’s recommended roles of the psychiatrist. www.wpanet.org/uploads/Education/Educational_Resources/earlyintervention-psychosis.pdf.
• Early Psychosis Prevention and Intervention Centre, Melbourne, Australia. http://eppic.org.au/psychosis.
• International Early Psychosis Association Writing Group. International clinical practice guidelines for early psychosis. Br J Psychiatry. 2005;187:s120-124. http://bjp.rcpsych.org/content/187/48/s120.full.


Disclosures
Dr. Madaan is an employee of University of Virginia Health System. As an employee with the University of Virginia, Dr. Madaan has received research support from Eli Lilly and Company, Forest, Merck, Otsuka, Pfizer, Shire, and Sunovion. He also has served as a consultant for the NOW Coalition for Bipolar Disorder, and on the American Psychiatric Association’s Focus Self-Assessment editorial board. Drs. Bestha and Kolli report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References


1. Salokangas RK, McGlashan TH. Early detection and intervention of psychosis. A review. Nord J Psychiatry. 2008;62:92-105.
2. Perkins DO, Gu H, Boteva K, et al. Relationship between duration of untreated psychosis and outcome in first-episode schizophrenia: a critical review and meta-analysis. Am J Psychiatry. 2005;162(10): 1785-1804.
3. Stefanopoulou E, Lafuente AR, Fonseca AS, et al. Global assessment of psychosocial functioning and predictors of outcome in schizophrenia. Int J Psychiatry Clin Pract. 2011;15(1):62-68.
4. Yung AR, Nelson B, Thompson AD, et al. Should a “Risk Syndrome for Psychosis” be included in the DSMV? Schizophr Res. 2010;120(1-3):7-15.
5. Corcoran CM, First MB, Cornblatt B. The psychosis risk syndrome and its proposed inclusion in the DSM-V: a risk-benefit analysis. Schizophr Res. 2010;120(1-3):16-22.
6. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders, 5th ed, text rev. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association; 2013.
7. Schultze-Lutter F, Ruhrmann S, Berning J, et al. Basic symptoms and ultrahigh risk criteria: symptom development in the initial prodromal state. Schizophr Bull. 2010;36(1):182-191.
8. Correll CU, Hauser M, Auther AM, et al. Research in people with psychosis risk syndrome: a review of the current evidence and future directions. J Child Psychol
Psychiatry. 2010;51(4):390-431.
9. Addington J, Heinssen R. Prediction and prevention of psychosis in youth at clinical high risk. Annu Rev Clin Psychol. 2012;8:269-289.
10. Cannon TD, Cadenhead K, Cornblatt B, et al. Prediction of psychosis in youth at high clinical risk: a multisite longitudinal study in North America. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 2008;65(1):28-37.
11. Singh F, Mirzakhanian H, Fusar-Poli P, et al. Ethical implications for clinical practice and future research in “at risk” individuals. Curr Pharm Des. 2012;18(4):606-612.
12. Bota RG, Munro JS, Ricci WF, et al. The dynamics of insight in the prodrome of schizophrenia. CNS Spectr. 2006;11(5):355-362.
13. Phillips LJ, Yung AR, McGorry PD. Identification of young people at risk of psychosis: validation of Personal Assessment and Crisis Evaluation Clinic intake criteria. Aust N Z J Psychiatry. 2000;34(suppl):S164-S169.
14. Miller TJ, McGlashan TH, Woods SW, et al. Symptom assessment in schizophrenic prodromal states. Psychiatr Q. 1999;70(4):273-287.
15. Schultze-Lutter F, Klosterkötter J, Picker H. Predicting first-episode psychosis by basic symptom criteria. Clinical Neuropsychiatry. 2007;4(1):11-22.
16. Schultze-Lutter F, Ruhrmann S, Picker H, et al. Basic symptoms in early psychotic and depressive disorders. Br J Psychiatry Suppl. 2007;51:s31-s37.
17. Kline E, Wilson C, Ereshefsky S, et al. Convergent and discriminant validity of attenuated psychosis screening tools. Schizophr Res. 2012;134(1):49-53.
18. Holtzman CW, Shapiro DI, Trotman HD, et al. Stress and the prodromal phase of psychosis. Curr Pharm Des. 2012;18(4):527-533.
19. Rössler W, Hengartner MP, Ajdacic-Gross V, et al. Subclinical psychosis symptoms in young adults are risk factors for subsequent common mental disorders. Schizophr Res. 2011;131(1-3):18-23.
20. Nelson B, Yung AR, Bechdolf A, et al. The phenomenological critique and self-disturbance: implications for ultra-high risk (“prodrome”) research. Schizophr Bull. 2008;34(2):381-392.
21. Salokangas RK, Heinimaa M, Svirskis T, et al. Perceived negative attitude of others as an early sign of psychosis. Eur Psychiatry. 2009;24(4):233-238.
22. Niendam TA, Berzak J, Cannon TD, et al. Obsessive compulsive symptoms in the psychosis prodrome:correlates of clinical and functional outcome. Schizophr
Res. 2009;108(1-3):170-175.
23. Addington J, Amminger GP, Barbato A. International clinical practice guidelines for early psychosis. Br J Psychiatry. 2005;187:s120-s124.
24. Klosterkötter J, Schultze-Lutter F, Bechdolf A, et al. Prediction and prevention of schizophrenia: what has been achieved and where to go next? World Psychiatry.
2011;10(3):165-174.
25. Stafford MR, Jackson H, Mayo-Wilson E, et al. Early interventions to prevent psychosis: systematic review and meta-analysis. BMJ. 2013;346:f185.

References


1. Salokangas RK, McGlashan TH. Early detection and intervention of psychosis. A review. Nord J Psychiatry. 2008;62:92-105.
2. Perkins DO, Gu H, Boteva K, et al. Relationship between duration of untreated psychosis and outcome in first-episode schizophrenia: a critical review and meta-analysis. Am J Psychiatry. 2005;162(10): 1785-1804.
3. Stefanopoulou E, Lafuente AR, Fonseca AS, et al. Global assessment of psychosocial functioning and predictors of outcome in schizophrenia. Int J Psychiatry Clin Pract. 2011;15(1):62-68.
4. Yung AR, Nelson B, Thompson AD, et al. Should a “Risk Syndrome for Psychosis” be included in the DSMV? Schizophr Res. 2010;120(1-3):7-15.
5. Corcoran CM, First MB, Cornblatt B. The psychosis risk syndrome and its proposed inclusion in the DSM-V: a risk-benefit analysis. Schizophr Res. 2010;120(1-3):16-22.
6. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders, 5th ed, text rev. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association; 2013.
7. Schultze-Lutter F, Ruhrmann S, Berning J, et al. Basic symptoms and ultrahigh risk criteria: symptom development in the initial prodromal state. Schizophr Bull. 2010;36(1):182-191.
8. Correll CU, Hauser M, Auther AM, et al. Research in people with psychosis risk syndrome: a review of the current evidence and future directions. J Child Psychol
Psychiatry. 2010;51(4):390-431.
9. Addington J, Heinssen R. Prediction and prevention of psychosis in youth at clinical high risk. Annu Rev Clin Psychol. 2012;8:269-289.
10. Cannon TD, Cadenhead K, Cornblatt B, et al. Prediction of psychosis in youth at high clinical risk: a multisite longitudinal study in North America. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 2008;65(1):28-37.
11. Singh F, Mirzakhanian H, Fusar-Poli P, et al. Ethical implications for clinical practice and future research in “at risk” individuals. Curr Pharm Des. 2012;18(4):606-612.
12. Bota RG, Munro JS, Ricci WF, et al. The dynamics of insight in the prodrome of schizophrenia. CNS Spectr. 2006;11(5):355-362.
13. Phillips LJ, Yung AR, McGorry PD. Identification of young people at risk of psychosis: validation of Personal Assessment and Crisis Evaluation Clinic intake criteria. Aust N Z J Psychiatry. 2000;34(suppl):S164-S169.
14. Miller TJ, McGlashan TH, Woods SW, et al. Symptom assessment in schizophrenic prodromal states. Psychiatr Q. 1999;70(4):273-287.
15. Schultze-Lutter F, Klosterkötter J, Picker H. Predicting first-episode psychosis by basic symptom criteria. Clinical Neuropsychiatry. 2007;4(1):11-22.
16. Schultze-Lutter F, Ruhrmann S, Picker H, et al. Basic symptoms in early psychotic and depressive disorders. Br J Psychiatry Suppl. 2007;51:s31-s37.
17. Kline E, Wilson C, Ereshefsky S, et al. Convergent and discriminant validity of attenuated psychosis screening tools. Schizophr Res. 2012;134(1):49-53.
18. Holtzman CW, Shapiro DI, Trotman HD, et al. Stress and the prodromal phase of psychosis. Curr Pharm Des. 2012;18(4):527-533.
19. Rössler W, Hengartner MP, Ajdacic-Gross V, et al. Subclinical psychosis symptoms in young adults are risk factors for subsequent common mental disorders. Schizophr Res. 2011;131(1-3):18-23.
20. Nelson B, Yung AR, Bechdolf A, et al. The phenomenological critique and self-disturbance: implications for ultra-high risk (“prodrome”) research. Schizophr Bull. 2008;34(2):381-392.
21. Salokangas RK, Heinimaa M, Svirskis T, et al. Perceived negative attitude of others as an early sign of psychosis. Eur Psychiatry. 2009;24(4):233-238.
22. Niendam TA, Berzak J, Cannon TD, et al. Obsessive compulsive symptoms in the psychosis prodrome:correlates of clinical and functional outcome. Schizophr
Res. 2009;108(1-3):170-175.
23. Addington J, Amminger GP, Barbato A. International clinical practice guidelines for early psychosis. Br J Psychiatry. 2005;187:s120-s124.
24. Klosterkötter J, Schultze-Lutter F, Bechdolf A, et al. Prediction and prevention of schizophrenia: what has been achieved and where to go next? World Psychiatry.
2011;10(3):165-174.
25. Stafford MR, Jackson H, Mayo-Wilson E, et al. Early interventions to prevent psychosis: systematic review and meta-analysis. BMJ. 2013;346:f185.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 13(3)
Page Number
16-20, 29-30
Page Number
16-20, 29-30
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Schizophrenia prodrome: An optimal approach
Display Headline
Schizophrenia prodrome: An optimal approach
Legacy Keywords
schizophrenia prodome, ultra high risk, at-risk mental state, psychosis risk syndrome, schizophrenia, psychosis, CBT
Legacy Keywords
schizophrenia prodome, ultra high risk, at-risk mental state, psychosis risk syndrome, schizophrenia, psychosis, CBT
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

New hypertension guidelines: One size fits most?

Article Type
Changed
Wed, 09/13/2017 - 09:27
Display Headline
New hypertension guidelines: One size fits most?

The report of the panel appointed to the eighth Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure (JNC 8),1 published in December 2013 after considerable delay, contains some important changes from earlier guidelines from this group.2 For example:

  • The blood pressure goal has been changed to less than 150/90 mm Hg in people age 60 and older. Formerly, the goal was less than 140/90 mm Hg.
  • The goal has been changed to less than 140/90 mm Hg in all others, including people with diabetes mellitus and chronic kidney disease. Formerly, those two groups had a goal of less than 130/80 mm Hg.
  • The initial choice of therapy can be from any of four classes of drugs: thiazide-type diuretics, calcium channel blockers, angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors, or angiotensin receptor blockers (ARBs). Formerly, the list also contained beta-blockers. Also, thiazide-type diuretics have lost their “preferred” status.

The new guidelines are evidence-based and are intended to simplify the way that hypertension is managed. Below, we summarize them—how they were developed, their strengths and limitations, and the main changes from earlier JNC reports.

WHOSE GUIDELINES ARE THESE?

The JNC has issued guidelines for managing hypertension since 1976, traditionally sanctioned by the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (NHLBI) of the National Institutes of Health. The guidelines have generally been updated every 4 to 5 years, with the last update, JNC 7,2 published in 2003.

The JNC 8 panel, consisting of 17 members, was commissioned by the NHLBI in 2008. However, in June 2013, the NHLBI announced it was withdrawing from guideline development and was delegating it to selected specialty organizations.3,4 In the interest of bringing the already delayed guidelines to the public in a timely manner, the JNC 8 panel decided to pursue publication independently and submitted the report to a medical journal. It is therefore not an official NHLBI-sanctioned report.

Here, we will refer to the new guidelines as “JNC 8,” but they are officially from “panel members appointed to the Eighth Joint National Committee (JNC 8).”

THREE QUESTIONS THAT GUIDED THE GUIDELINES

Epidemiologic studies clearly show a close relationship between blood pressure and the risk of heart disease, stroke, and kidney disease, these risks being lowest at a blood pressure of around 115/75 mm Hg.5 However, clinical trials have failed to show any evidence to justify treatment with antihypertensive medications to such a low level once hypertension has been diagnosed.

Patients and health care providers thus face questions about when to begin treatment, how low to aim for, and which antihypertensive medications to use. The JNC 8 panel focused on these three questions, believing them to be of greatest relevance to primary care providers.

A RIGOROUS PROCESS OF EVIDENCE REVIEW AND GUIDELINE DEVELOPMENT

The JNC 8 panel followed the guideline-development pathway outlined by the Institute of Medicine report, Clinical Practice Guidelines We Can Trust.6

Studies published from January 1966 through December 2009 that met specified criteria were selected for evidence review. Specifically, the studies had to be randomized controlled trials—no observational studies, systematic reviews, or meta-analyses, which were allowed in the JNC 7 report—with sample sizes of more than 100. Follow-up had to be for more than 1 year. Participants had to be age 18 or older and have hypertension—studies with patients with normal blood pressure or prehypertension were excluded. Health outcomes had to be reported, ie, “hard” end points such as rates of death, myocardial infarction, heart failure, hospitalization for heart failure, stroke, revascularization, and end-stage renal disease. Post hoc analyses were not allowed. The studies had to be rated by the NHLBI’s standardized quality rating tool as “good” (which has the least risk of bias, with valid results) or “fair (which is susceptible to some bias, but not enough to invalidate the results).

Subsequently, another search was conducted for relevant studies published from December 2009 through August 2013. In addition to meeting all the other criteria, this bridging search further restricted selection to major multicenter studies with sample sizes of more than 2,000.

An external methodology team performed the initial literature review and summarized the data. The JNC panel then crafted evidence statements and clinical recommendations using the evidence quality rating and grading systems developed by the NHLBI. In January 2013, the NHLBI submitted the guidelines for external review by individual reviewers with expertise in hypertension and to federal agencies, and a revised document was framed based on their comments and suggestions.

The evidence statements are detailed in an online 300-page supplemental review, and the panel members have indicated that reviewer comments and responses from the presubmission review process will be made available on request.

NINE RECOMMENDATIONS AND ONE COROLLARY

The panel made nine recommendations and one corollary recommendation based on a review of the evidence. Of the 10 total recommendations, five are based on expert opinion. Another two were rated as “moderate” in strength, one was “weak,” and only two were rated as “strong” (ie, based on high-quality evidence).

 

 

Recommendation 1: < 150/90 for those 60 and older

In the general population age 60 and older, the JNC 8 recommends starting drug treatment if the systolic pressure is 150 mm Hg or higher or if the diastolic pressure is 90 mm Hg or higher, and aiming for a systolic goal of less than 150 mm Hg and a diastolic goal of less than 90 mm Hg.

Strength of recommendation—strong (grade A).

Comments. Of all the recommendations, this one will probably have the greatest impact on clinical practice. Consider a frail 70-year-old patient at risk of falls who is taking two antihypertensive medications and whose blood pressure is 148/85 mm Hg. This level would have been considered too high under JNC 7 but is now acceptable, and the patient’s therapy does not have to be escalated.

The age cutoff of 60 years for this recommendation is debatable. The Japanese Trial to Assess Optimal Systolic Blood Pressure in Elderly Hypertensive Patients (JATOS)7 included patients ages 60 to 85 (mean age 74) and found no difference in outcomes comparing a goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg (this group achieved a mean systolic pressure of 135.9 mm Hg) and a goal systolic pressure of 140 to 160 mm Hg (achieved systolic pressure 145.6 mm Hg).

Similarly, the Valsartan in Elderly Isolated Systolic Hypertension (VALISH) trial8 included patients ages 70 to 84 (mean age 76.1) and found no difference in outcomes between a goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg (achieved systolic pressure 136.6 mm Hg) and a goal of 140 to 150 mm Hg (achieved systolic pressure 142 mm Hg).

The Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial (HYVET)9 found lower rates of stroke, death, and heart failure in patients age 80 and older when their systolic pressure was less than 150 mm Hg.

While these trials support a goal pressure of less than 150 mm Hg in the elderly, it is unclear whether this goal should be applied beginning at age 60. Other guidelines, including those recently released jointly by the American Society of Hypertension and the International Society of Hypertension, recommend a systolic goal of less than 150 mm Hg in people age 80 and older—not age 60.10

The recommendation for a goal systolic pressure of less than 150 mm Hg in people age 60 and older was not unanimous; some panel members recommended continuing the JNC 7 goal of less than 140 mm Hg based on expert opinion, as they believed that the evidence was insufficient, especially in high-risk subgroups such as black people and those with cerebrovascular disease and other risk factors.

A subsequent minority report from five panel members discusses in more detail why they believe the systolic target should be kept lower than 140 mm Hg in patients age 60 or older until the risks and benefits of a higher target become clearer.11

Corollary recommendation: No need to down-titrate if lower than 140

In the general population age 60 and older, dosages do not have to be adjusted downward if the patient’s systolic pressure is already lower than 140 mm Hg and treatment is well tolerated without adverse effects on health or quality of life.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. In the studies that supported a systolic goal lower than 150 mm Hg, many participants actually achieved a systolic pressure lower than 140 mm Hg without any adverse events. Trials that showed no benefit from a systolic goal lower than 140 mm Hg were graded as lower in quality. Thus, the possibility remains that a systolic goal lower than 140 mm Hg could have a clinically important benefit. Therefore, medications do not have to be adjusted so that blood pressure can “ride up.”

For example, therapy does not need to be down-titrated in a 65-year-old patient whose blood pressure is 138/85 mm Hg on two medications that he or she is tolerating well. On the other hand, based on Recommendation 1, therapy can be down-titrated in a 65-year-old whose pressure is 138/85 mm Hg on four medications that are causing side effects.

Recommendation 2: Diastolic < 90 for those younger than 60

In the general population younger than 60 years, JNC 8 recommends starting pharmacologic treatment if the diastolic pressure is 90 mm Hg or higher and aiming for a goal diastolic pressure of less than 90 mm Hg.

Strength of recommendation—strong (grade A) for ages 30 to 59, expert opinion (grade E) for ages 18 to 29.

Comments. The panel found no evidence to support a goal diastolic pressure of 80 mm Hg or less (or 85 mm Hg or less) compared with 90 mm Hg or less in this population.

It is reasonable to aim for the same diastolic goal in younger persons (under age 30), given the higher prevalence of diastolic hypertension in younger people.

Recommendation 3: Systolic < 140 for those younger than 60

In the general population younger than 60 years, we should start drug treatment at a systolic pressure of 140 mm Hg or higher and treat to a systolic goal of less than 140 mm Hg.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. Although evidence was insufficient to support this recommendation, the panel decided to keep the same systolic goal for people younger than 60 as in the JNC 7 recommendations, for the following two reasons.

First, there is strong evidence supporting a diastolic goal of less than 90 mm Hg in this population (Recommendation 2), and many study participants who achieved a diastolic pressure lower than 90 mm Hg also achieved a systolic pressure lower than 140. Therefore, it is not possible to tease out whether the outcome benefits were due to lower systolic pressure or to lower diastolic pressure, or to both.

Second, the panel believed the guidelines would be simpler to implement if the systolic goals were the same in the general population as in those with chronic kidney disease or diabetes (see below).

Recommendation 4: < 140/90 in chronic kidney disease

In patients age 18 and older with chronic kidney disease, JNC 8 recommends starting drug treatment at a systolic pressure of 140 mm Hg or higher or a diastolic pressure of 90 mm Hg or higher and treating to a goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg and a diastolic pressure of less than 90 mm Hg.

Chronic kidney disease is defined as either a glomerular filtration rate (estimated or measured) less than 60 mL/min/1.73 m2 in people up to age 70, or albuminuria, defined as more than 30 mg/g of creatinine at any glomerular filtration rate at any age.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. There was insufficient evidence that aiming for a lower goal of 130/80 mm Hg (as in the JNC 7 recommendations) had any beneficial effect on cardiovascular, cerebrovascular, or mortality outcomes compared with 140/90 mm Hg, and there was moderate-quality evidence showing that treatment to lower goal (< 130/80 mm Hg) did not slow the progression of chronic kidney disease any better than a goal of less than 140/90 mm Hg. (One study that did find better renal outcomes with a lower blood pressure goal was a post hoc analysis of the Modification of Diet in Renal Disease study data in patients with proteinuria of more than 3 g per day.12)

We believe that decisions should be individualized regarding goal blood pressures and pharmacologic therapy in patients with chronic kidney disease and proteinuria, who may benefit from lower blood pressure goals (<130/80 mm Hg), based on low-level evidence.13,14 Risks and benefits should also be weighed in considering the blood pressure goal in the elderly with chronic kidney disease, taking into account functional status, comorbidities, and level of proteinuria.

 

 

Recommendation 5: < 140/90 for people with diabetes

In patients with diabetes who are age 18 and older, JNC 8 says to start drug treatment at a systolic pressure of 140 mm Hg or higher or diastolic pressure of 90 mm Hg or higher, and treat to goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg and a diastolic pressure of less than 90 mm Hg.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. Moderate-quality evidence showed cardiovascular, cerebrovascular, and mortality outcome benefits with treatment to a systolic goal of less than 150 mm Hg in patients with diabetes and hypertension.

The panel found no randomized controlled trials that compared a treatment goal of less than 140 mm Hg with one of less than 150 mm Hg for outcome benefits, but decided to base its recommendations on the results of the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes—Blood-pressure-lowering Arm (ACCORD-BP) trial.15 The control group in this trial had a goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg and had similar outcomes compared with a lower goal.

The panel found no evidence to support a lower blood pressure goal (< 130/80) as in JNC 7. ACCORD-BP showed no differences in outcomes with a systolic goal lower than 140 mm Hg vs lower than 120 mm Hg except for a small reduction in stroke, and the risks of trying to achieve intensive lowering of blood pressure may outweigh the benefit of a small reduction in stroke.12 There was no evidence for a goal diastolic pressure below 80 mm Hg.

Recommendation 6: In nonblack patients, start with a thiazide-type diuretic, calcium channel blocker, ACE inhibitor, or ARB

In the general nonblack population, including those with diabetes, initial drug treatment should include a thiazide-type diuretic, calcium channel blocker, ACE inhibitor, or ARB.

Strength of recommendation—moderate (grade B).

Comments. All these drug classes had comparable outcome benefits in terms of rates of death, cardiovascular disease, cerebrovascular disease, and kidney disease, but not heart failure. For improving heart failure outcomes, thiazide-type diuretics are better than ACE inhibitors, which in turn are better than calcium channel blockers.

Thiazide-type diuretics (eg, hydrochlorothiazide, chlorthalidone, and indapamide) were recommended as first-line therapy for most patients in JNC 7, but they no longer carry this preferred status in JNC 8. In addition, the panel did not address preferential use of chlorthalidone as opposed to hydrochlorothiazide, or the use of spironolactone in resistant hypertension.

The panel did not recommend beta-blockers as first-line therapy because there were no differences in outcomes (or insufficient evidence) compared with the above medication classes; additionally, the Losartan Intervention for Endpoint Reduction in Hypertension study16 reported a higher incidence of stroke with a beta-blocker than with an ARB. However, JNC 8 did not consider randomized controlled trials in specific nonhypertensive populations such as patients with coronary artery disease or heart failure. We believe decisions should be individualized as to the use of beta-blockers in these two conditions.

The panel recommended the same approach in patients with diabetes, as there were no differences in major cardiovascular or cerebrovascular outcomes compared with the general population.

Recommendation 7: In black patients, start with a thiazide-type diuretic or calcium channel blocker

In the general black population, including those with diabetes, JNC 8 recommends starting drug treatment with a thiazide-type diuretic or a calcium channel blocker.

Strength of recommendation—moderate (grade B) for the general black population; weak (grade C) for blacks with diabetes.

Comments. In the black subgroup in the Antihypertensive and Lipid-Lowering Treatment to Prevent Heart Attack trial (ALLHAT),17 a thiazide-type diuretic (chlorthalidone) was better than an ACE inhibitor (lisinopril) in terms of cerebrovascular, heart failure, and composite outcomes, but similar for mortality rates and cardiovascular, and kidney outcomes. Also in this subgroup, a calcium channel blocker (amlodipine) was better than the ACE inhibitor for cerebrovascular outcomes (there was a 51% higher rate of stroke with the ACE inhibitor as initial therapy than with the calcium channel blocker); the ACE inhibitor was also less effective in reducing blood pressure in blacks than the calcium channel blocker.

For improving heart failure outcomes, the thiazide-type diuretic was better than the ACE inhibitor, which in turn was better than the calcium channel blocker.

Evidence for black patients with diabetes (graded as weak) was extrapolated from ALLHAT, in which 46% had diabetes.17 We would consider using an ACE inhibitor or ARB in this population on an individual basis, especially if the patient had proteinuria.

Recommendation 8: ACEs and ARBs for chronic kidney disease

In patients age 18 and older with chronic kidney disease, irrespective of race, diabetes, or proteinuria, initial or add-on drug treatment should include an ACE inhibitor or ARB to improve kidney outcomes.

Strength of recommendation—moderate (grade B).

Comments. Treatment with an ACE inhibitor or ARB improves kidney outcomes in patients with chronic kidney disease. But in this population, these drugs are no more beneficial than calcium channel blockers or beta-blockers in terms of cardiovascular outcomes.

No randomized controlled trial has compared ACE inhibitors and ARBs for cardiovascular outcomes in chronic kidney disease, and these drugs have similar effects on kidney outcomes.

The panel did not make any recommendations about direct renin inhibitors, as there were no eligible studies demonstrating benefits on cardiovascular or kidney outcomes.

In black patients with chronic kidney disease and proteinuria, the panel recommended initial therapy with an ACE inhibitor or ARB to slow progression to end-stage renal disease (contrast with Recommendation 7).

In black patients with chronic kidney disease and no proteinuria, the panel recommended choosing from a thiazide-type diuretic, calcium channel blocker, ACE inhibitor, or ARB. If an ACE inhibitor or ARB is not used as initial therapy, then one can be added on as a second-line medication (contrast with Recommendation 7).

The panel found no evidence to support this recommendation in people over age 75 and noted that although an ACE inhibitor or ARB may be beneficial in this group, a thiazide-type diuretic or calcium channel blocker can be considered.

Recommendation 9: If not at goal, step up

The main objective of pharmacologic treatment of hypertension is to attain and maintain the goal blood pressure. Lifestyle interventions should be maintained throughout treatment (Table 1). Medications can be initiated and titrated according to any of three strategies used in the randomized controlled trials selected by the panel (detailed below). Do not use an ACE inhibitor and ARB together in same patient.

If blood pressure is not at goal using all medication classes as in Recommendation 6 (ie, the triple combination of a thiazide-type diuretic, calcium channel blocker, and either an ACE inhibitor or an ARB), if there is a contraindication to any of these medication classes, or if there is need to use more than three medications to reach the goal, drugs from other classes can be used.

Referral to a hypertension specialist may be indicated for patients who are not at goal using the above strategy or for whom additional clinical consultation is needed.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. Blood pressure should be monitored and assessed regularly, treatment adjusted as needed, and lifestyle modifications encouraged.

The panel did not recommend any monitoring schedule before or after goal blood pressure is achieved, and this should be individualized.

 

 

ADDITIONAL TOPICS IN JNC 8

A supplemental report covered some additional topics for which formal evidence review was not conducted but which the panel considered important.

Measuring and monitoring blood pressure

The panel recommended measuring the blood pressure with an automated oscillometric device that is properly calibrated and validated, or carefully measuring it manually.

Blood pressure should be measured in a quiet and relaxed environment with the patient seated comfortably for at least 5 minutes in a chair (rather than on an examination table) with feet flat on the floor, back supported, and arm supported at heart level. Blood pressure should be taken on the bare upper arm with an appropriate-sized cuff whose bladder encircles at least 80% of the mid-upper arm circumference, and patients should avoid caffeine, smoking, and physical activity for at least 30 minutes before measurement. In addition, patients should be asked about the need to empty the bladder (and encouraged to do so if they have to).

To establish the diagnosis of hypertension and to assess whether blood pressure goals are being met, two or three measurements should be taken at each visit as outlined above, and the average recorded.

At the first visit, blood pressure should be measured in both arms, and the arm with the higher pressure should be used for subsequent measurements.

Appropriate dosing of antihypertensive medications

Dosing should be individualized for each patient, but in general, target doses can be achieved within 2 to 4 weeks, and generally should not take longer than 2 months.

In general, to minimize potential adverse effects, treatment is started at a lower dose than the target dose and is then titrated up. This is especially important in older patients and patients on multiple medications with other comorbidities, and if two antihypertensive medications are being started simultaneously.

The panel reviewed evidence-based dosing of antihypertensive medications that were shown to improve cardiovascular outcomes from the studies that were selected for review. Hydrochlorothiazide gets a special mention: although doses up to 100 mg were used in some studies, the panel recommended an evidence-based dose of 25 or 50 mg daily to balance efficacy and safety.

Three strategies for dosing antihypertensive medications that were used in the selected randomized controlled trials were provided. These strategies were not compared with each other, nor is it known if one is better than the others in terms of health outcomes. In all cases, avoid combining an ACE inhibitor and an ARB.

  • Start one drug from the four classes in Recommendation 6, titrate to the maximum dose, then add a second drug and titrate, then add a third drug and titrate to achieve the goal blood pressure.
  • Start one drug from the four classes in Recommendation 6 and add a second drug before increasing the initial drug to its maximal dose. Titrate both to maximal doses, and add a third drug if needed and titrate to achieve the goal blood pressure.
  • Start with two drugs at the same time from the four classes in Recommendation 6, either as separate pills or in a fixed-dose combination. Add a third drug if needed to achieve the goal blood pressure.

Lifestyle modification

The panel did not extensively review the evidence for lifestyle modification but endorsed the recommendations of the Lifestyle Work Group, which was convened by the NHLBI to focus on the effects of diet and physical activity on cardiovascular disease risk factors.18

Diet. The Lifestyle Work Group recommends combining the Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension (DASH) diet with reduced sodium intake, as there is evidence of a greater blood-pressure-lowering effect when the two are combined. The effect on blood pressure is independent of changes in weight.

The Lifestyle Work Group recommends consuming no more than 2,400 mg of sodium per day, noting that limiting intake to 1,500 mg can result in even greater reduction in blood pressure, and that even without achieving these goals, reducing sodium intake by at least 1,000 mg per day lowers blood pressure.

Physical activity. The Lifestyle Work Group recommends moderate to vigorous physical activity for approximately 160 minutes per week (three to four sessions a week, lasting an average of 40 minutes per session).

Weight loss. The Lifestyle Work Group did not review the blood-pressure-lowering effect of weight loss in those who are overweight or obese. The JNC 8 panel endorsed maintaining a healthy weight in controlling blood pressure.

Alcohol intake received no specific recommendations in JNC 8.

JNC 8 IN PERSPECTIVE

JNC 8 takes a rigorous, evidence-based approach and focuses on a few key questions. Thus, it is very different from the earlier reports: it has a narrower focus and does not address the full range of issues related to hypertension.

Strengths of JNC 8

The panel followed a rigorous process of review and evaluation of evidence from randomized controlled trials, adhering closely to standards set by the Institute of Medicine for guideline development. In contrast, JNC 7 relied on consensus and expert opinion.

The JNC 8 guidelines aim to simplify recommendations, with only two goals to remember: treat to lower than 150/90 mm Hg in patients age 60 and older, and lower than 140/90 mm Hg for everybody else. The initial drug regimen was simplified as well, with any of four choices for initial therapy in nonblacks and two in blacks.

Relaxing the blood pressure goals in elderly patients (although a cutoff of age 60 vs age 80 is likely to be debated) will also allay concerns about overtreating hypertension and causing adverse events in this population that is particularly susceptible to orthostatic changes and is at increased risk of falls.

 

 

Limitations and concerns

While the evidence-based nature of the recommendations is a strength, information from observational studies, systematic reviews, and meta-analyses was not incorporated into the formulation of these guidelines. This limits the available evidence, reflected in the fact that despite an extensive attempt to provide recommendations based on good evidence, five of the 10 recommendations (including the corollary recommendation) are still based on expert consensus opinion. Comparing and combining studies from different time periods is also problematic because of different methods of conducting clinical trials and analysis, and also because clinical care in a different period may differ from current standard practices.

Blood pressure targets in some subgroups are not clearly addressed, including those with proteinuria and with a history of stroke. Peterson et al,19 in an editorial accompanying the JNC 8 publication, commented on the need for larger randomized controlled trials to compare different blood pressure thresholds in various patient populations.

Some health care providers will likely be concerned that relaxing blood pressure goals could lead to higher real-world blood pressures, eventually leading to adverse cardiovascular outcomes, particularly on a population level. This is akin to the “speed limit rule”—people are more likely to hover above target, no matter what the target is.

In another editorial, Sox20 raised concerns about the external review process, ie, that the guidelines were not published in draft form to solicit public comment. Additionally, although the recommendations underwent extensive review, they were not endorsed by the specialty societies that the NHLBI designated to develop guidelines. In its defense, however, the JNC 8 panel has offered to share records of the review process on request, and this should serve to increase confidence in the review process.

The original literature search was limited to studies published through December 2009, which is more than 4 years before the publication of the recommendations. Although a bridge search was conducted until August 2013 to identify additional studies, this search used different inclusion criteria than the original criteria.

With its narrow focus, JNC 8 does not address many relevant issues. The American Society of Hypertension/International Society of Hypertension guidelines, published around the same time that the JNC 8 report was released, provide a more comprehensive review that will be of practical use for health care providers in the community.10

Ambulatory blood pressure monitoring is increasingly being used in clinical practice to detect white coat hypertension and, in many cases, to assess hypertension that is resistant to medications. It has also been shown to have better prognostic value in predicting cardiovascular risk and progression of kidney disease than office blood pressures.21,22 The UK National Institute of Health and Care Excellence guideline recommends ambulatory monitoring for the diagnosis of hypertension.23 However, JNC 8 did not provide specific recommendations for the use of this technology. Additionally, the JNC 8 evidence review is based on studies that used office blood pressure readings, and the recommendations are not necessarily applicable to measurements obtained by ambulatory monitoring.

Other topics covered in JNC 7 but not in JNC 8 include:

  • Definitions and stages of hypertension (which remain the same)
  • Initial treatment of stage 2 hypertension with two medications
  • The J-curve phenomenon
  • Preferred medications for patients with coronary artery disease or congestive heart failure
  • A detailed list of oral antihypertensive agents—JNC 8 confines itself to the drugs and doses used in randomized controlled trials
  • Patient evaluation
  • Secondary hypertension
  • Resistant hypertension
  • Adherence issues.

Contrast with other guidelines

While the goal of these recommendations is to make treatment standards more understandable and uniform, contrasting recommendations on blood pressure goals and medications from various groups muddy the waters. Other groups that have issued hypertension guidelines in recent years include:

  • The American Diabetes Association24
  • The American Society of Hypertension and the International Society of Hypertension10
  • The European Society of Hypertension and the European Society of Cardiology25
  • The Canadian Hypertension Education Program26
  • The Kidney Disease: Improving Global Outcomes initiative14
  • The National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence (UK)23
  • The International Society on Hypertension in Blacks27
  • The American Heart Association, the American College of Cardiology, and the US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.28

Future directions

Despite the emphasis on making treatment decisions on an individual basis and using guidelines only as a framework for a safe direction in managing difficult clinical scenarios, guideline recommendations are increasingly being used to assess provider performance and quality of care, and so they assume even more importance in the current health care environment. As specialty organizations review and decide whether to endorse the JNC 8 recommendations, reconciling seemingly disparate recommendations from various groups is needed to send a clear and concise message to practitioners taking care of patients with high blood pressure.

Although a daunting task, integrating guidelines on hypertension management with other cardiovascular risk guidelines (eg, cholesterol, obesity) with assessment of overall cardiovascular risk profile would likely help in developing a more effective cardiovascular prevention strategy.

Despite the panel’s best efforts at providing evidence-based recommendations, many of the recommendations are based on expert opinion, reflecting the need for larger well-conducted studies. It is hoped that ongoing studies such as the Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial29 will provide more clarity about blood pressure goals, especially in the elderly.

Final thoughts

Guidelines are not rules, and while they provide a framework by synthesizing the best available evidence, any treatment plan should be formulated on the basis of individual patient characteristics, including comorbidities, lifestyle factors, medication side effects, patient preferences, cost issues, and adherence.

References
  1. James PA, Oparil S, Carter BL, et al. 2014 Evidence-based guideline for the management of high blood pressure in adults: report from the panel members appointed to the Eighth Joint National Committee (JNC 8). JAMA 2013; doi: 10.1001/jama.2013.284427.
  2. Chobanian AV, Bakris GL, Black HR, et al; National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure; National High Blood Pressure Education Program Coordinating Committee. The seventh report of the Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure: the JNC 7 report. JAMA 2003; 289: 2560–2572. Erratum in JAMA 2003; 290:197.
  3. Gibbons GH, Harold JG, Jessup M, Robertson RM, Oetgen WJ. The next steps in developing clinical practice guidelines for prevention. J Am Coll Cardiol 2013; 62:13991400.
  4. Gibbons GH, Shurin SB, Mensah GA, Lauer MS. Refocusing the agenda on cardiovascular guidelines: an announcement from the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute. J Am Coll Cardiol 2013; 62:13961398.
  5. Lewington S, Clarke R, Qizilbash N, Peto R, Collins R; Prospective Studies Collaboration. Age-specific relevance of usual blood pressure to vascular mortality: a meta-analysis of individual data for one million adults in 61 prospective studies. Lancet 2002; 360:19031913. Erratum in: Lancet 2003; 361:1060.
  6. Institute of Medicine. Clinical Practice Guidelines We Can Trust. Washington, DC: National Academies Press; 2011. http://www.iom.edu/Reports/2011/Clinical-Practice-Guide-lines-We-Can-Trust.aspx. Accessed February 4, 2014.
  7. JATOS Study Group. Principal results of the Japanese Trial To Assess Optimal Systolic Blood Pressure in Elderly Hypertensive Patients (JATOS). Hypertens Res 2008; 31:21152127.
  8. Ogihara T, Saruta T, Rakugi H, et al; Valsartan in Elderly Isolated Systolic Hypertension Study Group. Target blood pressure for treatment of isolated systolic hypertension in the elderly: valsartan in elderly isolated systolic hypertension study. Hypertension 2010; 56:196202.
  9. Beckett NS, Peters R, Fletcher AE, et al; HYVET Study Group. Treatment of hypertension in patients 80 years of age or older. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:18871898.
  10. Weber MA, Schiffrin EL, White WB, et al. Clinical practice guidelines for the management of hypertension in the community: a statement by the American Society of Hypertension and the International Society of Hypertension. J Clin Hypertens (Greenwich) 2014; 16:1426.
  11. Wright JT, Fine LJ, Lackland DT, Ogedegbe G, Dennison Himmelfarb CR. Evidence supporting a systolic blood pressure goal of less than 150 mm Hg in patients aged 60 years or older: the minority view. Ann Intern Med 2014 Jan 14. [Epub ahead of print]
  12. Klahr S, Levey AS, Beck GJ, et al. The effects of dietary protein restriction and blood-pressure control on the progression of chronic renal disease. Modification of Diet in Renal Disease Study Group. N Engl J Med 1994; 330:877884.
  13. Upadhyay A, Earley A, Haynes SM, Uhlig K. Systematic review: blood pressure target in chronic kidney disease and proteinuria as an effect modifier. Ann Intern Med 2011; 154:541548.
  14. Kidney Disease: Improving Global Outcomes (KDIGO) Blood Pressure Work Group. KDIGO clinical practice guideline for the management of blood pressure in chronic kidney disease. Kidney Int Suppl 2012; 2:337414.
  15. Cushman WC, Evans GW, Byington RP, et al; ACCORD Study Group. Effects of intensive blood-pressure control in type 2 diabetes mellitus. N Engl J Med 2010; 362:15751585.
  16. Dahlöf B, Devereux RB, Kjeldsen SE, et al; LIFE Study Group. Cardiovascular morbidity and mortality in the Losartan Intervention For Endpoint Reduction in Hypertension study (LIFE): a randomised trial against atenolol. Lancet 2002; 359:9951003.
  17. Antihypertensive and Lipid-Lowering Treatment to Prevent Heart Attack Trial Collaborative Research Group. Diuretic versus alpha-blocker as first-step antihypertensive therapy: final results from the Antihypertensive and Lipid-Lowering Treatment to Prevent Heart Attack Trial (ALLHAT). Hypertension 2003; 42:239246.
  18. Eckel RH, Jakicic JM, Ard JD, et al. 2013 AHA/ACC guideline on lifestyle management to reduce cardiovascular risk: a report of the American College of Cardiology/American Heart Association Task Force on Practice Guidelines. Circulation 2013 Nov 12. [Epub ahead of print]
  19. Peterson ED, Gaziano JM, Greenland P. Recommendations for treating hypertension: what are the right goals and purposes? JAMA Editorial. Published online December 18, 2013. doi: 10.1001/jama.2013.284430.
  20. Sox HC. Assessing the trustworthiness of the guideline for management of high blood pressure in adults (editorial). JAMA. Published online December 18, 2013. doi: 10.1001/jama.2013.284430.
  21. Dolan E, Stanton A, Thijs L, et al. Superiority of ambulatory over clinic blood pressure measurement in predicting mortality: the Dublin outcome study. Hypertension 2005; 46:156161.
  22. Agarwal R, Andersen MJ. Prognostic importance of ambulatory blood pressure recordings in patients with chronic kidney disease. Kidney Int 2006; 69:11751180.
  23. National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence. Hypertension (CG127). http://publications.nice.org.uk/hypertension-cg127. Accessed February 4, 2014.
  24. American Diabetes Association. Standards of medical care in diabetes – 2013. Diabetes Care 2013; 36(suppl 1):S11S66.
  25. Mancia G, Fagard R, Narkiewicz K, et al. 2013 ESH/ESC practice guidelines for the management of arterial hypertension. Blood Press 2013 Dec 20. [Epub ahead of print]
  26. Hypertension without compelling indications: 2013 CHEP recommendations. Hypertension Canada website. http://www.hypertension.ca/hypertension-without-compelling-indications. Accessed February 4, 2014.
  27. Flack JM, Sica DA, Bakris G, et al; International Society on Hypertension in Blacks. Management of high blood pressure in blacks: an update of the International Society on Hypertension in Blacks consensus statement. Hypertension 2010; 56:780800.
  28. Go AS, Bauman M, King SM, et al. An effective approach to high blood pressure control: a science advisory from the American Heart Association, the American College of Cardiology, and the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Hypertension 2013 Nov 15.
  29. Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial (SPRINT). http://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT01206062. Accessed February 4, 2014.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

George Thomas, MD, MPH
Department of Nephrology and Hypertension, Glickman Urological and Kidney Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Mehdi H. Shishehbor, DO, PhD, MPH
Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Heart and Vascular Institute, Cleveland Clinic

David Brill, DO
Medicine Institute, Cleveland Clinic Rocky River-Beachcliff Family Medicine; Clinical Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Joseph V. Nally, MD
Director, Center for Chronic Kidney Disease, Department of Nephrology and Hypertension, Glickman Urological and Kidney Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Clinical Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Address: George Thomas, MD, Department of Nephrology and Hypertension, Q7, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; e-mail [email protected]

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 81(3)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
178-188
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

George Thomas, MD, MPH
Department of Nephrology and Hypertension, Glickman Urological and Kidney Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Mehdi H. Shishehbor, DO, PhD, MPH
Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Heart and Vascular Institute, Cleveland Clinic

David Brill, DO
Medicine Institute, Cleveland Clinic Rocky River-Beachcliff Family Medicine; Clinical Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Joseph V. Nally, MD
Director, Center for Chronic Kidney Disease, Department of Nephrology and Hypertension, Glickman Urological and Kidney Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Clinical Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Address: George Thomas, MD, Department of Nephrology and Hypertension, Q7, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; e-mail [email protected]

Author and Disclosure Information

George Thomas, MD, MPH
Department of Nephrology and Hypertension, Glickman Urological and Kidney Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Mehdi H. Shishehbor, DO, PhD, MPH
Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Heart and Vascular Institute, Cleveland Clinic

David Brill, DO
Medicine Institute, Cleveland Clinic Rocky River-Beachcliff Family Medicine; Clinical Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Joseph V. Nally, MD
Director, Center for Chronic Kidney Disease, Department of Nephrology and Hypertension, Glickman Urological and Kidney Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Clinical Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Address: George Thomas, MD, Department of Nephrology and Hypertension, Q7, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; e-mail [email protected]

Article PDF
Article PDF

The report of the panel appointed to the eighth Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure (JNC 8),1 published in December 2013 after considerable delay, contains some important changes from earlier guidelines from this group.2 For example:

  • The blood pressure goal has been changed to less than 150/90 mm Hg in people age 60 and older. Formerly, the goal was less than 140/90 mm Hg.
  • The goal has been changed to less than 140/90 mm Hg in all others, including people with diabetes mellitus and chronic kidney disease. Formerly, those two groups had a goal of less than 130/80 mm Hg.
  • The initial choice of therapy can be from any of four classes of drugs: thiazide-type diuretics, calcium channel blockers, angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors, or angiotensin receptor blockers (ARBs). Formerly, the list also contained beta-blockers. Also, thiazide-type diuretics have lost their “preferred” status.

The new guidelines are evidence-based and are intended to simplify the way that hypertension is managed. Below, we summarize them—how they were developed, their strengths and limitations, and the main changes from earlier JNC reports.

WHOSE GUIDELINES ARE THESE?

The JNC has issued guidelines for managing hypertension since 1976, traditionally sanctioned by the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (NHLBI) of the National Institutes of Health. The guidelines have generally been updated every 4 to 5 years, with the last update, JNC 7,2 published in 2003.

The JNC 8 panel, consisting of 17 members, was commissioned by the NHLBI in 2008. However, in June 2013, the NHLBI announced it was withdrawing from guideline development and was delegating it to selected specialty organizations.3,4 In the interest of bringing the already delayed guidelines to the public in a timely manner, the JNC 8 panel decided to pursue publication independently and submitted the report to a medical journal. It is therefore not an official NHLBI-sanctioned report.

Here, we will refer to the new guidelines as “JNC 8,” but they are officially from “panel members appointed to the Eighth Joint National Committee (JNC 8).”

THREE QUESTIONS THAT GUIDED THE GUIDELINES

Epidemiologic studies clearly show a close relationship between blood pressure and the risk of heart disease, stroke, and kidney disease, these risks being lowest at a blood pressure of around 115/75 mm Hg.5 However, clinical trials have failed to show any evidence to justify treatment with antihypertensive medications to such a low level once hypertension has been diagnosed.

Patients and health care providers thus face questions about when to begin treatment, how low to aim for, and which antihypertensive medications to use. The JNC 8 panel focused on these three questions, believing them to be of greatest relevance to primary care providers.

A RIGOROUS PROCESS OF EVIDENCE REVIEW AND GUIDELINE DEVELOPMENT

The JNC 8 panel followed the guideline-development pathway outlined by the Institute of Medicine report, Clinical Practice Guidelines We Can Trust.6

Studies published from January 1966 through December 2009 that met specified criteria were selected for evidence review. Specifically, the studies had to be randomized controlled trials—no observational studies, systematic reviews, or meta-analyses, which were allowed in the JNC 7 report—with sample sizes of more than 100. Follow-up had to be for more than 1 year. Participants had to be age 18 or older and have hypertension—studies with patients with normal blood pressure or prehypertension were excluded. Health outcomes had to be reported, ie, “hard” end points such as rates of death, myocardial infarction, heart failure, hospitalization for heart failure, stroke, revascularization, and end-stage renal disease. Post hoc analyses were not allowed. The studies had to be rated by the NHLBI’s standardized quality rating tool as “good” (which has the least risk of bias, with valid results) or “fair (which is susceptible to some bias, but not enough to invalidate the results).

Subsequently, another search was conducted for relevant studies published from December 2009 through August 2013. In addition to meeting all the other criteria, this bridging search further restricted selection to major multicenter studies with sample sizes of more than 2,000.

An external methodology team performed the initial literature review and summarized the data. The JNC panel then crafted evidence statements and clinical recommendations using the evidence quality rating and grading systems developed by the NHLBI. In January 2013, the NHLBI submitted the guidelines for external review by individual reviewers with expertise in hypertension and to federal agencies, and a revised document was framed based on their comments and suggestions.

The evidence statements are detailed in an online 300-page supplemental review, and the panel members have indicated that reviewer comments and responses from the presubmission review process will be made available on request.

NINE RECOMMENDATIONS AND ONE COROLLARY

The panel made nine recommendations and one corollary recommendation based on a review of the evidence. Of the 10 total recommendations, five are based on expert opinion. Another two were rated as “moderate” in strength, one was “weak,” and only two were rated as “strong” (ie, based on high-quality evidence).

 

 

Recommendation 1: < 150/90 for those 60 and older

In the general population age 60 and older, the JNC 8 recommends starting drug treatment if the systolic pressure is 150 mm Hg or higher or if the diastolic pressure is 90 mm Hg or higher, and aiming for a systolic goal of less than 150 mm Hg and a diastolic goal of less than 90 mm Hg.

Strength of recommendation—strong (grade A).

Comments. Of all the recommendations, this one will probably have the greatest impact on clinical practice. Consider a frail 70-year-old patient at risk of falls who is taking two antihypertensive medications and whose blood pressure is 148/85 mm Hg. This level would have been considered too high under JNC 7 but is now acceptable, and the patient’s therapy does not have to be escalated.

The age cutoff of 60 years for this recommendation is debatable. The Japanese Trial to Assess Optimal Systolic Blood Pressure in Elderly Hypertensive Patients (JATOS)7 included patients ages 60 to 85 (mean age 74) and found no difference in outcomes comparing a goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg (this group achieved a mean systolic pressure of 135.9 mm Hg) and a goal systolic pressure of 140 to 160 mm Hg (achieved systolic pressure 145.6 mm Hg).

Similarly, the Valsartan in Elderly Isolated Systolic Hypertension (VALISH) trial8 included patients ages 70 to 84 (mean age 76.1) and found no difference in outcomes between a goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg (achieved systolic pressure 136.6 mm Hg) and a goal of 140 to 150 mm Hg (achieved systolic pressure 142 mm Hg).

The Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial (HYVET)9 found lower rates of stroke, death, and heart failure in patients age 80 and older when their systolic pressure was less than 150 mm Hg.

While these trials support a goal pressure of less than 150 mm Hg in the elderly, it is unclear whether this goal should be applied beginning at age 60. Other guidelines, including those recently released jointly by the American Society of Hypertension and the International Society of Hypertension, recommend a systolic goal of less than 150 mm Hg in people age 80 and older—not age 60.10

The recommendation for a goal systolic pressure of less than 150 mm Hg in people age 60 and older was not unanimous; some panel members recommended continuing the JNC 7 goal of less than 140 mm Hg based on expert opinion, as they believed that the evidence was insufficient, especially in high-risk subgroups such as black people and those with cerebrovascular disease and other risk factors.

A subsequent minority report from five panel members discusses in more detail why they believe the systolic target should be kept lower than 140 mm Hg in patients age 60 or older until the risks and benefits of a higher target become clearer.11

Corollary recommendation: No need to down-titrate if lower than 140

In the general population age 60 and older, dosages do not have to be adjusted downward if the patient’s systolic pressure is already lower than 140 mm Hg and treatment is well tolerated without adverse effects on health or quality of life.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. In the studies that supported a systolic goal lower than 150 mm Hg, many participants actually achieved a systolic pressure lower than 140 mm Hg without any adverse events. Trials that showed no benefit from a systolic goal lower than 140 mm Hg were graded as lower in quality. Thus, the possibility remains that a systolic goal lower than 140 mm Hg could have a clinically important benefit. Therefore, medications do not have to be adjusted so that blood pressure can “ride up.”

For example, therapy does not need to be down-titrated in a 65-year-old patient whose blood pressure is 138/85 mm Hg on two medications that he or she is tolerating well. On the other hand, based on Recommendation 1, therapy can be down-titrated in a 65-year-old whose pressure is 138/85 mm Hg on four medications that are causing side effects.

Recommendation 2: Diastolic < 90 for those younger than 60

In the general population younger than 60 years, JNC 8 recommends starting pharmacologic treatment if the diastolic pressure is 90 mm Hg or higher and aiming for a goal diastolic pressure of less than 90 mm Hg.

Strength of recommendation—strong (grade A) for ages 30 to 59, expert opinion (grade E) for ages 18 to 29.

Comments. The panel found no evidence to support a goal diastolic pressure of 80 mm Hg or less (or 85 mm Hg or less) compared with 90 mm Hg or less in this population.

It is reasonable to aim for the same diastolic goal in younger persons (under age 30), given the higher prevalence of diastolic hypertension in younger people.

Recommendation 3: Systolic < 140 for those younger than 60

In the general population younger than 60 years, we should start drug treatment at a systolic pressure of 140 mm Hg or higher and treat to a systolic goal of less than 140 mm Hg.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. Although evidence was insufficient to support this recommendation, the panel decided to keep the same systolic goal for people younger than 60 as in the JNC 7 recommendations, for the following two reasons.

First, there is strong evidence supporting a diastolic goal of less than 90 mm Hg in this population (Recommendation 2), and many study participants who achieved a diastolic pressure lower than 90 mm Hg also achieved a systolic pressure lower than 140. Therefore, it is not possible to tease out whether the outcome benefits were due to lower systolic pressure or to lower diastolic pressure, or to both.

Second, the panel believed the guidelines would be simpler to implement if the systolic goals were the same in the general population as in those with chronic kidney disease or diabetes (see below).

Recommendation 4: < 140/90 in chronic kidney disease

In patients age 18 and older with chronic kidney disease, JNC 8 recommends starting drug treatment at a systolic pressure of 140 mm Hg or higher or a diastolic pressure of 90 mm Hg or higher and treating to a goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg and a diastolic pressure of less than 90 mm Hg.

Chronic kidney disease is defined as either a glomerular filtration rate (estimated or measured) less than 60 mL/min/1.73 m2 in people up to age 70, or albuminuria, defined as more than 30 mg/g of creatinine at any glomerular filtration rate at any age.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. There was insufficient evidence that aiming for a lower goal of 130/80 mm Hg (as in the JNC 7 recommendations) had any beneficial effect on cardiovascular, cerebrovascular, or mortality outcomes compared with 140/90 mm Hg, and there was moderate-quality evidence showing that treatment to lower goal (< 130/80 mm Hg) did not slow the progression of chronic kidney disease any better than a goal of less than 140/90 mm Hg. (One study that did find better renal outcomes with a lower blood pressure goal was a post hoc analysis of the Modification of Diet in Renal Disease study data in patients with proteinuria of more than 3 g per day.12)

We believe that decisions should be individualized regarding goal blood pressures and pharmacologic therapy in patients with chronic kidney disease and proteinuria, who may benefit from lower blood pressure goals (<130/80 mm Hg), based on low-level evidence.13,14 Risks and benefits should also be weighed in considering the blood pressure goal in the elderly with chronic kidney disease, taking into account functional status, comorbidities, and level of proteinuria.

 

 

Recommendation 5: < 140/90 for people with diabetes

In patients with diabetes who are age 18 and older, JNC 8 says to start drug treatment at a systolic pressure of 140 mm Hg or higher or diastolic pressure of 90 mm Hg or higher, and treat to goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg and a diastolic pressure of less than 90 mm Hg.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. Moderate-quality evidence showed cardiovascular, cerebrovascular, and mortality outcome benefits with treatment to a systolic goal of less than 150 mm Hg in patients with diabetes and hypertension.

The panel found no randomized controlled trials that compared a treatment goal of less than 140 mm Hg with one of less than 150 mm Hg for outcome benefits, but decided to base its recommendations on the results of the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes—Blood-pressure-lowering Arm (ACCORD-BP) trial.15 The control group in this trial had a goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg and had similar outcomes compared with a lower goal.

The panel found no evidence to support a lower blood pressure goal (< 130/80) as in JNC 7. ACCORD-BP showed no differences in outcomes with a systolic goal lower than 140 mm Hg vs lower than 120 mm Hg except for a small reduction in stroke, and the risks of trying to achieve intensive lowering of blood pressure may outweigh the benefit of a small reduction in stroke.12 There was no evidence for a goal diastolic pressure below 80 mm Hg.

Recommendation 6: In nonblack patients, start with a thiazide-type diuretic, calcium channel blocker, ACE inhibitor, or ARB

In the general nonblack population, including those with diabetes, initial drug treatment should include a thiazide-type diuretic, calcium channel blocker, ACE inhibitor, or ARB.

Strength of recommendation—moderate (grade B).

Comments. All these drug classes had comparable outcome benefits in terms of rates of death, cardiovascular disease, cerebrovascular disease, and kidney disease, but not heart failure. For improving heart failure outcomes, thiazide-type diuretics are better than ACE inhibitors, which in turn are better than calcium channel blockers.

Thiazide-type diuretics (eg, hydrochlorothiazide, chlorthalidone, and indapamide) were recommended as first-line therapy for most patients in JNC 7, but they no longer carry this preferred status in JNC 8. In addition, the panel did not address preferential use of chlorthalidone as opposed to hydrochlorothiazide, or the use of spironolactone in resistant hypertension.

The panel did not recommend beta-blockers as first-line therapy because there were no differences in outcomes (or insufficient evidence) compared with the above medication classes; additionally, the Losartan Intervention for Endpoint Reduction in Hypertension study16 reported a higher incidence of stroke with a beta-blocker than with an ARB. However, JNC 8 did not consider randomized controlled trials in specific nonhypertensive populations such as patients with coronary artery disease or heart failure. We believe decisions should be individualized as to the use of beta-blockers in these two conditions.

The panel recommended the same approach in patients with diabetes, as there were no differences in major cardiovascular or cerebrovascular outcomes compared with the general population.

Recommendation 7: In black patients, start with a thiazide-type diuretic or calcium channel blocker

In the general black population, including those with diabetes, JNC 8 recommends starting drug treatment with a thiazide-type diuretic or a calcium channel blocker.

Strength of recommendation—moderate (grade B) for the general black population; weak (grade C) for blacks with diabetes.

Comments. In the black subgroup in the Antihypertensive and Lipid-Lowering Treatment to Prevent Heart Attack trial (ALLHAT),17 a thiazide-type diuretic (chlorthalidone) was better than an ACE inhibitor (lisinopril) in terms of cerebrovascular, heart failure, and composite outcomes, but similar for mortality rates and cardiovascular, and kidney outcomes. Also in this subgroup, a calcium channel blocker (amlodipine) was better than the ACE inhibitor for cerebrovascular outcomes (there was a 51% higher rate of stroke with the ACE inhibitor as initial therapy than with the calcium channel blocker); the ACE inhibitor was also less effective in reducing blood pressure in blacks than the calcium channel blocker.

For improving heart failure outcomes, the thiazide-type diuretic was better than the ACE inhibitor, which in turn was better than the calcium channel blocker.

Evidence for black patients with diabetes (graded as weak) was extrapolated from ALLHAT, in which 46% had diabetes.17 We would consider using an ACE inhibitor or ARB in this population on an individual basis, especially if the patient had proteinuria.

Recommendation 8: ACEs and ARBs for chronic kidney disease

In patients age 18 and older with chronic kidney disease, irrespective of race, diabetes, or proteinuria, initial or add-on drug treatment should include an ACE inhibitor or ARB to improve kidney outcomes.

Strength of recommendation—moderate (grade B).

Comments. Treatment with an ACE inhibitor or ARB improves kidney outcomes in patients with chronic kidney disease. But in this population, these drugs are no more beneficial than calcium channel blockers or beta-blockers in terms of cardiovascular outcomes.

No randomized controlled trial has compared ACE inhibitors and ARBs for cardiovascular outcomes in chronic kidney disease, and these drugs have similar effects on kidney outcomes.

The panel did not make any recommendations about direct renin inhibitors, as there were no eligible studies demonstrating benefits on cardiovascular or kidney outcomes.

In black patients with chronic kidney disease and proteinuria, the panel recommended initial therapy with an ACE inhibitor or ARB to slow progression to end-stage renal disease (contrast with Recommendation 7).

In black patients with chronic kidney disease and no proteinuria, the panel recommended choosing from a thiazide-type diuretic, calcium channel blocker, ACE inhibitor, or ARB. If an ACE inhibitor or ARB is not used as initial therapy, then one can be added on as a second-line medication (contrast with Recommendation 7).

The panel found no evidence to support this recommendation in people over age 75 and noted that although an ACE inhibitor or ARB may be beneficial in this group, a thiazide-type diuretic or calcium channel blocker can be considered.

Recommendation 9: If not at goal, step up

The main objective of pharmacologic treatment of hypertension is to attain and maintain the goal blood pressure. Lifestyle interventions should be maintained throughout treatment (Table 1). Medications can be initiated and titrated according to any of three strategies used in the randomized controlled trials selected by the panel (detailed below). Do not use an ACE inhibitor and ARB together in same patient.

If blood pressure is not at goal using all medication classes as in Recommendation 6 (ie, the triple combination of a thiazide-type diuretic, calcium channel blocker, and either an ACE inhibitor or an ARB), if there is a contraindication to any of these medication classes, or if there is need to use more than three medications to reach the goal, drugs from other classes can be used.

Referral to a hypertension specialist may be indicated for patients who are not at goal using the above strategy or for whom additional clinical consultation is needed.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. Blood pressure should be monitored and assessed regularly, treatment adjusted as needed, and lifestyle modifications encouraged.

The panel did not recommend any monitoring schedule before or after goal blood pressure is achieved, and this should be individualized.

 

 

ADDITIONAL TOPICS IN JNC 8

A supplemental report covered some additional topics for which formal evidence review was not conducted but which the panel considered important.

Measuring and monitoring blood pressure

The panel recommended measuring the blood pressure with an automated oscillometric device that is properly calibrated and validated, or carefully measuring it manually.

Blood pressure should be measured in a quiet and relaxed environment with the patient seated comfortably for at least 5 minutes in a chair (rather than on an examination table) with feet flat on the floor, back supported, and arm supported at heart level. Blood pressure should be taken on the bare upper arm with an appropriate-sized cuff whose bladder encircles at least 80% of the mid-upper arm circumference, and patients should avoid caffeine, smoking, and physical activity for at least 30 minutes before measurement. In addition, patients should be asked about the need to empty the bladder (and encouraged to do so if they have to).

To establish the diagnosis of hypertension and to assess whether blood pressure goals are being met, two or three measurements should be taken at each visit as outlined above, and the average recorded.

At the first visit, blood pressure should be measured in both arms, and the arm with the higher pressure should be used for subsequent measurements.

Appropriate dosing of antihypertensive medications

Dosing should be individualized for each patient, but in general, target doses can be achieved within 2 to 4 weeks, and generally should not take longer than 2 months.

In general, to minimize potential adverse effects, treatment is started at a lower dose than the target dose and is then titrated up. This is especially important in older patients and patients on multiple medications with other comorbidities, and if two antihypertensive medications are being started simultaneously.

The panel reviewed evidence-based dosing of antihypertensive medications that were shown to improve cardiovascular outcomes from the studies that were selected for review. Hydrochlorothiazide gets a special mention: although doses up to 100 mg were used in some studies, the panel recommended an evidence-based dose of 25 or 50 mg daily to balance efficacy and safety.

Three strategies for dosing antihypertensive medications that were used in the selected randomized controlled trials were provided. These strategies were not compared with each other, nor is it known if one is better than the others in terms of health outcomes. In all cases, avoid combining an ACE inhibitor and an ARB.

  • Start one drug from the four classes in Recommendation 6, titrate to the maximum dose, then add a second drug and titrate, then add a third drug and titrate to achieve the goal blood pressure.
  • Start one drug from the four classes in Recommendation 6 and add a second drug before increasing the initial drug to its maximal dose. Titrate both to maximal doses, and add a third drug if needed and titrate to achieve the goal blood pressure.
  • Start with two drugs at the same time from the four classes in Recommendation 6, either as separate pills or in a fixed-dose combination. Add a third drug if needed to achieve the goal blood pressure.

Lifestyle modification

The panel did not extensively review the evidence for lifestyle modification but endorsed the recommendations of the Lifestyle Work Group, which was convened by the NHLBI to focus on the effects of diet and physical activity on cardiovascular disease risk factors.18

Diet. The Lifestyle Work Group recommends combining the Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension (DASH) diet with reduced sodium intake, as there is evidence of a greater blood-pressure-lowering effect when the two are combined. The effect on blood pressure is independent of changes in weight.

The Lifestyle Work Group recommends consuming no more than 2,400 mg of sodium per day, noting that limiting intake to 1,500 mg can result in even greater reduction in blood pressure, and that even without achieving these goals, reducing sodium intake by at least 1,000 mg per day lowers blood pressure.

Physical activity. The Lifestyle Work Group recommends moderate to vigorous physical activity for approximately 160 minutes per week (three to four sessions a week, lasting an average of 40 minutes per session).

Weight loss. The Lifestyle Work Group did not review the blood-pressure-lowering effect of weight loss in those who are overweight or obese. The JNC 8 panel endorsed maintaining a healthy weight in controlling blood pressure.

Alcohol intake received no specific recommendations in JNC 8.

JNC 8 IN PERSPECTIVE

JNC 8 takes a rigorous, evidence-based approach and focuses on a few key questions. Thus, it is very different from the earlier reports: it has a narrower focus and does not address the full range of issues related to hypertension.

Strengths of JNC 8

The panel followed a rigorous process of review and evaluation of evidence from randomized controlled trials, adhering closely to standards set by the Institute of Medicine for guideline development. In contrast, JNC 7 relied on consensus and expert opinion.

The JNC 8 guidelines aim to simplify recommendations, with only two goals to remember: treat to lower than 150/90 mm Hg in patients age 60 and older, and lower than 140/90 mm Hg for everybody else. The initial drug regimen was simplified as well, with any of four choices for initial therapy in nonblacks and two in blacks.

Relaxing the blood pressure goals in elderly patients (although a cutoff of age 60 vs age 80 is likely to be debated) will also allay concerns about overtreating hypertension and causing adverse events in this population that is particularly susceptible to orthostatic changes and is at increased risk of falls.

 

 

Limitations and concerns

While the evidence-based nature of the recommendations is a strength, information from observational studies, systematic reviews, and meta-analyses was not incorporated into the formulation of these guidelines. This limits the available evidence, reflected in the fact that despite an extensive attempt to provide recommendations based on good evidence, five of the 10 recommendations (including the corollary recommendation) are still based on expert consensus opinion. Comparing and combining studies from different time periods is also problematic because of different methods of conducting clinical trials and analysis, and also because clinical care in a different period may differ from current standard practices.

Blood pressure targets in some subgroups are not clearly addressed, including those with proteinuria and with a history of stroke. Peterson et al,19 in an editorial accompanying the JNC 8 publication, commented on the need for larger randomized controlled trials to compare different blood pressure thresholds in various patient populations.

Some health care providers will likely be concerned that relaxing blood pressure goals could lead to higher real-world blood pressures, eventually leading to adverse cardiovascular outcomes, particularly on a population level. This is akin to the “speed limit rule”—people are more likely to hover above target, no matter what the target is.

In another editorial, Sox20 raised concerns about the external review process, ie, that the guidelines were not published in draft form to solicit public comment. Additionally, although the recommendations underwent extensive review, they were not endorsed by the specialty societies that the NHLBI designated to develop guidelines. In its defense, however, the JNC 8 panel has offered to share records of the review process on request, and this should serve to increase confidence in the review process.

The original literature search was limited to studies published through December 2009, which is more than 4 years before the publication of the recommendations. Although a bridge search was conducted until August 2013 to identify additional studies, this search used different inclusion criteria than the original criteria.

With its narrow focus, JNC 8 does not address many relevant issues. The American Society of Hypertension/International Society of Hypertension guidelines, published around the same time that the JNC 8 report was released, provide a more comprehensive review that will be of practical use for health care providers in the community.10

Ambulatory blood pressure monitoring is increasingly being used in clinical practice to detect white coat hypertension and, in many cases, to assess hypertension that is resistant to medications. It has also been shown to have better prognostic value in predicting cardiovascular risk and progression of kidney disease than office blood pressures.21,22 The UK National Institute of Health and Care Excellence guideline recommends ambulatory monitoring for the diagnosis of hypertension.23 However, JNC 8 did not provide specific recommendations for the use of this technology. Additionally, the JNC 8 evidence review is based on studies that used office blood pressure readings, and the recommendations are not necessarily applicable to measurements obtained by ambulatory monitoring.

Other topics covered in JNC 7 but not in JNC 8 include:

  • Definitions and stages of hypertension (which remain the same)
  • Initial treatment of stage 2 hypertension with two medications
  • The J-curve phenomenon
  • Preferred medications for patients with coronary artery disease or congestive heart failure
  • A detailed list of oral antihypertensive agents—JNC 8 confines itself to the drugs and doses used in randomized controlled trials
  • Patient evaluation
  • Secondary hypertension
  • Resistant hypertension
  • Adherence issues.

Contrast with other guidelines

While the goal of these recommendations is to make treatment standards more understandable and uniform, contrasting recommendations on blood pressure goals and medications from various groups muddy the waters. Other groups that have issued hypertension guidelines in recent years include:

  • The American Diabetes Association24
  • The American Society of Hypertension and the International Society of Hypertension10
  • The European Society of Hypertension and the European Society of Cardiology25
  • The Canadian Hypertension Education Program26
  • The Kidney Disease: Improving Global Outcomes initiative14
  • The National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence (UK)23
  • The International Society on Hypertension in Blacks27
  • The American Heart Association, the American College of Cardiology, and the US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.28

Future directions

Despite the emphasis on making treatment decisions on an individual basis and using guidelines only as a framework for a safe direction in managing difficult clinical scenarios, guideline recommendations are increasingly being used to assess provider performance and quality of care, and so they assume even more importance in the current health care environment. As specialty organizations review and decide whether to endorse the JNC 8 recommendations, reconciling seemingly disparate recommendations from various groups is needed to send a clear and concise message to practitioners taking care of patients with high blood pressure.

Although a daunting task, integrating guidelines on hypertension management with other cardiovascular risk guidelines (eg, cholesterol, obesity) with assessment of overall cardiovascular risk profile would likely help in developing a more effective cardiovascular prevention strategy.

Despite the panel’s best efforts at providing evidence-based recommendations, many of the recommendations are based on expert opinion, reflecting the need for larger well-conducted studies. It is hoped that ongoing studies such as the Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial29 will provide more clarity about blood pressure goals, especially in the elderly.

Final thoughts

Guidelines are not rules, and while they provide a framework by synthesizing the best available evidence, any treatment plan should be formulated on the basis of individual patient characteristics, including comorbidities, lifestyle factors, medication side effects, patient preferences, cost issues, and adherence.

The report of the panel appointed to the eighth Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure (JNC 8),1 published in December 2013 after considerable delay, contains some important changes from earlier guidelines from this group.2 For example:

  • The blood pressure goal has been changed to less than 150/90 mm Hg in people age 60 and older. Formerly, the goal was less than 140/90 mm Hg.
  • The goal has been changed to less than 140/90 mm Hg in all others, including people with diabetes mellitus and chronic kidney disease. Formerly, those two groups had a goal of less than 130/80 mm Hg.
  • The initial choice of therapy can be from any of four classes of drugs: thiazide-type diuretics, calcium channel blockers, angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors, or angiotensin receptor blockers (ARBs). Formerly, the list also contained beta-blockers. Also, thiazide-type diuretics have lost their “preferred” status.

The new guidelines are evidence-based and are intended to simplify the way that hypertension is managed. Below, we summarize them—how they were developed, their strengths and limitations, and the main changes from earlier JNC reports.

WHOSE GUIDELINES ARE THESE?

The JNC has issued guidelines for managing hypertension since 1976, traditionally sanctioned by the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (NHLBI) of the National Institutes of Health. The guidelines have generally been updated every 4 to 5 years, with the last update, JNC 7,2 published in 2003.

The JNC 8 panel, consisting of 17 members, was commissioned by the NHLBI in 2008. However, in June 2013, the NHLBI announced it was withdrawing from guideline development and was delegating it to selected specialty organizations.3,4 In the interest of bringing the already delayed guidelines to the public in a timely manner, the JNC 8 panel decided to pursue publication independently and submitted the report to a medical journal. It is therefore not an official NHLBI-sanctioned report.

Here, we will refer to the new guidelines as “JNC 8,” but they are officially from “panel members appointed to the Eighth Joint National Committee (JNC 8).”

THREE QUESTIONS THAT GUIDED THE GUIDELINES

Epidemiologic studies clearly show a close relationship between blood pressure and the risk of heart disease, stroke, and kidney disease, these risks being lowest at a blood pressure of around 115/75 mm Hg.5 However, clinical trials have failed to show any evidence to justify treatment with antihypertensive medications to such a low level once hypertension has been diagnosed.

Patients and health care providers thus face questions about when to begin treatment, how low to aim for, and which antihypertensive medications to use. The JNC 8 panel focused on these three questions, believing them to be of greatest relevance to primary care providers.

A RIGOROUS PROCESS OF EVIDENCE REVIEW AND GUIDELINE DEVELOPMENT

The JNC 8 panel followed the guideline-development pathway outlined by the Institute of Medicine report, Clinical Practice Guidelines We Can Trust.6

Studies published from January 1966 through December 2009 that met specified criteria were selected for evidence review. Specifically, the studies had to be randomized controlled trials—no observational studies, systematic reviews, or meta-analyses, which were allowed in the JNC 7 report—with sample sizes of more than 100. Follow-up had to be for more than 1 year. Participants had to be age 18 or older and have hypertension—studies with patients with normal blood pressure or prehypertension were excluded. Health outcomes had to be reported, ie, “hard” end points such as rates of death, myocardial infarction, heart failure, hospitalization for heart failure, stroke, revascularization, and end-stage renal disease. Post hoc analyses were not allowed. The studies had to be rated by the NHLBI’s standardized quality rating tool as “good” (which has the least risk of bias, with valid results) or “fair (which is susceptible to some bias, but not enough to invalidate the results).

Subsequently, another search was conducted for relevant studies published from December 2009 through August 2013. In addition to meeting all the other criteria, this bridging search further restricted selection to major multicenter studies with sample sizes of more than 2,000.

An external methodology team performed the initial literature review and summarized the data. The JNC panel then crafted evidence statements and clinical recommendations using the evidence quality rating and grading systems developed by the NHLBI. In January 2013, the NHLBI submitted the guidelines for external review by individual reviewers with expertise in hypertension and to federal agencies, and a revised document was framed based on their comments and suggestions.

The evidence statements are detailed in an online 300-page supplemental review, and the panel members have indicated that reviewer comments and responses from the presubmission review process will be made available on request.

NINE RECOMMENDATIONS AND ONE COROLLARY

The panel made nine recommendations and one corollary recommendation based on a review of the evidence. Of the 10 total recommendations, five are based on expert opinion. Another two were rated as “moderate” in strength, one was “weak,” and only two were rated as “strong” (ie, based on high-quality evidence).

 

 

Recommendation 1: < 150/90 for those 60 and older

In the general population age 60 and older, the JNC 8 recommends starting drug treatment if the systolic pressure is 150 mm Hg or higher or if the diastolic pressure is 90 mm Hg or higher, and aiming for a systolic goal of less than 150 mm Hg and a diastolic goal of less than 90 mm Hg.

Strength of recommendation—strong (grade A).

Comments. Of all the recommendations, this one will probably have the greatest impact on clinical practice. Consider a frail 70-year-old patient at risk of falls who is taking two antihypertensive medications and whose blood pressure is 148/85 mm Hg. This level would have been considered too high under JNC 7 but is now acceptable, and the patient’s therapy does not have to be escalated.

The age cutoff of 60 years for this recommendation is debatable. The Japanese Trial to Assess Optimal Systolic Blood Pressure in Elderly Hypertensive Patients (JATOS)7 included patients ages 60 to 85 (mean age 74) and found no difference in outcomes comparing a goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg (this group achieved a mean systolic pressure of 135.9 mm Hg) and a goal systolic pressure of 140 to 160 mm Hg (achieved systolic pressure 145.6 mm Hg).

Similarly, the Valsartan in Elderly Isolated Systolic Hypertension (VALISH) trial8 included patients ages 70 to 84 (mean age 76.1) and found no difference in outcomes between a goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg (achieved systolic pressure 136.6 mm Hg) and a goal of 140 to 150 mm Hg (achieved systolic pressure 142 mm Hg).

The Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial (HYVET)9 found lower rates of stroke, death, and heart failure in patients age 80 and older when their systolic pressure was less than 150 mm Hg.

While these trials support a goal pressure of less than 150 mm Hg in the elderly, it is unclear whether this goal should be applied beginning at age 60. Other guidelines, including those recently released jointly by the American Society of Hypertension and the International Society of Hypertension, recommend a systolic goal of less than 150 mm Hg in people age 80 and older—not age 60.10

The recommendation for a goal systolic pressure of less than 150 mm Hg in people age 60 and older was not unanimous; some panel members recommended continuing the JNC 7 goal of less than 140 mm Hg based on expert opinion, as they believed that the evidence was insufficient, especially in high-risk subgroups such as black people and those with cerebrovascular disease and other risk factors.

A subsequent minority report from five panel members discusses in more detail why they believe the systolic target should be kept lower than 140 mm Hg in patients age 60 or older until the risks and benefits of a higher target become clearer.11

Corollary recommendation: No need to down-titrate if lower than 140

In the general population age 60 and older, dosages do not have to be adjusted downward if the patient’s systolic pressure is already lower than 140 mm Hg and treatment is well tolerated without adverse effects on health or quality of life.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. In the studies that supported a systolic goal lower than 150 mm Hg, many participants actually achieved a systolic pressure lower than 140 mm Hg without any adverse events. Trials that showed no benefit from a systolic goal lower than 140 mm Hg were graded as lower in quality. Thus, the possibility remains that a systolic goal lower than 140 mm Hg could have a clinically important benefit. Therefore, medications do not have to be adjusted so that blood pressure can “ride up.”

For example, therapy does not need to be down-titrated in a 65-year-old patient whose blood pressure is 138/85 mm Hg on two medications that he or she is tolerating well. On the other hand, based on Recommendation 1, therapy can be down-titrated in a 65-year-old whose pressure is 138/85 mm Hg on four medications that are causing side effects.

Recommendation 2: Diastolic < 90 for those younger than 60

In the general population younger than 60 years, JNC 8 recommends starting pharmacologic treatment if the diastolic pressure is 90 mm Hg or higher and aiming for a goal diastolic pressure of less than 90 mm Hg.

Strength of recommendation—strong (grade A) for ages 30 to 59, expert opinion (grade E) for ages 18 to 29.

Comments. The panel found no evidence to support a goal diastolic pressure of 80 mm Hg or less (or 85 mm Hg or less) compared with 90 mm Hg or less in this population.

It is reasonable to aim for the same diastolic goal in younger persons (under age 30), given the higher prevalence of diastolic hypertension in younger people.

Recommendation 3: Systolic < 140 for those younger than 60

In the general population younger than 60 years, we should start drug treatment at a systolic pressure of 140 mm Hg or higher and treat to a systolic goal of less than 140 mm Hg.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. Although evidence was insufficient to support this recommendation, the panel decided to keep the same systolic goal for people younger than 60 as in the JNC 7 recommendations, for the following two reasons.

First, there is strong evidence supporting a diastolic goal of less than 90 mm Hg in this population (Recommendation 2), and many study participants who achieved a diastolic pressure lower than 90 mm Hg also achieved a systolic pressure lower than 140. Therefore, it is not possible to tease out whether the outcome benefits were due to lower systolic pressure or to lower diastolic pressure, or to both.

Second, the panel believed the guidelines would be simpler to implement if the systolic goals were the same in the general population as in those with chronic kidney disease or diabetes (see below).

Recommendation 4: < 140/90 in chronic kidney disease

In patients age 18 and older with chronic kidney disease, JNC 8 recommends starting drug treatment at a systolic pressure of 140 mm Hg or higher or a diastolic pressure of 90 mm Hg or higher and treating to a goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg and a diastolic pressure of less than 90 mm Hg.

Chronic kidney disease is defined as either a glomerular filtration rate (estimated or measured) less than 60 mL/min/1.73 m2 in people up to age 70, or albuminuria, defined as more than 30 mg/g of creatinine at any glomerular filtration rate at any age.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. There was insufficient evidence that aiming for a lower goal of 130/80 mm Hg (as in the JNC 7 recommendations) had any beneficial effect on cardiovascular, cerebrovascular, or mortality outcomes compared with 140/90 mm Hg, and there was moderate-quality evidence showing that treatment to lower goal (< 130/80 mm Hg) did not slow the progression of chronic kidney disease any better than a goal of less than 140/90 mm Hg. (One study that did find better renal outcomes with a lower blood pressure goal was a post hoc analysis of the Modification of Diet in Renal Disease study data in patients with proteinuria of more than 3 g per day.12)

We believe that decisions should be individualized regarding goal blood pressures and pharmacologic therapy in patients with chronic kidney disease and proteinuria, who may benefit from lower blood pressure goals (<130/80 mm Hg), based on low-level evidence.13,14 Risks and benefits should also be weighed in considering the blood pressure goal in the elderly with chronic kidney disease, taking into account functional status, comorbidities, and level of proteinuria.

 

 

Recommendation 5: < 140/90 for people with diabetes

In patients with diabetes who are age 18 and older, JNC 8 says to start drug treatment at a systolic pressure of 140 mm Hg or higher or diastolic pressure of 90 mm Hg or higher, and treat to goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg and a diastolic pressure of less than 90 mm Hg.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. Moderate-quality evidence showed cardiovascular, cerebrovascular, and mortality outcome benefits with treatment to a systolic goal of less than 150 mm Hg in patients with diabetes and hypertension.

The panel found no randomized controlled trials that compared a treatment goal of less than 140 mm Hg with one of less than 150 mm Hg for outcome benefits, but decided to base its recommendations on the results of the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes—Blood-pressure-lowering Arm (ACCORD-BP) trial.15 The control group in this trial had a goal systolic pressure of less than 140 mm Hg and had similar outcomes compared with a lower goal.

The panel found no evidence to support a lower blood pressure goal (< 130/80) as in JNC 7. ACCORD-BP showed no differences in outcomes with a systolic goal lower than 140 mm Hg vs lower than 120 mm Hg except for a small reduction in stroke, and the risks of trying to achieve intensive lowering of blood pressure may outweigh the benefit of a small reduction in stroke.12 There was no evidence for a goal diastolic pressure below 80 mm Hg.

Recommendation 6: In nonblack patients, start with a thiazide-type diuretic, calcium channel blocker, ACE inhibitor, or ARB

In the general nonblack population, including those with diabetes, initial drug treatment should include a thiazide-type diuretic, calcium channel blocker, ACE inhibitor, or ARB.

Strength of recommendation—moderate (grade B).

Comments. All these drug classes had comparable outcome benefits in terms of rates of death, cardiovascular disease, cerebrovascular disease, and kidney disease, but not heart failure. For improving heart failure outcomes, thiazide-type diuretics are better than ACE inhibitors, which in turn are better than calcium channel blockers.

Thiazide-type diuretics (eg, hydrochlorothiazide, chlorthalidone, and indapamide) were recommended as first-line therapy for most patients in JNC 7, but they no longer carry this preferred status in JNC 8. In addition, the panel did not address preferential use of chlorthalidone as opposed to hydrochlorothiazide, or the use of spironolactone in resistant hypertension.

The panel did not recommend beta-blockers as first-line therapy because there were no differences in outcomes (or insufficient evidence) compared with the above medication classes; additionally, the Losartan Intervention for Endpoint Reduction in Hypertension study16 reported a higher incidence of stroke with a beta-blocker than with an ARB. However, JNC 8 did not consider randomized controlled trials in specific nonhypertensive populations such as patients with coronary artery disease or heart failure. We believe decisions should be individualized as to the use of beta-blockers in these two conditions.

The panel recommended the same approach in patients with diabetes, as there were no differences in major cardiovascular or cerebrovascular outcomes compared with the general population.

Recommendation 7: In black patients, start with a thiazide-type diuretic or calcium channel blocker

In the general black population, including those with diabetes, JNC 8 recommends starting drug treatment with a thiazide-type diuretic or a calcium channel blocker.

Strength of recommendation—moderate (grade B) for the general black population; weak (grade C) for blacks with diabetes.

Comments. In the black subgroup in the Antihypertensive and Lipid-Lowering Treatment to Prevent Heart Attack trial (ALLHAT),17 a thiazide-type diuretic (chlorthalidone) was better than an ACE inhibitor (lisinopril) in terms of cerebrovascular, heart failure, and composite outcomes, but similar for mortality rates and cardiovascular, and kidney outcomes. Also in this subgroup, a calcium channel blocker (amlodipine) was better than the ACE inhibitor for cerebrovascular outcomes (there was a 51% higher rate of stroke with the ACE inhibitor as initial therapy than with the calcium channel blocker); the ACE inhibitor was also less effective in reducing blood pressure in blacks than the calcium channel blocker.

For improving heart failure outcomes, the thiazide-type diuretic was better than the ACE inhibitor, which in turn was better than the calcium channel blocker.

Evidence for black patients with diabetes (graded as weak) was extrapolated from ALLHAT, in which 46% had diabetes.17 We would consider using an ACE inhibitor or ARB in this population on an individual basis, especially if the patient had proteinuria.

Recommendation 8: ACEs and ARBs for chronic kidney disease

In patients age 18 and older with chronic kidney disease, irrespective of race, diabetes, or proteinuria, initial or add-on drug treatment should include an ACE inhibitor or ARB to improve kidney outcomes.

Strength of recommendation—moderate (grade B).

Comments. Treatment with an ACE inhibitor or ARB improves kidney outcomes in patients with chronic kidney disease. But in this population, these drugs are no more beneficial than calcium channel blockers or beta-blockers in terms of cardiovascular outcomes.

No randomized controlled trial has compared ACE inhibitors and ARBs for cardiovascular outcomes in chronic kidney disease, and these drugs have similar effects on kidney outcomes.

The panel did not make any recommendations about direct renin inhibitors, as there were no eligible studies demonstrating benefits on cardiovascular or kidney outcomes.

In black patients with chronic kidney disease and proteinuria, the panel recommended initial therapy with an ACE inhibitor or ARB to slow progression to end-stage renal disease (contrast with Recommendation 7).

In black patients with chronic kidney disease and no proteinuria, the panel recommended choosing from a thiazide-type diuretic, calcium channel blocker, ACE inhibitor, or ARB. If an ACE inhibitor or ARB is not used as initial therapy, then one can be added on as a second-line medication (contrast with Recommendation 7).

The panel found no evidence to support this recommendation in people over age 75 and noted that although an ACE inhibitor or ARB may be beneficial in this group, a thiazide-type diuretic or calcium channel blocker can be considered.

Recommendation 9: If not at goal, step up

The main objective of pharmacologic treatment of hypertension is to attain and maintain the goal blood pressure. Lifestyle interventions should be maintained throughout treatment (Table 1). Medications can be initiated and titrated according to any of three strategies used in the randomized controlled trials selected by the panel (detailed below). Do not use an ACE inhibitor and ARB together in same patient.

If blood pressure is not at goal using all medication classes as in Recommendation 6 (ie, the triple combination of a thiazide-type diuretic, calcium channel blocker, and either an ACE inhibitor or an ARB), if there is a contraindication to any of these medication classes, or if there is need to use more than three medications to reach the goal, drugs from other classes can be used.

Referral to a hypertension specialist may be indicated for patients who are not at goal using the above strategy or for whom additional clinical consultation is needed.

Strength of recommendation—expert opinion (grade E).

Comments. Blood pressure should be monitored and assessed regularly, treatment adjusted as needed, and lifestyle modifications encouraged.

The panel did not recommend any monitoring schedule before or after goal blood pressure is achieved, and this should be individualized.

 

 

ADDITIONAL TOPICS IN JNC 8

A supplemental report covered some additional topics for which formal evidence review was not conducted but which the panel considered important.

Measuring and monitoring blood pressure

The panel recommended measuring the blood pressure with an automated oscillometric device that is properly calibrated and validated, or carefully measuring it manually.

Blood pressure should be measured in a quiet and relaxed environment with the patient seated comfortably for at least 5 minutes in a chair (rather than on an examination table) with feet flat on the floor, back supported, and arm supported at heart level. Blood pressure should be taken on the bare upper arm with an appropriate-sized cuff whose bladder encircles at least 80% of the mid-upper arm circumference, and patients should avoid caffeine, smoking, and physical activity for at least 30 minutes before measurement. In addition, patients should be asked about the need to empty the bladder (and encouraged to do so if they have to).

To establish the diagnosis of hypertension and to assess whether blood pressure goals are being met, two or three measurements should be taken at each visit as outlined above, and the average recorded.

At the first visit, blood pressure should be measured in both arms, and the arm with the higher pressure should be used for subsequent measurements.

Appropriate dosing of antihypertensive medications

Dosing should be individualized for each patient, but in general, target doses can be achieved within 2 to 4 weeks, and generally should not take longer than 2 months.

In general, to minimize potential adverse effects, treatment is started at a lower dose than the target dose and is then titrated up. This is especially important in older patients and patients on multiple medications with other comorbidities, and if two antihypertensive medications are being started simultaneously.

The panel reviewed evidence-based dosing of antihypertensive medications that were shown to improve cardiovascular outcomes from the studies that were selected for review. Hydrochlorothiazide gets a special mention: although doses up to 100 mg were used in some studies, the panel recommended an evidence-based dose of 25 or 50 mg daily to balance efficacy and safety.

Three strategies for dosing antihypertensive medications that were used in the selected randomized controlled trials were provided. These strategies were not compared with each other, nor is it known if one is better than the others in terms of health outcomes. In all cases, avoid combining an ACE inhibitor and an ARB.

  • Start one drug from the four classes in Recommendation 6, titrate to the maximum dose, then add a second drug and titrate, then add a third drug and titrate to achieve the goal blood pressure.
  • Start one drug from the four classes in Recommendation 6 and add a second drug before increasing the initial drug to its maximal dose. Titrate both to maximal doses, and add a third drug if needed and titrate to achieve the goal blood pressure.
  • Start with two drugs at the same time from the four classes in Recommendation 6, either as separate pills or in a fixed-dose combination. Add a third drug if needed to achieve the goal blood pressure.

Lifestyle modification

The panel did not extensively review the evidence for lifestyle modification but endorsed the recommendations of the Lifestyle Work Group, which was convened by the NHLBI to focus on the effects of diet and physical activity on cardiovascular disease risk factors.18

Diet. The Lifestyle Work Group recommends combining the Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension (DASH) diet with reduced sodium intake, as there is evidence of a greater blood-pressure-lowering effect when the two are combined. The effect on blood pressure is independent of changes in weight.

The Lifestyle Work Group recommends consuming no more than 2,400 mg of sodium per day, noting that limiting intake to 1,500 mg can result in even greater reduction in blood pressure, and that even without achieving these goals, reducing sodium intake by at least 1,000 mg per day lowers blood pressure.

Physical activity. The Lifestyle Work Group recommends moderate to vigorous physical activity for approximately 160 minutes per week (three to four sessions a week, lasting an average of 40 minutes per session).

Weight loss. The Lifestyle Work Group did not review the blood-pressure-lowering effect of weight loss in those who are overweight or obese. The JNC 8 panel endorsed maintaining a healthy weight in controlling blood pressure.

Alcohol intake received no specific recommendations in JNC 8.

JNC 8 IN PERSPECTIVE

JNC 8 takes a rigorous, evidence-based approach and focuses on a few key questions. Thus, it is very different from the earlier reports: it has a narrower focus and does not address the full range of issues related to hypertension.

Strengths of JNC 8

The panel followed a rigorous process of review and evaluation of evidence from randomized controlled trials, adhering closely to standards set by the Institute of Medicine for guideline development. In contrast, JNC 7 relied on consensus and expert opinion.

The JNC 8 guidelines aim to simplify recommendations, with only two goals to remember: treat to lower than 150/90 mm Hg in patients age 60 and older, and lower than 140/90 mm Hg for everybody else. The initial drug regimen was simplified as well, with any of four choices for initial therapy in nonblacks and two in blacks.

Relaxing the blood pressure goals in elderly patients (although a cutoff of age 60 vs age 80 is likely to be debated) will also allay concerns about overtreating hypertension and causing adverse events in this population that is particularly susceptible to orthostatic changes and is at increased risk of falls.

 

 

Limitations and concerns

While the evidence-based nature of the recommendations is a strength, information from observational studies, systematic reviews, and meta-analyses was not incorporated into the formulation of these guidelines. This limits the available evidence, reflected in the fact that despite an extensive attempt to provide recommendations based on good evidence, five of the 10 recommendations (including the corollary recommendation) are still based on expert consensus opinion. Comparing and combining studies from different time periods is also problematic because of different methods of conducting clinical trials and analysis, and also because clinical care in a different period may differ from current standard practices.

Blood pressure targets in some subgroups are not clearly addressed, including those with proteinuria and with a history of stroke. Peterson et al,19 in an editorial accompanying the JNC 8 publication, commented on the need for larger randomized controlled trials to compare different blood pressure thresholds in various patient populations.

Some health care providers will likely be concerned that relaxing blood pressure goals could lead to higher real-world blood pressures, eventually leading to adverse cardiovascular outcomes, particularly on a population level. This is akin to the “speed limit rule”—people are more likely to hover above target, no matter what the target is.

In another editorial, Sox20 raised concerns about the external review process, ie, that the guidelines were not published in draft form to solicit public comment. Additionally, although the recommendations underwent extensive review, they were not endorsed by the specialty societies that the NHLBI designated to develop guidelines. In its defense, however, the JNC 8 panel has offered to share records of the review process on request, and this should serve to increase confidence in the review process.

The original literature search was limited to studies published through December 2009, which is more than 4 years before the publication of the recommendations. Although a bridge search was conducted until August 2013 to identify additional studies, this search used different inclusion criteria than the original criteria.

With its narrow focus, JNC 8 does not address many relevant issues. The American Society of Hypertension/International Society of Hypertension guidelines, published around the same time that the JNC 8 report was released, provide a more comprehensive review that will be of practical use for health care providers in the community.10

Ambulatory blood pressure monitoring is increasingly being used in clinical practice to detect white coat hypertension and, in many cases, to assess hypertension that is resistant to medications. It has also been shown to have better prognostic value in predicting cardiovascular risk and progression of kidney disease than office blood pressures.21,22 The UK National Institute of Health and Care Excellence guideline recommends ambulatory monitoring for the diagnosis of hypertension.23 However, JNC 8 did not provide specific recommendations for the use of this technology. Additionally, the JNC 8 evidence review is based on studies that used office blood pressure readings, and the recommendations are not necessarily applicable to measurements obtained by ambulatory monitoring.

Other topics covered in JNC 7 but not in JNC 8 include:

  • Definitions and stages of hypertension (which remain the same)
  • Initial treatment of stage 2 hypertension with two medications
  • The J-curve phenomenon
  • Preferred medications for patients with coronary artery disease or congestive heart failure
  • A detailed list of oral antihypertensive agents—JNC 8 confines itself to the drugs and doses used in randomized controlled trials
  • Patient evaluation
  • Secondary hypertension
  • Resistant hypertension
  • Adherence issues.

Contrast with other guidelines

While the goal of these recommendations is to make treatment standards more understandable and uniform, contrasting recommendations on blood pressure goals and medications from various groups muddy the waters. Other groups that have issued hypertension guidelines in recent years include:

  • The American Diabetes Association24
  • The American Society of Hypertension and the International Society of Hypertension10
  • The European Society of Hypertension and the European Society of Cardiology25
  • The Canadian Hypertension Education Program26
  • The Kidney Disease: Improving Global Outcomes initiative14
  • The National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence (UK)23
  • The International Society on Hypertension in Blacks27
  • The American Heart Association, the American College of Cardiology, and the US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.28

Future directions

Despite the emphasis on making treatment decisions on an individual basis and using guidelines only as a framework for a safe direction in managing difficult clinical scenarios, guideline recommendations are increasingly being used to assess provider performance and quality of care, and so they assume even more importance in the current health care environment. As specialty organizations review and decide whether to endorse the JNC 8 recommendations, reconciling seemingly disparate recommendations from various groups is needed to send a clear and concise message to practitioners taking care of patients with high blood pressure.

Although a daunting task, integrating guidelines on hypertension management with other cardiovascular risk guidelines (eg, cholesterol, obesity) with assessment of overall cardiovascular risk profile would likely help in developing a more effective cardiovascular prevention strategy.

Despite the panel’s best efforts at providing evidence-based recommendations, many of the recommendations are based on expert opinion, reflecting the need for larger well-conducted studies. It is hoped that ongoing studies such as the Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial29 will provide more clarity about blood pressure goals, especially in the elderly.

Final thoughts

Guidelines are not rules, and while they provide a framework by synthesizing the best available evidence, any treatment plan should be formulated on the basis of individual patient characteristics, including comorbidities, lifestyle factors, medication side effects, patient preferences, cost issues, and adherence.

References
  1. James PA, Oparil S, Carter BL, et al. 2014 Evidence-based guideline for the management of high blood pressure in adults: report from the panel members appointed to the Eighth Joint National Committee (JNC 8). JAMA 2013; doi: 10.1001/jama.2013.284427.
  2. Chobanian AV, Bakris GL, Black HR, et al; National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure; National High Blood Pressure Education Program Coordinating Committee. The seventh report of the Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure: the JNC 7 report. JAMA 2003; 289: 2560–2572. Erratum in JAMA 2003; 290:197.
  3. Gibbons GH, Harold JG, Jessup M, Robertson RM, Oetgen WJ. The next steps in developing clinical practice guidelines for prevention. J Am Coll Cardiol 2013; 62:13991400.
  4. Gibbons GH, Shurin SB, Mensah GA, Lauer MS. Refocusing the agenda on cardiovascular guidelines: an announcement from the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute. J Am Coll Cardiol 2013; 62:13961398.
  5. Lewington S, Clarke R, Qizilbash N, Peto R, Collins R; Prospective Studies Collaboration. Age-specific relevance of usual blood pressure to vascular mortality: a meta-analysis of individual data for one million adults in 61 prospective studies. Lancet 2002; 360:19031913. Erratum in: Lancet 2003; 361:1060.
  6. Institute of Medicine. Clinical Practice Guidelines We Can Trust. Washington, DC: National Academies Press; 2011. http://www.iom.edu/Reports/2011/Clinical-Practice-Guide-lines-We-Can-Trust.aspx. Accessed February 4, 2014.
  7. JATOS Study Group. Principal results of the Japanese Trial To Assess Optimal Systolic Blood Pressure in Elderly Hypertensive Patients (JATOS). Hypertens Res 2008; 31:21152127.
  8. Ogihara T, Saruta T, Rakugi H, et al; Valsartan in Elderly Isolated Systolic Hypertension Study Group. Target blood pressure for treatment of isolated systolic hypertension in the elderly: valsartan in elderly isolated systolic hypertension study. Hypertension 2010; 56:196202.
  9. Beckett NS, Peters R, Fletcher AE, et al; HYVET Study Group. Treatment of hypertension in patients 80 years of age or older. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:18871898.
  10. Weber MA, Schiffrin EL, White WB, et al. Clinical practice guidelines for the management of hypertension in the community: a statement by the American Society of Hypertension and the International Society of Hypertension. J Clin Hypertens (Greenwich) 2014; 16:1426.
  11. Wright JT, Fine LJ, Lackland DT, Ogedegbe G, Dennison Himmelfarb CR. Evidence supporting a systolic blood pressure goal of less than 150 mm Hg in patients aged 60 years or older: the minority view. Ann Intern Med 2014 Jan 14. [Epub ahead of print]
  12. Klahr S, Levey AS, Beck GJ, et al. The effects of dietary protein restriction and blood-pressure control on the progression of chronic renal disease. Modification of Diet in Renal Disease Study Group. N Engl J Med 1994; 330:877884.
  13. Upadhyay A, Earley A, Haynes SM, Uhlig K. Systematic review: blood pressure target in chronic kidney disease and proteinuria as an effect modifier. Ann Intern Med 2011; 154:541548.
  14. Kidney Disease: Improving Global Outcomes (KDIGO) Blood Pressure Work Group. KDIGO clinical practice guideline for the management of blood pressure in chronic kidney disease. Kidney Int Suppl 2012; 2:337414.
  15. Cushman WC, Evans GW, Byington RP, et al; ACCORD Study Group. Effects of intensive blood-pressure control in type 2 diabetes mellitus. N Engl J Med 2010; 362:15751585.
  16. Dahlöf B, Devereux RB, Kjeldsen SE, et al; LIFE Study Group. Cardiovascular morbidity and mortality in the Losartan Intervention For Endpoint Reduction in Hypertension study (LIFE): a randomised trial against atenolol. Lancet 2002; 359:9951003.
  17. Antihypertensive and Lipid-Lowering Treatment to Prevent Heart Attack Trial Collaborative Research Group. Diuretic versus alpha-blocker as first-step antihypertensive therapy: final results from the Antihypertensive and Lipid-Lowering Treatment to Prevent Heart Attack Trial (ALLHAT). Hypertension 2003; 42:239246.
  18. Eckel RH, Jakicic JM, Ard JD, et al. 2013 AHA/ACC guideline on lifestyle management to reduce cardiovascular risk: a report of the American College of Cardiology/American Heart Association Task Force on Practice Guidelines. Circulation 2013 Nov 12. [Epub ahead of print]
  19. Peterson ED, Gaziano JM, Greenland P. Recommendations for treating hypertension: what are the right goals and purposes? JAMA Editorial. Published online December 18, 2013. doi: 10.1001/jama.2013.284430.
  20. Sox HC. Assessing the trustworthiness of the guideline for management of high blood pressure in adults (editorial). JAMA. Published online December 18, 2013. doi: 10.1001/jama.2013.284430.
  21. Dolan E, Stanton A, Thijs L, et al. Superiority of ambulatory over clinic blood pressure measurement in predicting mortality: the Dublin outcome study. Hypertension 2005; 46:156161.
  22. Agarwal R, Andersen MJ. Prognostic importance of ambulatory blood pressure recordings in patients with chronic kidney disease. Kidney Int 2006; 69:11751180.
  23. National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence. Hypertension (CG127). http://publications.nice.org.uk/hypertension-cg127. Accessed February 4, 2014.
  24. American Diabetes Association. Standards of medical care in diabetes – 2013. Diabetes Care 2013; 36(suppl 1):S11S66.
  25. Mancia G, Fagard R, Narkiewicz K, et al. 2013 ESH/ESC practice guidelines for the management of arterial hypertension. Blood Press 2013 Dec 20. [Epub ahead of print]
  26. Hypertension without compelling indications: 2013 CHEP recommendations. Hypertension Canada website. http://www.hypertension.ca/hypertension-without-compelling-indications. Accessed February 4, 2014.
  27. Flack JM, Sica DA, Bakris G, et al; International Society on Hypertension in Blacks. Management of high blood pressure in blacks: an update of the International Society on Hypertension in Blacks consensus statement. Hypertension 2010; 56:780800.
  28. Go AS, Bauman M, King SM, et al. An effective approach to high blood pressure control: a science advisory from the American Heart Association, the American College of Cardiology, and the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Hypertension 2013 Nov 15.
  29. Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial (SPRINT). http://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT01206062. Accessed February 4, 2014.
References
  1. James PA, Oparil S, Carter BL, et al. 2014 Evidence-based guideline for the management of high blood pressure in adults: report from the panel members appointed to the Eighth Joint National Committee (JNC 8). JAMA 2013; doi: 10.1001/jama.2013.284427.
  2. Chobanian AV, Bakris GL, Black HR, et al; National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure; National High Blood Pressure Education Program Coordinating Committee. The seventh report of the Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure: the JNC 7 report. JAMA 2003; 289: 2560–2572. Erratum in JAMA 2003; 290:197.
  3. Gibbons GH, Harold JG, Jessup M, Robertson RM, Oetgen WJ. The next steps in developing clinical practice guidelines for prevention. J Am Coll Cardiol 2013; 62:13991400.
  4. Gibbons GH, Shurin SB, Mensah GA, Lauer MS. Refocusing the agenda on cardiovascular guidelines: an announcement from the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute. J Am Coll Cardiol 2013; 62:13961398.
  5. Lewington S, Clarke R, Qizilbash N, Peto R, Collins R; Prospective Studies Collaboration. Age-specific relevance of usual blood pressure to vascular mortality: a meta-analysis of individual data for one million adults in 61 prospective studies. Lancet 2002; 360:19031913. Erratum in: Lancet 2003; 361:1060.
  6. Institute of Medicine. Clinical Practice Guidelines We Can Trust. Washington, DC: National Academies Press; 2011. http://www.iom.edu/Reports/2011/Clinical-Practice-Guide-lines-We-Can-Trust.aspx. Accessed February 4, 2014.
  7. JATOS Study Group. Principal results of the Japanese Trial To Assess Optimal Systolic Blood Pressure in Elderly Hypertensive Patients (JATOS). Hypertens Res 2008; 31:21152127.
  8. Ogihara T, Saruta T, Rakugi H, et al; Valsartan in Elderly Isolated Systolic Hypertension Study Group. Target blood pressure for treatment of isolated systolic hypertension in the elderly: valsartan in elderly isolated systolic hypertension study. Hypertension 2010; 56:196202.
  9. Beckett NS, Peters R, Fletcher AE, et al; HYVET Study Group. Treatment of hypertension in patients 80 years of age or older. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:18871898.
  10. Weber MA, Schiffrin EL, White WB, et al. Clinical practice guidelines for the management of hypertension in the community: a statement by the American Society of Hypertension and the International Society of Hypertension. J Clin Hypertens (Greenwich) 2014; 16:1426.
  11. Wright JT, Fine LJ, Lackland DT, Ogedegbe G, Dennison Himmelfarb CR. Evidence supporting a systolic blood pressure goal of less than 150 mm Hg in patients aged 60 years or older: the minority view. Ann Intern Med 2014 Jan 14. [Epub ahead of print]
  12. Klahr S, Levey AS, Beck GJ, et al. The effects of dietary protein restriction and blood-pressure control on the progression of chronic renal disease. Modification of Diet in Renal Disease Study Group. N Engl J Med 1994; 330:877884.
  13. Upadhyay A, Earley A, Haynes SM, Uhlig K. Systematic review: blood pressure target in chronic kidney disease and proteinuria as an effect modifier. Ann Intern Med 2011; 154:541548.
  14. Kidney Disease: Improving Global Outcomes (KDIGO) Blood Pressure Work Group. KDIGO clinical practice guideline for the management of blood pressure in chronic kidney disease. Kidney Int Suppl 2012; 2:337414.
  15. Cushman WC, Evans GW, Byington RP, et al; ACCORD Study Group. Effects of intensive blood-pressure control in type 2 diabetes mellitus. N Engl J Med 2010; 362:15751585.
  16. Dahlöf B, Devereux RB, Kjeldsen SE, et al; LIFE Study Group. Cardiovascular morbidity and mortality in the Losartan Intervention For Endpoint Reduction in Hypertension study (LIFE): a randomised trial against atenolol. Lancet 2002; 359:9951003.
  17. Antihypertensive and Lipid-Lowering Treatment to Prevent Heart Attack Trial Collaborative Research Group. Diuretic versus alpha-blocker as first-step antihypertensive therapy: final results from the Antihypertensive and Lipid-Lowering Treatment to Prevent Heart Attack Trial (ALLHAT). Hypertension 2003; 42:239246.
  18. Eckel RH, Jakicic JM, Ard JD, et al. 2013 AHA/ACC guideline on lifestyle management to reduce cardiovascular risk: a report of the American College of Cardiology/American Heart Association Task Force on Practice Guidelines. Circulation 2013 Nov 12. [Epub ahead of print]
  19. Peterson ED, Gaziano JM, Greenland P. Recommendations for treating hypertension: what are the right goals and purposes? JAMA Editorial. Published online December 18, 2013. doi: 10.1001/jama.2013.284430.
  20. Sox HC. Assessing the trustworthiness of the guideline for management of high blood pressure in adults (editorial). JAMA. Published online December 18, 2013. doi: 10.1001/jama.2013.284430.
  21. Dolan E, Stanton A, Thijs L, et al. Superiority of ambulatory over clinic blood pressure measurement in predicting mortality: the Dublin outcome study. Hypertension 2005; 46:156161.
  22. Agarwal R, Andersen MJ. Prognostic importance of ambulatory blood pressure recordings in patients with chronic kidney disease. Kidney Int 2006; 69:11751180.
  23. National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence. Hypertension (CG127). http://publications.nice.org.uk/hypertension-cg127. Accessed February 4, 2014.
  24. American Diabetes Association. Standards of medical care in diabetes – 2013. Diabetes Care 2013; 36(suppl 1):S11S66.
  25. Mancia G, Fagard R, Narkiewicz K, et al. 2013 ESH/ESC practice guidelines for the management of arterial hypertension. Blood Press 2013 Dec 20. [Epub ahead of print]
  26. Hypertension without compelling indications: 2013 CHEP recommendations. Hypertension Canada website. http://www.hypertension.ca/hypertension-without-compelling-indications. Accessed February 4, 2014.
  27. Flack JM, Sica DA, Bakris G, et al; International Society on Hypertension in Blacks. Management of high blood pressure in blacks: an update of the International Society on Hypertension in Blacks consensus statement. Hypertension 2010; 56:780800.
  28. Go AS, Bauman M, King SM, et al. An effective approach to high blood pressure control: a science advisory from the American Heart Association, the American College of Cardiology, and the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Hypertension 2013 Nov 15.
  29. Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial (SPRINT). http://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT01206062. Accessed February 4, 2014.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 81(3)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 81(3)
Page Number
178-188
Page Number
178-188
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
New hypertension guidelines: One size fits most?
Display Headline
New hypertension guidelines: One size fits most?
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • JNC 8 focuses on three main questions: when to begin treatment, how low to aim for, and which antihypertensive medications to use. It does not cover many topics that were included in JNC 7.
  • In patients age 60 or older, JNC 8 recommends starting antihypertensive treatment if the blood pressure is 150/90 mm Hg or higher, with a goal of less than 150/90.
  • For everyone else, including people with diabetes or chronic kidney disease, the threshold is 140/90 mm Hg, and the goal is less than 140/90.
  • The recommended classes of drugs for initial therapy in nonblack patients without chronic kidney disease are thiazide-type diuretics, calcium channel blockers, angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors, and angiotensin receptor blockers (ARBs), although the last two classes should not be used in combination.
  • For black patients, the initial classes of drugs are diuretics and calcium channel blockers; patients with chronic kidney disease should receive an ACE inhibitor or ARB.
Disallow All Ads
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media